TECHNICAL FILE

TECHNICAL GUIDANCE FOR EXCAVATION

SAFETY AND SHORING PRODUCTS
 MGF Engineering Centre,
Foundation House in Astley,
Manchester
TECHNICAL FILE
INTRODUCTION - QUICK RELEASE
PITCHING SHACKLES
1. ENGINEERING DESIGN - EXTRACTORS
- DRIVESAFE
2. BOX SYSTEMS PILING HAMMERS (EMVS)
DRAG BOXES AUGER
TRENCH BOXES
MANHOLE BOXES 7. SHORING SAFETY
HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX PRODUCTS
ALUMINIUM TRENCH BOXES EDGESAFE
UTILITY TRENCH BOXES ENDSAFE PANELS
KING POST AND PANELS LADDERSAFE
STAIRSAFE
3. WALERS AND STRUTS DAVITSAFE
WALERS AND STRUTS GANGWAY RAMP
ENDSAFE STRUTS ROAD PLATES
ALUMINIUM VERTISHORE
8. GRiPSHORE ®
4. HYDRAULIC BRACING GRiPSHORE® OVERVIEW
COMPATIBILITY GUIDE GRP SHEETS AND WALERS
MANHOLE BRACES GRP VERTISHORES
ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE GRP TRENCH BOX
203 UC BRACE GRP MODULAR BOX
203 UC+ BRACE GRP MINI TRENCH BOX
305 UC BRACE SPECIFICATION GUIDE
406 UC BRACE EDGESAFE-GRP
T700 BRACE EDGESAFE-MESH
ALUMINIUM HYDRAULIC
5. BRACING STRUTS CYLINDER EXTENSIONS
COMPATABILITY GUIDE GRP LADDERS
200 SERIES STRUT GRP ENDSAFE STRUTS
300 SERIES STRUT GRP BABYSHORE
400 SERIES STRUT LIFTING / HANDLING ACCESSORIES
600 SERIES STRUT
1000 SERIES STRUT 9. GRiPSHORE +
GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX
6. TRENCH SHEETS, SHEET GRP STACKSHORE
PILES AND ANCILLARIES
TRENCH SHEETS
10. CONCRETE PIPE AND
SHEET PILES
CULVERT EQUIPMENT
WALER AND TIE BACK SYSTEM PIPE LIFTER
TRENCH STRUTS CULVERT PULLERS
CONTENTS

TELESCOPIC / ACROW PROPS MANHOLE RING LIFTER

ANCILLARIES: MANHOLE SHUTTERS
- DRIVING CAPS
DEPOT LOCATIONS

CONTACT US [email protected] ISSUE 7

 CREATING SAFE WORKING ENVIRONMENTS
MGF provide specialist excavation safety solutions to the construction industry.
Our aim is to assist our customers in creating safe working environments for their
employees. We offer a wide range of shoring products including trench boxes, trench
sheets, hydraulic bracing, and struts as well as accompanying lifting and safety products
to ensure safe access and egress to excavations. We can also provide a range of structural
support solutions and offer a temporary works design service, carried out by our team
of highly qualified engineers to ensure risk managed, value driven solutions for our
INTRODUCTION

customers.

OUR VALUES
Our core values are engrained within our culture and give MGF its unique identity.
• Commitment to deliver exceptional customer service and support.
• Innovation in products, processes, service and support.
• Sustainability by adopting a responsible approach to business.

LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

OUR SERVICE
Our mission is to become the leading supplier of excavation safety products, structural
support solutions and lifting and safety products. With this comes an exceptional
customer service experience.
We provide national coverage through our network of strategically placed locations and
our in-house transport fleet vehicles gives us the flexibility to meet our customers' needs.
The hire and sale of our products is fully supported by our team of qualified engineers,
experienced technical sales representatives, hire desk and operational staff. Our depots
provide the focal point for service delivery.

WE CAN ASSIST WITH ALL ASPECTS OF YOUR REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING:

• Site visits to provide advice and guidance
• Assistance in the production of a design brief
• Temporary Works Design solutions
• Safe Systems of Work guidance for the installation of our products
• Provision of equipment demonstrations and training sessions
• Efficient delivery and collection of our equipment

INTRODUCTION

CONTACT US [email protected]
 Our Engineering Centre produce over
4000 temporary works designs per year
as well as managing Standard Solutions
ENGINEERING
DESIGN
SPECIALIST MAJOR
PROJECTS SERVICE
MGF have a specialist service dedicated to the design and supply of temporary shoring
solutions to basements and large civil engineering excavations.
With an emphasis on early engagement and value engineering, our experienced Major Projects
team can offer the reassurance of:
• Eurocode compliant, detailed analysis and calculations
• Bespoke steelwork design and manufacture
• BIM collaborations and 3D visualisation
• Site support through toolbox talks, demonstrations and inspection

CONTACT US TO SPEAK TO A MEMBER OF OUR TEAM:

[email protected] 08083 028 832

ENGINEERING DESIGN SERVICES
Our Engineering Team provides a comprehensive temporary works design service in
support of the hire and sale of our products. In addition, we offer a bespoke design service
to assist clients with technical tender submissions for major projects; including basement
propping and other large scale excavations.
The team, based at our Engineering Centre in Manchester, comprises of qualified civil,
structural and mechanical engineers who produce over 4000 temporary works designs
per year. MGF have achieved Level 2 Supply Chain BIM Compliance and we are constantly
striving to enhance our digital capability further through our in-house development team.
Design calculations, integrated design and installation drawings, 3D visualisations
and residual risk registers are all included (where appropriate) as standard in order to
maximise the safe use of our equipment. MGF also provide risk assessments, installation
guidelines and technical data sheets in accordance with current Health and Safety
legislation and best practice.

ENGINEERING DESIGN

OUR DESIGN SERVICES

Our Design Services are carried out through simple yet robust quality procedures to ISO
9001 and in accordance with all relevant design codes and legislation, ensuring that we
provide our customers with solutions that balance safety and practicality with good value.
MGF have invested in bespoke design management software allowing us to operate a
paperless quality system. The Design Management System (DMS) allows us to produce Key
Performance Indicators (KPIs) for our individual customers, ensuring we are meeting their
expectations.

CONTACT US [email protected] 1.1

 DIGITAL CAPABILITIES
CAD CENTRE
Our products are available to download
as 2D AutoCAD blocks or BIM Compliant
Autodesk Revit components, with a number
of additional products available as 3D
AutoCAD blocks.

GUIDANCE FOR SAFE SYSTEMS

OF WORK
Available for our shoring equipment and
ancillaries, our pictorial installation and use
guidelines are available for download from
our website.
mgf.co.uk

DIGITAL ANIMATED INSTALLATION

GUIDES
Our award-winning animated installation
guidelines demonstrate best practice and are
available on our YouTube channel.
youtube.com/mgfltd
mgf.co.uk

SKETCHUP COMPONENTS
Our products are available for download
through Trimble 3D Warehouse. Ideal
ENGINEERING DESIGN

for use in conceptual design or creating

3D visualisations for use in planning,
programmes, method statements, toolbox
talks or lifting plans.

SUPPORT IT AND SPAN

CUSTOMER SOFTWARE
Our design software is available for use by
customers to specify our equipment. Please
contact us for a license key and an engineer
will visit to give a demonstration of the
software.

1.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

VIEW OUR LATEST
CASE STUDIES
Committed to improving site safety, MGF has been supplying the UK construction
industry with shoring solutions for over 40 years. We have vast experience
across a range of sectors including Major Projects, Water and Utilities, Housing
and Transport.

FOR OUR LATEST RANGE OF CASE STUDIES VISIT:

mgf.co.uk/case-studies
 PROVIDING WORLD CLASS DIGITAL ENGINEERING
WHAT IS A STANDARD SOLUTION?
A standard solution is a pre-engineered, calculated solution for specification by the
customer through their own temporary works process.
Over recent years MGF has experienced an exponential growth in design requests and
customer demands for faster turnaround times.
The MGF Design Team embarked on a research project to find ways to further support our
customers and continue to deliver a high quality service; whilst fully complying with the
latest safety legislation and design standards.
Research found that 60% of the designs produced showed similarities, so there was scope
ENGINEERING DESIGN

to create pre-engineered BS5975 compliant solutions which can be used on projects with
repetitive groundwork operations.
MGF provide a suite of standard solutions that cover a range of products covering trench
boxes, manhole boxes, walers and sheets, manhole brace and our GRiPSHORE® range.

MGF STANDARD SOLUTIONS ARE:

• Presented in a drawing format with supporting calculations
• Takes the user through a step-by-step process
• Incorporates a checklist style process to ensure the solution is assessed against the
site conditions
• Provides a sign off section to ensure the responsibility is with the user

1.3 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 BENEFITS
• Place orders directly with the Hire Desk
• Rapid response therefore appealing to utility / reactive works
• Assists with tender process – allowing temporary works equipment requirements to be
estimated and costed without formal designs
• Simplified process to obtaining a design solution
• Provides controlled and informative steps to assessing site suitability which can be used
as a training instrument for site teams – see below summary of steps

2. VALIDATES THE GROUND CONDITIONS

against the appropriate soils
2. VALIDATES THE GROUND 3. Details the
CONDITIONS against the appropriate selection of
1. SITE
appropriate soils 3. Details
MGFthe appropriateRANGE
PRODUCT selection
CONDITIONS of MGF PRODUCT RANGE

4. Considers
1. SITE
suitable END
CONDITIONS
SUPPORT

6. Considers a SAFE
INSTALLATION
4. Considers
suitable END ENGINEERING DESIGN
sequence SUPPORT

6. Considers a SAFE 5. Provides guidance on LOCAL GROUND

INSTALLATION 5. Provides guidance
REDUCTIONS
on LOCALup to 0.50m deep to reduce
GROUND
REDUCTIONS up to 0.50m deep to
sequence unnecessary hiring of equipment
reduce unnecessary hiring of equipment

There must be a Designated Individual (DI) within the company who is responsible for ensuring
that the people using or issuing the solutions are competent to do so. The standard solution
provides a sign off section to ensure the responsibility is with the user, i.e. TWC / TWD.

For more information, visit: mgf.co.uk/standard-solutions

CONTACT US [email protected] 1.4

MGF’s Astley depot, located in Manchester
has been trading since 1981
BOX SYSTEMS

DRAG BOXES 2.1

TRENCH BOXES 2.2
MANHOLE BOXES 2.3
HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX 2.4
ALUMINIUM TRENCH BOXES 2.5
UTILITY TRENCH BOX 2.6
KING POST AND PANELS 2.7
MGF Drag Box
SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, TWO SIDED SHIELD SYSTEM DESIGNED TO BE
INSTALLED BY AN EXCAVATOR UTILISING THE EXCAVATE AND DRAG
TECHNIQUE.
Normally selected for installing utility pipes in non-urban environments where high
laying rates are required and ground movement is not critical. Size of systems specified is
dependent upon max. depth requirements and size of individual pipe sections and bedding.
The drag box utilises a raised strut system at the rear of the panel to allow the drag box
to be dragged over and above the installed section of pipe. Generally suitable for trench
depths of up to 3.25m and trench widths of up to 3.0m, pipe lengths of up to 6.6m and a
pipe OD of up to 2.2m.
Fabricated from fully welded, Grade S355 120x60mm or 200x100mm steel box sections
to form 60mm or 100mm thick panels, the system comprises drag box panels in a variety
of lengths and heights. The panels are propped off each other by robust telescopic struts
available in a variety of lengths to suit the required width. All components in the system are
connected together via simple pin and r-clip assemblies.
MGF can supply the drag boxes with a full range of suitable installation / removal
accessories and safety equipment, such as Edgesafe edge protection panels, Laddersafe
access platforms and pole ladders, Davitsafe retrieval / fall arrest systems, Endsafe end
protection panels, trench road plates and confined spaces equipment. Manufactured and
designed in accordance with BS EN 13331: 2002 Parts 1 and 2 Trench lining systems and BS
5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible stress
design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Boxes should only be used in the
configurations shown in ground assessed as
self supporting by competent persons following
MGF installation guidelines.
2. Drag boxes should not be used in weak ground
(especially soft clays, running sand, silts or peats) or
where significant groundwater is present. They should only
be used in ground that will stand to the excavated depth for the
anticipated duration of the works.
3. Boxes are not suitable for usage in trenches with multiple service
crossings.
4. Flying of the box above the base of the excavation is not recommended.
5. Drag box systems are extremely heavy and great care must be taken in
selecting a suitable excavator for handling, installing and extracting these
systems. As a general guide excavators should be sized to be at least 5 x weight
of assembled drag box. If stacking panels on site, timber packers must be used to
separate the panels.
6. The box must only be moved by pre-digging ahead of the box and then carefully lifting
and dragging the unit via the front struts using the bucket of the excavator. Care must
DRAG BOXES

be taken to ensure that the outside faces of the box are not side loaded by the ground.
7. Always use MGF specified extraction chains to release a stuck drag box from the ground
prior to any attempt to lift the box out of the trench. Always use MGF specified lifting
chains when lifting and handling the boxes or components. N.B. If a drag box becomes
stuck extraction / drag forces of up to 300kN (30t) can be required to release the box.
8. Always enter box via a ladder located within the box and never from an unsupported edge.
9. Prior to every lifting operation all lifting points must be carefully inspected by a
competent person for evidence of damage.
10. During lifting or extraction operations ensure personnel are well clear of the equipment.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.1.1

 LADDERSAFE
See Section 7
DAVITSAFE
See Section 7

GRP
LADDER
See Section 8 EDGESAFE
See Section 7

DRAG
BOX
DRAG BOXES

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF DRAG BOXES

mgf.co.uk/products/drag-box

2.1.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 DRAG BOXES

TELESCOPIC STRUT POCKET HANDLING

STRUT DETAIL PIN DETAIL POINT
Telescopic strut inners Telescopic struts are All drag boxes are lifted
and outers are connected connected to the panel and handled by attaching
using a pin and r-clip pockets using a pin and MGF lifting chains to the
detail. r-clip detail. handling points as shown.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.1.3

 Product ID

4.701 4.702 4.703* 4.704 4.705 4.706* 4.707

3220 4000 5100 5100 5100 7500 7500

Description x x x x x x x
L×H 1460 2060 1824 2424 3260 2048 2460
Drag Box Drag Box Drag Box** Drag Box Drag Box Drag Box Drag Box†

Panel
Resistance
40 30 30 40 30 20 20
SWL
(kN/m2)

Panel Thick /
60 / 60 / 100 / 100 / 100 / 100 / 100 /
Weight
452 854 1146 1433 2200 2400 2800
T(mm)/(kg)

Approx
Assembled
1004 2028 2612 3186 4720 5120 5920
Weight
(kg)

Internal
Trench
600-3000 600-3000 600-3000 600-3000 600-3000 600-3000 600-3000
Widths***
Wi(mm)

Trench
Width*** 720-3120 720-3120 800-3200 800-3200 800-3200 800-3200 800-3200
We(mm)

Clearance
Below
Bottom 790 1150 1072 1372 2258 1496 1500
Strut****
Cv(mm)

Clearance
Between
2590 2970 4220 4220 4220 6620 6620
Struts
Li(mm)

Telescopic
100 150 150 150 150 150 150
Strut Type
DRAG BOXES

* These boxes can be used as top units to achieve depths of up to 5.10m in conjunction with a design
issued by our technical department.
** This drag box only features 1 rear strut.
*** Greater widths (up to 5m) possible utilising telescopic strut adaptors.
**** Based on rear strut - additional clearance possible utilising strut adaptors.
† Panels may include additional strengthening plates underneath the rear pockets, which may impact
trench width requirements. If trench widths are restrictive please contact MGF.

2.1.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 We
L
Wi
Li

Cv

DRAG BOXES

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.1.5

 100 TELESCOPIC STRUTS

Strut Inner Strut Outer

Specification 100x100x10 SHS 120x120x8 SHS

Material Grade S355 S355
Component

Axial SWL 228kN 228kN

Moment SWL 9.9kNm 9.9kNm
Hole Details Φ30mm holes Φ30mm holes
Unit Mass 27.4kg/m 26.4kg/m

150 TELESCOPIC STRUTS

Strut Inner Strut Outer

Specification 150x150x12.5 SHS 180x180x10 SHS

DRAG BOXES

Material Grade S355 S355

Component

Axial SWL 492kN 492kN

Moment SWL 38.9kNm 38.9kNm
Hole Details Φ48mm holes Φ48mm holes
Unit Mass 52.7kg/m 50.7kg/m

2.1.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

RIGID STRUTS

Rigid Strut

Specification 150x150x12.5
Material Grade S355

Component
Axial SWL 492kN
Moment SWL 38.9kNm
Hole Details Ø48mm holes
Unit Mass 52.7kg/m

Rigid struts cannot be used with the 3220 x 1460 drag box.

STRUT PINS AND RETAINING CLIPS

100 Strut Pin 150 Strut Pin

Specification Ø28mm round bar, Ø45mm round bar,

160mm long 220mm long
Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8) 080M40 (EN8)

Shear SWL 228kN 492kN
Weight 1kg 3kg

DRAG BOX CONNECTOR PINS

AND RETAINING CLIPS
DRAG BOXES

Specification Ø45mm round bar,

Component

150mm long
Material Grade 080M40 (EN8)
Weight 2kg

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.1.7

 100 TELESCOPIC STRUT COMBINATIONS
STRUT INNERS (100x100x10 SHS) STRUT OUTERS (120x120x8 SHS)
480 4.611 505
4.602
12kg 14kg

4.612 780
740 19kg
4.603
18kg 1100
4.613
30kg

4.604 1075 1600

4.614
27kg 43kg

4.615 2000
1575 54kg
4.605
39kg

Internal Trench Width Inner Type Outer Type Assembled Weight

(mm) Product ID Product ID (kg)
625 – 855 4.602 4.611 27
890 – 1240 4.603 4.612 38
1295 – 1745 4.604 4.613 58
1795 - 2745 4.605 4.614 83
2195 - 3000 4.605 4.615 94

If the above 100 telescopic strut combinations cannot be achieved a minimum overlap
of at least 150mm must be provided between the inner and outer. Struts should only be
assembled using 1 inner and 1 outer.
100 telescopic struts are only compatible with 3220 x 1460 Drag Boxes.

100 TELESCOPIC 200 x 200 SHS - TRENCH BOX STRUT

STRUT ADAPTORS ADAPTOR (500MM LONG)
This adaptor will allow MGF 200 Series strut
extensions to be used as 3220 x 1460 Drag Box struts.

Internal Range (mm) 3000 - 5000

DRAG BOXES

Product ID 9.200
Specification

Weight (kg) 27
Section 100x100x10 SHS
Material Grade S355
8No. M20x65 (min.) grade 8.8
Bolting Details
bolts and nuts c/w washers

2.1.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

150 TELESCOPIC STRUT COMBINATIONS
RIGID STRUTS STRUT INNERS STRUT OUTERS
(150x150x12.5 SHS) (150x150x12.5 SHS) (180x180x10 SHS)
4.821 600 750mm Inner 800mm Outer
29kg 4.802 4.812
650 36kg 43kg
4.822
31kg 1200mm Outer
4.823 700 4.813
1050mm Inner 63kg
33kg
4.803
4.802 750
50kg
36kg 4.814 1700mm Outer
800 88kg
4.824
39kg
900 1650mm Inner 4.815 2500mm Outer
4.825 4.804
44kg 79kg 129kg

Internal Trench Width Inner Type Outer Type Assembled Weight

(mm) Product ID Product ID (kg)
1020 – 1320 4.802 4.812 82
1420 – 1820 4.803 4.813 116
1920 - 2920 4.804 4.814 170
2720 – 3000 4.804 4.815 211

If the above 150 telescopic strut combinations cannot be achieved a minimum overlap
of at least 250mm must be provided between the inner and outer. Struts should only be
assembled using 1 inner and 1 outer.

150 TELESCOPIC
STRUT
ADAPTORS

200 x 200 SHS - DRAG BOX STRUT

ADAPTOR (500MM & 600MM LONG) HOG BACK DRAG BOX STRUT
These adaptors will allow MGF 200 Series strut ADAPTOR (2300MM LONG)
extensions to be used as drag box struts. This adaptor provides an additional
375mm clearance beneath the
bottom strut. To be used with
Internal Range (mm) 3000 - 5000 600mm to 1050mm strut inners.
DRAG BOXES

9.206 (500mm)
Product ID
9.207 (600mm)
Internal
3050 - 3500
Specification

40 (500mm) Range (mm)

Weight (kg)
45 (600mm)
Specification

Product ID 4.840
Section 150x150x12.5 SHS
Weight (kg) 155
Material Grade S355
Section 180x180x10 SHS
8No. M20x65 (min.) grade
Bolting Details 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w Material
S355
washers Grade

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.1.9

Drag Box
SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, ROBUST, TWO SIDED EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
DESIGNED TO BE INSTALLED BY AN EXCAVATOR UTILISING THE DIG AND
PUSH OR EXCAVATE AND LOWER IN PLACE TECHNIQUES.
Normally selected for installing utility pipes where ground movement is not critical,
with the size of systems specified dependent upon max. depth requirements and size of
individual pipe sections and bedding. The system is generally suitable for trench depths of
up to 7.16m, widths of up to 3.92m, pipe lengths of up to 3.7m and a pipe OD of up to 2.3m.
Fabricated from fully welded, Grade S355 120x60mm or 200x100mm steel box sections to
form 60mm or 100mm thick panels, the system comprises trench box bases to which up to
2 No. trench box tops may be added to achieve additional depth. The panels are propped off
each other by robust telescopic struts available in a variety of lengths to
suit the required width. All components in the system are connected
together via simple pin and r-clip assemblies.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable lifting
and extraction chains, Edgesafe edge protection panels,
Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or wooden pole
ladders, Davitsafe retrieval / fall arrest systems, Endsafe
end protection panels, trench road plates and confined
spaces regime equipment. Manufactured and designed in
accordance with BS EN 13331 : 2002 Parts 1 and 2 Trench
lining systems and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for
temporary works procedures and the permissible stress
design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Boxes should only be used in the configurations shown
by competent persons following MGF installation guidelines.
2. Boxes should not be used in very weak ground (especially very soft clays and peats) or
where significant groundwater is present.
3. Boxes are not normally suitable for usage where ground movement is an issue and are
therefore not recommended for use in live carriageway situations or adjacent existing
buildings or structures.
4. Flying of the box above the base of the excavation is not recommended.
5. Box systems are very heavy and great care must be taken in selecting a suitable
excavator for handling, installing and extracting these systems. If stacking panels on
site, timber packers must be used to separate the panels.
6. Boxes should not be left in-situ for extended periods within cohesive or very weak soils
as earth pressures / adhesion on the panel surfaces may increase significantly with
time requiring additional extraction forces to release the panels.
TRENCH BOXES

7. Always use MGF specified extraction chains to release an in-situ box from the ground
prior to any attempt to lift the box out of the trench. Always use MGF specified lifting
chains when lifting and handling the boxes or components. N.B. If a box becomes stuck
extraction forces of up to 500kN (50t) can be required to release each corner.
8. Prior to every lifting operation all lifting points must be carefully inspected by a
competent person for evidence of damage.
9. Always enter trench box via a ladder located within the box and never from an
unsupported edge.
10. During lifting or extraction operations ensure personnel are well clear of the equipment.
11. Ends of trench runs should always be battered back at a safe angle or end protection
panels should be used.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.2.1

 DAVITSAFE
See Section 7

GRP
LADDER
See Section 8

LADDERSAFE
See Section 7
EDGESAFE
See Section 7

TRENCH
BOX TOP

ENDSAFE
PANEL
See Section 7

TRENCH
BOX BASE
TRENCH BOXES

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF TRENCH BOXES

mgf.co.uk/products/trench-box

2.2.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

TELESCOPIC STRUT DETAIL
Telescopic strut inners and
outers are connected using a pin
and r-clip detail.

MINI AND 4.2M PANEL CONNECTOR DETAILS

Panels connect to each other using a fork
connector, pin and r-clip detail.

TRENCH BOXES

STANDARD AND STRUT POCKET HANDLING POINT

TITAN PANEL PIN DETAIL All trench boxes are
CONNECTOR DETAILS Telescopic struts are lifted and handled by
Panels connect to each connected to the panel attaching MGF lifting
other using a drop down pockets using a pin and chains to the handling
connector, a pin and r-clip r-clip detail. points as shown.
detail.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.2.3

 Product ID

4.120 4.125 4.140 4.160 4.1603† 4.180 4.190 4.1905 4.1906

3000 3000 3000 3530 3530 x 3530 3530 4200 4200

Description 2462 High
×2010 ×2010 ×1100 ×2462 ×1624 ×3910 x2890 x1420
L×H Clearance
Base LW Base Top Base Base Top Base Base Top

High
Alternative Mini Lightweight Mini Standard Clearance Standard Titan
Standard N/A N/A
Name Base Mini Base Top Base Trench Box Top Base
Base
Max. Depth**
4.19 4.19 N/A 5.71 5.71 / 4.08 N/A 7.16 5.73 N/A
(m)
Panel
Resistance
45 45 45 50 50 / 30 50 50 50/45*** 50
SWL
(kN/m2)

Panel Thick
60 / 60 / 60 / 100 / 100 / 108 / 100 / 100 /
/ Weight 100 / 1080
586 435 320 970 686 2193 1775 835
T(mm)/(kg)

Approx
Assembled 1270 970 690 2040 2260 1420 4770 3876 1833
Weight -1630 -1330 -870 -2400 -2620 -1630 -5480 -4422 -2106
(kg)

Internal
Trench 605 605 605 605 605 605 600 1210 1210
Width* -3625 -3625 -3625 -3625 -3625 -3625 -3700 -3910 -3910
Wi(mm)
Trench
725 725 725 805 805 805 820 1410 1410
Width*
-3745 -3745 -3745 -3825 -3825 -3825 -3920 -4110 -4110
We(mm)
Clearance
Below
1650 /
Bottom 903 903 N/A 1225 1225/1525 N/A 2358 N/A
1850***
Struts
C(mm)
Clearance
Between
2716 2716 2716 3246 3246 3246 3076 3720 3720
Struts
Li(mm)

Telescopic
100 100 100 100 100 100 150 150 150
Strut Type
TRENCH BOXES

* Greater widths (up to 5m) possible utilising telescopic strut adaptors.

** Max. depths achievable using a base and 2 tops.
*** 4.2m Trench Box base panel offers 2 lower strut locations which give different panel resistance
SWLs. When C = 1650mm the SWL is 50kN/m², when C = 1850mm the SWL is 45kN/m².
† 3530 x 2462 High Clearance Base offers 2 lower strut locations which give different panel resistance
SWLs. When C = 1225mm the SWL is 50kN/m² and the system can utilise up to 2 Standard Tops, when
C = 1525mm the SWL is 30kN/m² and the system can utilise 1 Standard Top panel only. In addition,
when C = 1525mm the system must not have sheets or Endsafe Panels bearing up against the
telescopic struts to close off open ends, instead Endsafe Panels must be installed so they bear on the
panel ends a minimum of 75mm each side.

2.2.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Li
We
Wi

TRENCH BOXES

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.2.5

 100 TELESCOPIC STRUTS

Strut Inner Strut Outer

Specification 100x100x10 SHS 120x120x8 SHS

Material Grade S355 S355
Component

Axial SWL 228kN 228kN

Moment SWL 9.9kNm 9.9kNm
Hole Details Φ30mm holes Φ30mm holes
Unit Mass 27.4kg/m 26.4kg/m

150 TELESCOPIC STRUTS

TRENCH BOXES

Strut Inner Strut Outer

Specification 150x150x12.5 SHS 180x180x10 SHS

Material Grade S355 S355
Component

Axial SWL 492kN 492kN

Moment SWL 38.9kNm 38.9kNm
Hole Details Φ48mm holes Φ48mm holes
Unit Mass 52.7kg/m 50.7kg/m

2.2.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

TELESCOPIC STRUT PINS AND RETAINING CLIPS

4.2m Trench Box

100 Strut Pin 150 Strut Pin Panel Strut Pin
Ø28mm round bar, Ø45mm round bar, Ø45mm round bar,
Specification
160mm long 220mm long 250mm long
Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8) 080M40 (EN8) 709M40 (EN19T)

Shear SWL 228kN 492kN 492kN
Weight 1kg 3kg 3.2kg

TRENCH BOX CONNECTOR PINS AND RETAINING CLIPS

TRENCH BOXES

4.2m Trench Box

60 Thick Panels 100 Thick Panels Connecting Pin
Ø40mm round bar, Ø32mm round bar, Ø50mm bar,
Specification
100mm long 210mm long 150mm long
Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8) 080M40 (EN8) 708M40 (EN19A)

Shear SWL 384kN 308kN 600kN
Weight 1kg 1kg 3kg

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.2.7

 100 TELESCOPIC STRUT COMBINATIONS
STRUT INNERS (100x100x10 SHS) STRUT OUTERS (120x120x8 SHS)
4.611 505
14kg
4.602 480 780
4.612
12kg 19kg

4.613 1100
4.603 740 30kg
18kg
4.614 1600
43kg
4.604 1075
27kg 4.615 2000
54kg

1575 2500
4.605 4.616
39kg 67kg

Internal Trench Width Inner Type Outer Type Assembled Weight

(mm) Product ID Product ID (kg)
625 – 855 4.602 4.611 27
890 – 1240 4.603 4.612 38
1295 – 1745 4.604 4.613 58
1795 – 2745 4.605 4.614 83
2195 – 3145 4.605 4.615 94
2695 – 3625 4.605 4.616 107

If the above 100 telescopic strut combinations cannot be achieved a minimum overlap
of at least 150mm must be provided between the inner and outer. Struts should only be
assembled using 1 inner and 1 outer.

100 TELESCOPIC 200 x 200 SHS - TRENCH BOX STRUT

ADAPTOR (500MM LONG)
STRUT ADAPTORS This adaptor will allow MGF 200 Series strut
extensions to be used as trench box struts.
TRENCH BOXES

Internal Range (mm) 2000 - 5000

Product ID 9.200
Specification

Weight (kg) 27
Section 100x100x10 SHS
Material Grade S355
8No. M20x65 (min.) grade 8.8
Bolting Details
bolts and nuts c/w washers

2.2.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

150 TELESCOPIC STRUT COMBINATIONS
RIGID STRUTS STRUT INNERS STRUT OUTERS
(150x150x12.5 SHS) (150x150x12.5 SHS) (180x180x10 SHS)
600 750mm Inner 800mm Outer
4.821
29kg 4.802 4.812
36kg 43kg
650
4.822
31kg 1200mm Outer
1050mm Inner 4.813
700
4.823 4.803 63kg
33kg 50kg
750
4.802 1700mm Outer
36kg 4.814
88kg
800 1650mm Inner
4.824 4.804
39kg 79kg
2500mm Outer
4.815
900 129kg
4.825
44kg

Internal Trench Width Inner Type Outer Type Assembled Weight

(mm) Product ID Product ID (kg)

1020 – 1320 4.802 4.812 82

1420 – 1820 4.803 4.813 116
1920 – 2920 4.804 4.814 170
2720 – 3700 4.804 4.815 211

If the above 150 telescopic strut combinations cannot be achieved a minimum overlap
of at least 250mm must be provided between the inner and outer. Struts should only be
assembled using 1 inner and 1 outer.
150 telescopic struts are only compatible with 3530 x 3910 Trench Box Base (Titan Base)
and 4.2m Trench Box system.

200 x 200 SHS - TITAN TRENCH BOX STRUT

ADAPTOR (500MM AND 600MM LONG)
150 TELESCOPIC This adaptor will allow MGF 200 Series strut
STRUT ADAPTORS extensions to be used as Titan Trench Box struts.
TRENCH BOXES

Internal Range (mm) 2000 - 5200

9.206 (500mm)
Product ID
9.207 (600mm)
Specification

40 (500mm)
Weight (kg)
45 (600mm)
Section 150x150x12.5 SHS
Material Grade S355
8No. M20x65 (min.) grade 8.8
Bolting Details
bolts and nuts c/w washers

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.2.9

 MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DEPTHS / CONFIGURATIONS
MGF 3000 x 2010 BASE MGF 3000 x 2010 BASE
MGF 3000 x 2010 BASE & MGF 3000 x 1100 TOP & 2 NO. MGF 3000 x 1100 TOPS
0.00m -0.09m 0.00m 0.00m

-0.55m -0.55m

-1.05m
-1.19m
-1.65m
-2.01m
-2.15m -2.29m

-3.11m
-3.25m

-4.21m

MGF 3530 x 2462 BASE MGF 3530 x 2462 BASE

MGF 3530 x 2462 BASE & MGF 3530 x 1624 TOP & 2 NO. MGF 3530 x 1624 TOPS
0.00m 0.00m 0.00m
-0.22m

-0.81m -0.81m
-1.18m

-1.84m

-2.46m -2.44m
-2.80m

-3.46m

-4.09m
-4.42m

-5.71m

MGF 3530 x 3910 BASE MGF 3530 x 3910 BASE

MGF 3530 x 3910 BASE & MGF 3530 x 1624 TOP & 2 NO. MGF 3530 x 1624 TOPS
0.00m 0.00m 0.00m
-0.33m
-0.81m -0.81m

-1.46m

-1.96m

-2.44m
TRENCH BOXES

-3.09m

-3.58m
-3.91m

-4.71m

-5.53m

-7.16m

2.2.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 MGF 4200 x 2890 TRENCH BOX BASE PANEL FEATURES 2 LOWER STRUT POSITIONS.
*IN THE LOWER POSITION (1.65m CLEARANCE) THE PANEL SWL = 50kN/m²
**IN THE UPPER POSITION (1.85m CLEARANCE) THE PANEL SWL = 45kN/m²

MGF 4200 x 2890 BASE MGF 4200 x 2890 BASE

MGF 4200 x 2890 BASE* & MGF 4200 x 1420 TOP* & 2 NO. MGF 4200 x 1420 TOPS*
0.00m 0.00m 0.00m
-0.19m
-0.71m -0.71m
-1.15m
-1.61m

-2.13m
-2.57m
-2.89m -3.03m

-3.99m
-4.31m

-5.73m

MGF 4200 x 2890 BASE MGF 4200 x 2890 BASE

MGF 4200 x 2890 BASE** & MGF 4200 x 1420 TOP** & 2 NO. MGF 4200 x 1420 TOPS**
0.00m 0.00m 0.00m
-0.19m

-0.71m -0.71m
-0.95m

-1.61m

-2.13m
-2.37m

-2.89m -3.03m

-3.79m

-4.31m

-5.73m

MGF 3530 x 2462 HIGH MGF 3530 x 2462 HIGH CLEARANCE

CLEARANCE BASE*** BASE & 3530 x 1624 TOP***
0.00m 0.00m
-0.22m
TRENCH BOXES

-0.86m -0.81m

-1.84m

-2.46m 2.50m

***These details are when the

understrut clearance, C = 1525mm,
when C = 1225mm refer to the details for
-4.08m
MGF 3530 x 2462 Base and MGF 3530 x
1624 Top on page 2.2.10

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.2.11

 Typical application
showing a manhole box
combined with run of
trench boxes.
TRENCH BOXES

2.2.12 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, ROBUST, FOUR SIDED EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
DESIGNED TO BE INSTALLED BY AN EXCAVATOR UTILISING THE DIG AND
PUSH OR EXCAVATE AND LOWER IN PLACE TECHNIQUES.
Normally selected for installing precast concrete manholes, small chambers or tanks
where ground movement is not critical. The size of the systems specified is dependent
upon max. depth requirements and plan dimensions of structure including allowances for
backfilling / formwork etc. The system is generally suitable for depths of up to 5.81m and
structures of max. plan dimension / diameter up to 4.5m.
Fabricated from fully welded, Grade S355 120x60mm or 200x100mm steel box sections to
form 60mm or 100mm thick panels, the system comprises manhole box bases to which
up to 2 No. manhole box tops may be added to achieve additional depth. The panels are
propped off each other by robust telescopic struts available in a variety of lengths to suit the
required width. Panel gaps are provided on two faces to accommodate trench runs into the
manhole box. All components in the system are connected together via simple pin and r-clip
assemblies. The system is designed to be used in conjunction with MGF trench boxes.
MGF can supply manhole boxes with a full range of suitable lifting and extraction chains,
Edgesafe edge protection panels, Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or wooden pole
ladders, Davitsafe retrieval / fall arrest systems, Endsafe end protection panels, trench road
plates and confined spaces regime equipment. Manufactured and designed in accordance
with BS EN 13331 : 2002 Parts 1 and 2 Trench lining systems and BS 5975 (2019) Code of
practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Boxes should only be used in the configurations shown by
competent persons following MGF installation guidelines.
2. In a standard square plan format the boxes can have their
returns closed using Endsafe Panels bearing onto the
panel returns, or sheets bearing directly onto the struts.
If the box is extended beyond its standard square format
the telescopic struts should not be laterally loaded.
3. Sheets must not be used to load the struts of the 5.2m
Manhole Box system, Endsafe Panels must be used and installed
bearing up against the panel returns.
4. Boxes should not be used in very weak ground (especially very soft clays and peats) or
where significant groundwater is present.
5. Boxes are not normally suitable for usage where ground movement is an issue and are
therefore not recommended for use in live carriageway situations or adjacent existing
MANHOLE BOXES
buildings or structures.
6. Flying of the box above the base of the excavation is not recommended.
7. Box systems are very heavy and great care must be taken in selecting a suitable
excavator for handling, installing and extracting these systems. If stacking panels on
site, timber packers must be used to separate the panels.
8. Boxes should not be left in-situ for extended periods within cohesive or very weak soils
as earth pressures / adhesion on the panel surfaces may increase significantly with
time requiring additional extraction forces to release the panels.
9. Always use MGF specified extraction chains to release an in-situ box from the ground
prior to any attempt to lift the box out of the trench. Always use MGF specified lifting
chains when lifting and handling the boxes or components. N.B. If a box becomes stuck
extraction forces of up to 500kN (50t) can be required to release each corner.

CONTACT US [email protected]
2.3.1
 10. Prior to every lifting operation all lifting points must be carefully inspected by a
competent person for evidence of damage.
11. Always enter manhole box via a ladder located within the box and never from an
unsupported edge.
12. During lifting or extraction operations ensure personnel are well clear of the equipment.

MANHOLE
SHUTTER PANELS
See Section 10

EDGESAFE TRENCH SHEETS

See Section 7
See Section 6

MANHOLE
BOX TOP
MANHOLE BOXES

MANHOLE
BOX BASE

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF MANHOLE BOXES

mgf.co.uk/products/manhole-box

2.3.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 HANDLING POINT
All manhole boxes are lifted
and handled by attaching MGF
lifting chains to the handling
points as shown.

60 / 100 THICK PANEL

CONNECTOR DETAILS
60 / 100 thick panels connect
to each other using a fork
connector, pin and r-clip detail.

MANHOLE BOXES

STRUT POCKET PIN DETAIL

TELESCOPIC STRUT DETAIL Telescopic struts are connected to
Telescopic strut inners and outers are the panel pockets using a pin and
connected using a pin and r-clip detail. r-clip detail.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.3.3

 Product ID

4.203 4.201 4.202 4.210 4.220 4.230 4.240 4.250 4.260 4.270 4.280 4.290*** 4.295***

2000
2000 2000 2500 2500 3000 3000 3500 3500 4400 4400 5200 5200
x
Description x x x x x x x x x x x x
1780
L×H 1780 1100 2020 1100 2020 1100 2562 1624 2562 1624 2510 1620
LW
Base Top Base Top Base Top Base Top Base Top Base Top
Base

Standard Base

Standard Top
Lightweight
Micro Base

Micro Base

Titan Base
Alternative

Mini Base

Midi Base
Micro Top

Titan Top
Mini Top

Midi Top
Name

N/A

N/A
Max.
3.98 3.98 N/A 4.22 N/A 4.22 N/A 5.81 N/A 5.81 N/A 5.75 N/A
Depth** (m)

Panel
Resistance
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 40 40
SWL
(kN/m2)

Panel Thick 60 / 60 / 60 / 60 / 60 / 60 / 60 / 100 / 100 / 100 / 100 / 100 / 100 /

/ Weight
T(mm)/(kg) 380 488 341 684 414 767 459 1340 939 1797 1222 2646 2016

Approx
Assembled
908 1122 714 1540 938 1692 1018 2762 1996 3824 2964 5997 4384
Weight
(kg)

Internal
Trench
1880 1880 1880 2380 2380 2880 2880 3300 3300 4130 4130 5060 5060
Width*
Wi(mm)

Trench
Width* 2000 2000 2000 2500 2500 3000 3000 3500 3500 4330 4330 5260 5260
We(mm)

Clearance
Below
Bottom 810 810 N/A 923 N/A 923 N/A 1316 N/A 1300 N/A 1600 N/A
Struts
C(mm)

Clearance
Between
1751 1751 1751 2251 2251 2751 2751 3251 3251 4151 4151 4840 4840
Struts
MANHOLE BOXES

Li(mm)

Panel
Return 550 550 550 670 670 670 670 912 912 1312 1312 1600 1600
PR(mm)

Telescopic 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 150 150
Strut Type

* Greater widths (up to 5m) possible utilising 100 telescopic struts provided struts are not laterally loaded by
return sheets / panels.
** Max. depths achievable using a base and 2 tops.
***5.2m manhole box system must not have sheets or Endsafe Panels bearing up against the telescopic
struts to close off open ends, instead Endsafe Panels must be installed so they bear on the panel returns a
minimum of 75mm each side.

2.3.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 We
Wi

T
PR

Li

MANHOLE BOXES
L

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.3.5

 100 TELESCOPIC STRUTS

Strut Inner Strut Outer

Specification 100x100x10 SHS 120x120x8 SHS

Material Grade S355 S355
Component

Axial SWL 160kN 160kN

Moment SWL 20kNm 20kNm
Hole Details Φ30mm holes Φ30mm holes
Unit Mass 27.4kg/m 26.4kg/m

150 TELESCOPIC STRUTS

MANHOLE BOXES

Strut Inner Strut Outer

Specification 150x150x12.5 SHS 180x180x10 SHS

Material Grade S355 S355
Component

Axial SWL 492kN 492kN

Moment SWL 38.9kNm 38.9kNm
Hole Details Φ48mm holes Φ48mm holes
Unit Mass 52.7kg/m 50.7kg/m

2.3.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

TELESCOPIC STRUT PINS AND RETAINING CLIPS

100 Strut Pin 150 Strut Pin

Ø28mm round bar, Ø45mm round bar,

Specification
160mm long 220mm long
Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8) 080M40 (EN8)

Shear SWL 228kN 492kN
Weight 1kg 3kg

MANHOLE BOX CONNECTOR PINS AND RETAINING CLIPS

MANHOLE BOXES
Manhole Box 203/254 UC
Connector Pin Connecting Pin
Compatible 4.203, 4.201, 4.202, 4.210,
Manhole Box 4.220, 4.230, 4.240, 4.250, 4.290, 4.295
Product ID 4.260, 4.270, 4.280
Component

Specification Φ40mm round bar, 100mm long Φ50mm bar, 150mm long
Material Grade 080M40 (EN8) 708M40 (EN19A)
Shear SWL 308kN 600kN
Weight 1kg 3kg

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.3.7

 100 TELESCOPIC STRUT COMBINATIONS
STRUT INNERS (100x100x10 SHS) STRUT OUTERS (120x120x8 SHS)
480 505
4.602 12kg 4.611 14kg

740 780
4.603 18kg 4.612 19kg

1075 1100
4.604 27kg 4.613 30kg

1575 1600
4.605 39kg 4.614 43kg

Strut Length Inner Type Outer Type Assembled Weight

(mm) Product ID Product ID (kg)

605 - 835 4.602 4.611 27

870 - 1220 4.603 4.612 38
1275 - 1725 4.604 4.613 58
1775 - 2725 4.605 4.614 83

If the above 100 telescopic strut combinations cannot be achieved a minimum overlap of at least
150mm must be provided between the inner and outer. Struts should only be assembled using 1
inner and 1 outer.

150 TELESCOPIC STRUT COMBINATIONS

STRUT INNERS (150x150x12.5 SHS) STRUT OUTERS (180x180x10 SHS)
750mm Inner 800mm Outer

4.802 36kg 4.812 43kg

1050mm Inner 1200mm Outer

4.803 50kg 4.813 63kg

1650mm Inner 1700mm Outer

4.804 79kg 4.814 88kg

2500mm Outer
4.815 129kg
MANHOLE BOXES

Strut Length Inner Type Outer Type Assembled Weight

(mm) Product ID Product ID (kg)

1020 – 1320 4.802 4.812 82

1420 – 1820 4.803 4.813 116
1920 – 2620 4.804 4.814 170
2720 - 3000 4.804 4.815 211

If the above 150 telescopic strut combinations cannot be achieved a minimum overlap of at least
250mm must be provided between the inner and outer. Struts should only be assembled using 1
inner and 1 outer.
150 telescopic struts are only compatible with 5200 Manhole Box Base and Top.

2.3.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DEPTHS / CONFIGURATIONS

MGF 2000 x 1780 BASE MGF 2000 x 1780 BASE MGF 2000 x 1780 BASE
& MGF 2000 x 1100 TOP & 2 NO. MGF 2000 x 1100 TOPS
0.00m -0.08m 0.00m 0.00m

-0.55m -0.55m
-0.92m
-1.18m

-1.65m
-1.78m
-2.01m
-2.28m

-2.88m
-3.12m

3.98m

MGF 2500 x 2020 BASE MGF 2500 x 2020 BASE MGF 2500 x 2020 BASE
OR & MGF 2500 x 1100 TOP & 2 NO. MGF 2500 x 1100 TOPS
MGF 3000 x 2020 BASE OR OR
MGF 3000 x 2020 BASE MGF 3000 x 2020 BASE
& MGF 3000 x 1100 TOP & 2 NO. MGF 3000 x 1100 TOPS
0.00m -0.08m 0.00m 0.00m

-0.55m -0.55m

-1.04m
-1.18m

-1.65m
-2.02m
-2.14m
-2.28m

-3.12m
-3.24m

-4.22m

MANHOLE BOXES

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.3.9

 MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DEPTHS / CONFIGURATIONS

MGF 3500 x 2562 BASE MGF 3500 x 2562 BASE MGF 3500 x 2562 BASE
OR & MGF 3500 x 1624 TOP & 2 NO. MGF 3500 x 1624 TOPS
MGF 4400 x 2562 BASE OR OR
MGF 4400 x 2562 BASE MGF 4400 x 2562 BASE
& MGF 4400 x 1624 TOP & 2 NO. MGF 4400 x 1624 TOPS
0.00m -0.08m 0.00m 0.00m

-0.81m -0.81m
-1.18m

-1.70m

-2.44m
-2.56m
-2.81m

-3.33m

-4.19m
-4.43m

-5.81m

MGF 5200 x 2510 BASE MGF 5200 x 2510 BASE MGF 5200 x 2510 BASE
& MGF 5200 x 1620 TOP & 2 NO. MGF 5200 x 1620 TOPS
0.00m -0.10m 0.00m 0.00m

-0.82m -0.81m -0.81m

-1.72m

-2.51m -2.44m -2.43m

-3.34m

-4.13m -4.06m

-5.75m
MANHOLE BOXES

2.3.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, ROBUST, TWO SIDED EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
DESIGNED TO BE INSTALLED BY A MIN. 40T - 45T EXCAVATOR UTILISING THE
DIG AND PUSH OR EXCAVATE AND LOWER IN PLACE TECHNIQUES.
Normally selected for installing utility pipes where ground movement is not critical,
with the size of systems specified dependent upon max. depth requirements and size of
individual pipe sections and bedding. The system is generally suitable for trench depths of
up to 5.0m, widths of up to 5.9m, pipe lengths of up to 6.0m and a pipe OD of up to 3.0m.
Fabricated from fully welded, Grade S355 200x150mm steel box sections to form 150mm
thick panels, the system comprises trench box bases to which up to 1 No. trench box top
may be added to achieve additional depth. The panels are propped off each other by robust
high clearance 400 Series steel struts available in a variety of lengths to suit the required
width. Alternatively if a high clearance is not required, and a top is not to be added, lighter
MGF 200 Series struts can be connected to the panel using adaptors. All high clearance and
200 Series struts are connected to each other using bolts and nuts, and connected to the
panels using simple pin and clip assemblies. The top panel can also use 200 Series struts
or 150 Series telescopic struts, which are connected together using pins and r-clips. For all
strut configurations see pages 2.4.5 – 2.4.8.
MGF can supply high clearance trench boxes with a full range of suitable lifting and
extraction chains, Edgesafe edge protection panels, Laddersafe access platforms and GRP
or wooden pole ladders, Davitsafe retrieval / fall arrest systems, Endsafe end protection
panels, trench road plates and confined spaces regime equipment. Manufactured and
designed in accordance with BS EN 13331 : 2002 Parts 1 and 2 Trench lining systems and
BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible
stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Boxes should only be used in the configurations shown by competent
persons following MGF installation guidelines.

HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX

2. Boxes should not be used in very weak ground (especially very soft
clays and peats) or where significant groundwater is present.
3. Boxes are not normally suitable for usage where ground
movement is an issue and are therefore not recommended
for use in live carriageway situations or adjacent existing
buildings or structures.
4. Flying of the box above the base of the excavation is not
recommended.
5. Box systems are extremely heavy and great care must be taken in selecting a suitable
excavator for handling, installing and extracting these systems. If stacking panels on
site, timber packers must be used to separate the panels.
6. Boxes should not be left in-situ for extended periods within cohesive or very weak soils
as earth pressures / adhesion on the panel surfaces may increase significantly with
time requiring additional extraction forces to release the panels.
7. Always use MGF specified extraction chains to release an in-situ box from the ground
prior to any attempt to lift the box out of the trench. Always use MGF specified lifting
chains when lifting and handling the boxes or components. N.B. If a box becomes stuck
extraction forces of up to 500kN (50t) can be required to release each corner.
8. Prior to every lifting operation all lifting points must be carefully inspected by a
competent person for evidence of damage.
9. Where possible always enter trench box via a ladder located within the trench box.
10. During lifting or extraction operations ensure personnel are well clear of the equipment.
11. Ends of trench runs should always be battered back at a safe angle.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.4.1

 DAVITSAFE
See Section 7
LADDERSAFE
See Section 7

EDGESAFE
See Section 7

HIGH
CLEARANCE
TRENCH
BOX TOP
HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX

HIGH
CLEARANCE
TRENCH BOX BASE

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE FOR

MGF HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOXES

mgf.co.uk/products/high-clearance-trench-box

2.4.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 TOP PANEL 150 SERIES TOP PANEL TELESCOPIC BASE TO TOP PANEL
STRUT POCKET PIN DETAIL STRUT DETAIL CONNECTOR
Top panel struts are connected Telescopic strut inners and The high clearance trench
to the panel pockets using a outers are connected using box base and top are
pin and r-clip detail. a pin and r-clip detail. connected to each other
using a connector that
hooks around the handling
point, it is secured in place
using an M30 bolt.

HANDLING POINT

HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX

The high clearance trench box base and top
are lifted and handled by attaching MGF lifting
chains to the handling points as shown.

BASE PANEL HIGH BASE PANEL HIGH 200 SERIES STRUT DETAIL
CLEARANCE 400 SERIES CLEARANCE 400 SERIES The 200 Series strut
STRUT SOLDIER PIN DETAIL STRUT DETAIL extensions are connected
Base panel struts are connected The base struts and to the relevant base or top
to the panel soldier using pins extensions are connected panel adaptors using 8No.
and r-clips. Each high clearance using 20No. M24x100 M20x65 (min.) bolts c/w
strut requires 4 No. pins each side (min.) bolts c/w nuts and nuts and washers. Each
and the strut can be slid down washers. 200 Series base panel strut
and locked in position to assist adaptor requires 2 pins either
transport / handling / storage. side, the top panel adaptor
requires 1 pin either side.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.4.3

 Li
We
Wi

L A top unit can only be used

when the base is assembled to
configuration 1 - see next page.
A top unit can be used on its
own if using a dig and place
installation method.
HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX

Approx Assembled Weight*

Min. Clearance Between

Panel Resistance SWL

Max. Clearance Below

Internal Trench Width

Bottom Struts C(mm)

Panel Thick / Weight
Description L x H

Struts Li(mm)
Trench Width
Max. Depth

T(mm)/(kg)
Product ID

Strut Type
We(mm)
Wi(mm)
(kN/m2)

(kg)
(m)

7000
x 150 / 9720- 2100- 2400- High Clearance
4.199 5.0 40 3000 5960
3000 3500 11550 5600 5900 / 200 Series
Base

7000
x 150 / 4826- 2100- 2400- 150 telescopic
4.1995 2.0 40 800 6200
2000 2250 5581 5600 5900 / 200 Series
Top

* These weights correspond to strut configuration 1 as detailed on pg 2.4.5

and strut configuration 5 on pg 2.4.7.

2.4.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

BASE PANEL STRUTS HIGH CLEARANCE
STEEL STRUTS
1

Suitable for trench widths High Clearance

2.4m – 5.9m. 400 Series Strut
Specification 400x400x16 SHS
Material Grade S355
2
Axial SWL 2500kN
Component

Moment SWL 703kNm

20 No. M24x100 (min.)
Bolting
grade 8.8 bolts and
Details
nuts c/w washers
Unit Mass 191kg/m

HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX

200 SERIES STEEL STRUTS
Suitable for trench widths 2.4m - 5.4m
C/W ADAPTORS
cannot be used with top unit.

200 Series Strut

Specification 200x200x8 SHS

Material Grade S355
Axial SWL 600kN
Component

Moment SWL 100kNm

8 No. M20x65 (min.)
Bolting
grade 8.8 bolts and
Details
Suitable for trench widths 2.4m - 5.4m nuts c/w washers
cannot be used with top unit. Unit Mass 47.7kg/m

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.4.5

 BASE PANEL STRUT COMBINATIONS
HIGH CLEARANCE 400 SERIES STRUT HIGH CLEARANCE
STRUT END
HIGH CLEARANCE 400 SERIES STRUT EXTENSIONS (500x300x8 RHS)
(400x400x16 SHS)
500 1040
1000 2000

4.607 4.608 4.610 4.617

260kg 360kg 555kg 630kg

3000 3500

4.6106 4.6107
750kg 850kg

Trench Width Strut Extension Assembled Weight

(mm) Product ID (kg)
4.617 2400 NONE 1260
4.617 2900 4.607 1520
4.617 3400 4.608 1620
Strut End

4.617 3900 4.607 & 4.608 1880

4.617 4400 4.610 1815
4.617 4900 4.610 & 4.607 2075
4.617 5400 4.6106 2010
4.617 5900 4.6107 2110

BASE PANEL 200 SERIES STRUTS

200 SERIES STRUT EXTENSIONS (200x200x8 SHS) 200 SERIES BASE PANEL
STRUT ADAPTOR
HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX

500 1000
520
9.205 9.210
52kg 76kg
4.6075
1500 2000 75kg

9.215 9.220
101kg 124kg

3000

9.230
173kg
4000

9.240
223kg

Trench Width Strut Extension Assembled Weight

(mm) Product ID (kg)
4.6075 2400 9.210 226
4.6075 2900 9.215 251
3400 9.220 274
Strut End

4.6075
4.6075 3900 9.220 & 9.205 326
4.6075 4400 9.230 323
4.6075 4900 9.230 & 9.205 375
4.6075 5400 9.240 373

2.4.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

TOP PANEL STRUTS 200 SERIES STRUTS
C/W ADAPTOR
4

200 Series Strut

Specification 200x200x8 SHS

Material Grade S355
Axial SWL 600kN

Component
Suitable for trench widths 2.4m – 5.9m Moment SWL 100kNm
Bolting 8 No. M20x65 (min.)
Details grade 8.8 bolts and
nuts c/w washers
5 Unit Mass 47.7kg/m

HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX

150 SERIES TELESCOPIC
STEEL STRUTS

Suitable for trench widths 2.4m - 3.9m

Strut Inner Strut Outer

Specification 150x150x12.5 SHS 180x180x10 SHS

Material Grade S355 S355
Component

Axial SWL 492kN 492kN

Moment SWL 38.9kNm 38.9kNm
Hole Details Φ48mm holes Φ48mm holes
Unit Mass 52.7kg/m 50.7kg/m

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.4.7

 TOP PANEL STRUT COMBINATIONS
200 SERIES STRUTS 200 SERIES TOP PANEL
STRUT ADAPTOR
200 SERIES STRUT EXTENSIONS 500
(200x200x8 SHS)
9.206
500 1000 40kg

9.205 9.210
52kg 76kg 600
1500 2000
9.207
9.215 9.220 45kg
101kg 124kg
3000 4000
9.230 9.240
173kg 223kg

Trench Width Strut Extension Assembled Weight

(mm) Product ID (kg)

9.206 & 9.207 2400 9.210 162

9.206 & 9.207 2900 9.215 187
9.206 & 9.207 3400 9.220 210
Strut End

9.206 & 9.207 3900 9.220 & 9.205 262

9.206 & 9.207 4400 9.230 259
9.206 & 9.207 4900 9.230 & 9.205 311
9.206 & 9.207 5400 9.240 309
9.206 & 9.207 5900 9.240 & 9.205 361
HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX

150 TELESCOPIC STRUT COMBINATIONS

150 SERIES TELESCOPIC STRUT INNERS 150 SERIES TELESCOPIC STRUT
(150x150x12.5 SHS) OUTER (180x180x10 SHS)
1650 1700
4.804 4.814
79kg 88kg

2500
4.815
129kg

Trench Width Inner Type Outer Type Assembled Weight

(mm) Product ID Product ID (kg)

2400 - 2900 4.804 4.814 170

3400 - 3900 4.804 4.815 211

If the above 150 telescopic strut combinations cannot be achieved a minimum overlap
of at least 250mm must be provided between the inner and outer. Struts should only be
assembled using 1 inner and 1 outer.

2.4.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

STRUT CONNECTING PINS AND RETAINING CLIPS

Base Panel Strut Top Panel Strut

Connecting Pin Connecting Pin
Ø50mm round bar, Ø45mm round bar,
Specification
350mm long 220mm long
Component

Material Grade 708M40 (EN19A) 080M40 (EN8)

Shear SWL 500kN 492kN
Weight 6kg 3kg

HIGH CLEARANCE TRENCH BOX

PANEL BASE TO TOP CONNECTOR

Base to Top
Connector

Product ID 4.1026
Material Grade S355
Component

Hole Details Φ32mm hole

Weight 20kg
M30x130 (min.)
Bolting Details
grade 8.8 bolt

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.4.9

Manhole Box
SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, LIGHT WEIGHT, ROBUST, TWO SIDED MECHANICAL
EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM DESIGNED TO BE INSTALLED BY AN
EXCAVATOR UTILISING THE EXCAVATE AND LOWER IN PLACE TECHNIQUE.
Normally selected for installing shallow utility pipes where ground movement is not critical
and where the use of a small excavator restricts the max. weight of the systems specified.
The system is generally suitable for trench depths of up to 2.42m, widths of up to 1.75m,
pipe lengths of up to 2.5m and a pipe OD of up to 0.75m.
Fabricated from Grade 6082T6 120x60mm aluminium box sections to form 60mm thick
panels, the system comprises trench box bases to which up to 1 No. trench box top may be
added to achieve additional depth. The panels are propped off each other by robust struts
available in a variety of lengths to suit the required width. All components in the system are
connected together via simple pin and r-clip assemblies.
MGF can supply aluminium trench boxes with a full range of suitable lifting and extraction
chains, Edgesafe edge protection panels, Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or wooden
pole ladders, Endsafe protection panels, trench road plates and confined spaces regime
equipment. Manufactured and designed in general accordance with BS EN 13331 : 2002
Parts 1 and 2 Trench lining systems and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary
works procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Boxes should only be used in the configurations shown by
competent persons following MGF installation guidelines.
2. Boxes should not be used in very weak ground (especially very
soft clays and peats) or where significant groundwater is present.
3. Boxes are not normally suitable for usage where ground
movement is an issue and are therefore not recommended for
use in carriageway situations adjacent existing buildings or
structures.
4. Flying of the box above the base
 of the excavation is not recommended.
5. Box systems are heavy and great care must be taken in selecting a suitable excavator

BOXBOXES
for handling, installing and extracting these systems.
6. If stacking panels on site, timber packers must be used to separate the panels.
7. Always ensure box strut on the base unit is fitted with horizontal strut lowest as shown
in assembly drawings.
8. Boxes should not be left in-situ for extended periods within cohesive or very weak soils
as earth pressures / adhesion on the panel surfaces may increase significantly with TRENCH
time requiring additional extraction forces to release the panels.
9. Always use MGF specified extraction chains to release an in-situ box from the ground
UTILITY TRENCH
prior to any attempt to lift the box out of the trench. Always use MGF specified lifting
chains when lifting and handling the boxes or components. N.B. If a box becomes stuck
extraction forces of up to 100kN (10t) can be required to release each corner.
10. Prior to every lifting operation all lifting points must be carefully inspected by a
ALUMINIUM

competent person for evidence of damage.

11. Always enter trench box via a ladder located within the box and never from an
unsupported edge.
12. During lifting or extraction operations ensure personnel are well clear of the equipment.
13. Ends of trench runs should always be battered back at a safe angle or closed off using
sheets or Endsafe panels.
14. Wet concrete can react with aluminium. Panels should be protected from exposure to
wet concrete and any splashes cleaned off immediately.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.5.1

 GRP
LADDER LADDERSAFE EDGESAFE
See Section 8 See Section 7 See Section 7

ALUMINIUM
TRENCH
BOX TOP
BOXBOXES
TRENCH

ALUMINIUM
TRENCH
UTILITY TRENCH

BOX BASE
ALUMINIUM

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE

FOR MGF ALUMINIUM TRENCH BOXES

mgf.co.uk/products/aluminium-trench-box

2.5.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 STRUT POCKET
PIN DETAIL
Telescopic struts are connected
to the panel pockets using a pin
and r-clip detail.

ALUMINIUM PANEL

BOXBOXES
CONNECTOR DETAIL
Panels can be connected together
using a connector piece that pins
the panel struts together.

TRENCH
UTILITY TRENCH
ALUMINIUM

HANDLING POINT
TELESCOPIC STRUT DETAIL All aluminium trench boxes are lifted and
Telescopic strut inners and outers are handled by attaching MGF lifting chains
connected using a pin and r-clip detail. to the handling points as shown.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.5.3

 Product ID

4.901 4.9015 4.900 4.9005 4.902 4.9025

2000 2000 2500 2500 3000 3000

Description × × × × × ×
L×H 1450 970 1450 970 1450 970
Base Top Base Top Base Top

Max. Depth* 2.42 2.42 2.42 2.42 2.42 2.42

(m)

Panel
Resistance 30 30 30 30 25 25
SWL
(kN/m2)

Panel Thick
/ Weight 60 / 145 60 / 98 60 / 168 60 / 112 60 / 191 60 / 126
T(mm)/(kg)

Approx
Assembled 336 242 382 270 428 298
Weight
(kg)

Internal
Trench 735-1635 735-1635 735-1635 735-1635 735-1635 735-1635
Width
Wi(mm)

Trench
Width 855-1755 855-1755 855-1755 855-1755 855-1755 855-1755
BOXBOXES

We(mm)

Clearance
Below
Bottom 825 N/A 825 N/A 825 N/A
Struts
TRENCH

C(mm)

Clearance
UTILITY TRENCH

Between 1790 1790 2290 2290 2790 2790

Struts
Li(mm)

Telescopic
ALUMINIUM

U U U U U U
Strut Type

* Max. depths achievable using a base and 1 top.

2.5.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Li
We
Wi

BOXBOXES
C

L
TRENCH
UTILITY TRENCH
ALUMINIUM

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.5.5

 Strut Type Strut Weight
U-TYPE TELESCOPIC
STEEL STRUTS (kg)

4.904 U 590 Inner 17

Product ID
4.905 U 890 Inner 20
4.906 U 545 Outer 16
4.907 U 845 Outer 19

Internal Trench Width Inner Type Outer Type

(mm)

735 - 1035 4.904 4.906

1035 - 1635 4.905 4.907

Strut Inner Strut Outer

If the above U-Type
Specification 90x90x5 SHS 100x100x4 SHS strut combinations
Material Grade S355 S355 cannot be achieved
Component

a minimum overlap
Axial SWL 80kN 80kN of at least 150mm
Moment SWL 12kNm 12kNm must be provided
between the inner
Hole Details Φ30mm holes Φ30mm holes and outer.
Unit Mass 13.1kg/m 11.9kg/m

U-TYPE TELESCOPIC STRUT PINS

AND RETAINING CLIPS U-Type Strut Pin

Ø28mm round bar,

BOXBOXES

Specification
160mm long
Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8)

Shear SWL 80kN
TRENCH

Weight 1kg

PANEL BASE TO TOP CONNECTOR

UTILITY TRENCH

Base to Top
Connector
Product ID 4.903
ALUMINIUM

Specification 80x80x3.6 SHS

Component

Material Grade S355

The base and top panels are Hole Details Φ30mm slotted holes
connected via 4 No. short lengths Weight 7kg
of box that slot within the vertical
sections of the trench struts. Shear SWL 70kN

2.5.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, ROBUST, TWO SIDED EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
DESIGNED TO BE INSTALLED BY AN EXCAVATOR UTILISING THE EXCAVATE
AND LOWER IN PLACE TECHNIQUE.
Specifically designed for utility repairs, where ground movement is not critical, the system
is suitable for trench depths of up to 2.5m and widths of up to 3.85m. The system has 2.18m
clearance between the struts and a max. understrut clearance of 1.95m, making it suitable
for pipe sizes of up to DN1500.
Fabricated from fully welded, Grade S355 120x60mm steel box sections to form 60mm thick
panels, the system comprises 2.5m tall panel sections which are propped off each other
with 2 high clearance, bolted struts, available in a variety of combinations to enable internal
trench widths from 1.5m up to 3.85m.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable lifting and extraction chains,
Edgesafe edge protection panels, Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or wooden
pole ladders, Davitsafe retrieval / fall arrest systems, Endsafe end protection panels,
trench road plates and confined spaces regime equipment. Manufactured and designed
in accordance with BS EN 13331 : 2002 Parts 1 and 2 Trench lining systems and BS 5975
(2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible stress design
of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. MGF Utility Trench Boxes should only be installed using an excavate and lower in place
technique and must not be driven.
2. A Risk Assessment / Method Statement must be carried
out at site level by the user prior to works commencing
to identify and control site / task specific hazards /
risks including ensuring suitable and sufficient steps
are taken to prevent any person, work equipment or
any accumulation of material from falling into any
excavation.
3. MGF Utility Trench Box should only use the
strut configurations as detailed on page 2.6.5
in ground assessed as self-supporting by
competent persons following MGF installation
guidelines.
4. Boxes should not be used in very weak UTILITY TRENCH BOX
ground (especially very soft clays and peats)
or where significant groundwater is present.
5. Boxes are not normally suitable for usage where ground
movement is an issue and are therefore not recommended for use in live carriageway
situations or adjacent to existing buildings or structures.
6. Flying of the box above the base of the excavation is not recommended.
7. Keep hands and fingers away from pinch points when making connections.
8. MGF Utility Trench Box systems are heavy and great care must be taken in selecting a
suitable excavator for handling, installing and extracting these systems.
9. If stacking panels on site, timber packers must be used to separate the panels.
10. Boxes should not be left in-situ for extended periods within cohesive or very weak soils
as earth pressures / adhesion on the panel surfaces may increase significantly with
time requiring additional extraction forces to release the panels.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.6.1

 11. Always use MGF specified extraction chains to release a stuck box from the ground
prior to any attempt to lift the box out of the trench. Always use MGF specified lifting
chains when lifting and handling the boxes or components. N.B. If a box becomes stuck
extraction forces of up to 100kN (10t) can be required to release each corner.
12. Prior to every lifting operation all lifting points must be carefully inspected by a
competent person for evidence of damage.
13. Always enter the Utility Trench Box via a ladder located within the box and never from
an unsupported edge.
14. During lifting or extraction operations ensure personnel are well clear of the
equipment.
15. Ends of trench runs should always be battered back at a safe angle or closed off using
MGF Endsafe Panels.
16. Ensure all strut connecting bolts are installed and fully torqued prior to installing the box.
17. Avoid standing on steel panels, especially when wet.

LADDERSAFE
See Section 7

GRP LADDER
See Section 8 DAVITSAFE
See Section 7

EDGESAFE
See Section 7
UTILITY TRENCH BOX

UTILITY
UTILITY TRENCH BOX
ENDSAFE PANEL
See Section 7

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE

FOR MGF UTILITY TRENCH BOXES

mgf.co.uk/products/utility-trench-box

2.6.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 UTILITY TRENCH BOX

STRUT EXTENSION HANDLING POINT STRUT HANDLING

DETAIL All Utility Trench Boxes POINTS
Utility Trench Box struts are lifted and handled Utility Trench Box strut
are simply bolted together by attaching MGF lifting extensions feature 2 types
using 10No. grade 8.8 chains to the handling of lifting points, enabling
M24X70 bolts and nuts. points as shown. horizontal and vertical
lifts. When installing struts
onto panels they should be
lowered vertically onto the
panel connecting plates.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.6.3

 Li We
Wi

Product ID 4.135

Description 3000 x 2500

L × H (mm)

Max. Depth 2.5

(m)

Panel Resistance SWL 45

(kN/m2)
UTILITY TRENCH BOX

Panel Thick/ Weight 60 / 900

T(mm)/(kg)

Approx Assembled Weight 1800 - 2324

(kg)

Internal Trench Width 1500 - 3850

Wi(mm)

Trench Width 1620 - 3970

We(mm)

Clearance Below Bottom Struts 1950

C(mm)

Clearance Between Struts 2180

Li(mm)

2.6.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 675 1000

4.1385 4.138
80kg 102kg

External Trench Internal Trench Strut Extension Components Assembled

Width Width Weight
(mm) (mm) (per strut) (kg)

1620 1500 None 1800

2300 2180 1No. 675mm (4.1385) 1960
2620 2500 1No. 1000mm (4.138) 2004
2970 2850 2No. 675mm (4.1385) 2120
1No. 675mm (4.1385)
3300 3180 2164
& 1No. 1000mm (4.138)
3620 3500 2No. 1000mm (4.138) 2208
2No. 675mm (4.1385)
3970 3850 2324
& 1No. 1000mm (4.138)

UTILITY TRENCH BOX

Utility Trench Box

Strut Extension
Specification 406x178x67 UB
Material Grade S355
Component

Axial SWL 170kN

Hole Details 10No. holes for M24x70

bolts and nuts
Unit Mass 67kg/m

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.6.5

Utility Trench Box
MGF KING POSTS AND INFILL LINING PANELS ARE AN IDEAL SOLUTION
WHEN IT IS NOT FEASIBLE TO INSTALL SHEET PILES DUE TO HARD GROUND
CONDITIONS.
The system is made up of steel king posts, generally UC sections that are dropped into
augured holes, below formation level and cast in concrete (the toe-in and centres of the
posts are given by design calculation). MGF steel infill lining panels are provided between
the posts to support the retained earth. The posts are usually lowered within the hole,
which is filled to formation level with concrete and allowed to set, prior to excavating and
installing the panels. The installation method includes pre-auguring, post install, concrete
cured to formation level prior to excavating and panel installation.
The posts commonly range in section size from 203UC to 406UC and the range of infill
panels measure from 1.2m up to 4.0m in length and two can be joined together to assist
removal. The required auger size usually ranges from 450mm to 900mm in diameter.
The infill lining panels are manufactured from fully welded, Grade S355 120x60mm or
200x100mm steel box sections to form 60mm or 100mm thick panels. The range of panels
can be connected to achieve additional retained heights, subject to design check.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable lifting and extracting chains.
Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN 13331 : 2002 Parts 1 & 2 Trench
lining systems and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and
the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. The systems should only be used in the
configurations shown by competent persons
following MGF detailed design and drawings.
2. King posts must be installed vertically to the
specified depths and centres.
3. King post panels must be installed in line with each
other. They can be connected, stacking panels on
top of each other using pins and r-clips.

KING POST AND PANELS

4. King post and panel components can be heavy,
therefore care must be taken in selecting a suitable
excavator for handling, installing and extracting
these systems. If stacking panels on site, timber
packers must be used to separate the panels.
5. Prior to any lifting operation all panel lifting points
must be carefully inspected by a competent person for evidence of damage.
6. During lifting or extraction operations ensure personnel are well clear of the
equipment.
7. The installation of the king post panels must only commence once the concrete has
achieved sufficient strength.
8. If the king post panels have pockets they should be located on the retained side of
the excavation. The pockets will act as a guide between the flanges of the king post.
Otherwise timber packing may be required depending on the design for the panel and
the UC section.
9. Excavation should cease at formation level, this will correspond with the top of concrete
surrounding the king posts.

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.7.1

 Panel Panel Product Panel Required King
(L x H) Thickness ID Weight SWL Post Centres, Cp
(mm) (mm) (kg) (kN/m²) (m)

3000 x 2010
60 4.125 435 45 3.1
LW Base
3000 x 2010
60 4.120 586 45 3.1
Base
3000 x 1100
60 4.140 320 45 3.1
Top
3500 x 2462
100 4.160 970 50 3.6
Base
3500 x 1624
100 4.180 686 50 3.6
Top
KING POST AND PANELS

1800 x 1200
60 4.191 225 45 1.9
Endsafe
2400 x 1200
60 4.192 290 45 2.5
Endsafe
2400 x 1800
60 4.193 410 45 2.5
Endsafe
3000 x 2000
60 4.194 510 45 3.1
Endsafe
2400 x 2400
60 4.196 380 45 2.5
Endsafe
4000 x 2000
100 4.195 845 45 4.1
Endsafe

Base and top units can be connected to achieve additional height.

Endsafe panels cannot be connected to achieve additional height.

2.7.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 HANDLING 60MM THICK 100MM THICK
POINT BASE TO TOP BASE TO TOP
All panels are lifted CONNECTION DETAIL CONNECTION DETAIL
and handled by Panels connect to Panels connect to each
attaching MGF lifting each other using a fork other using a drop-down
chains to the handling connector, pin and connector, a pin and
points as shown. r-clip detail. r-clip detail.

INFILL PANELS CONNECTOR PINS AND RETAINING CLIPS

KING POST AND PANELS

60 Thick Panels 100 Thick Panels

Specification Ø40mm round bar, Ø32mm round bar,

100mm long 210mm long
Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8) 080M40 (EN8)

Shear SWL 384kN 308kN
Weight 1kg 1kg

CONTACT US [email protected] 2.7.3

King post and panels
WALERS AND STRUTS

WALERS AND STRUTS 3.1

ENDSAFE STRUTS 3.2
ALUMINIUM VERTISHORE 3.3
Walers and Struts
MGF WALERS AND STRUTS ARE SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, TWO SIDED,
HYDRAULIC BRACING SYSTEMS DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH STEEL TRENCH
SHEETS TO HORIZONTALLY BRACE SMALL TRENCHES FOR THE SAFE
INSTALLATION OF UTILITIES.
The range comprises 5 types of waler rail and two sizes of hydraulic waler strut together with
0.25m, 0.5m and 1.0m strut extension bars. The systems can support trench widths of 0.6m to
6.0m and are normally installed using excavators. MGF also provide aluminium vertishore, a
lightweight hydraulic system used to brace small trenches vertically.
Fabricated from either grade S355 / S460 / S700 steel profiles or grade 6082T6 aluminium
profiles, the waler rails are attached to the hydraulic struts and extensions, depending on width,
using simple pin and r-clip assemblies. The 250kN hydraulic struts attach to the 152 UC Waler
using clamps or cleats. Each strut contains a hydraulic ram with between 300mm and 670mm of
stroke. Connecting the rams (via hydraulic hoses) to an MGF hand operated hydraulic pump unit
containing hydraulic shoring fluid allows the waler system to be quickly and easily adjusted to suit
the excavation dimensions. Once the trench frames are fully assembled and located at the correct
line and level, the rams are pre-loaded against the trench sheets using a hydraulic pump.
Pre-loading of the struts ensures the frame cannot slip and minimises the extent of potential
ground movements. Self sealing quick release valves and mechanical isolation valves ensure
that the hydraulic ram pressure cannot be accidentally released once installed. Handling and
restraining points are provided on each waler to assist assembly / removal and to allow the brace
to be supported off MGF restraining chains attached to the trench sheets by hooks.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling and restraining chains,
Edgesafe edge protection panels, Endsafe end protection struts, Laddersafe access platforms and
GRP or wooden pole ladders, Davitsafe retrieval / fall arrest systems, hydraulic pump installation
kits (including bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and confined spaces equipment.
Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN 14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually
operated shoring systems for groundwork support and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for
temporary works procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Waler and trench strut systems should only be installed and removed by competent
persons in accordance with a site specific detailed design and installation sequence and
MGF installation guidelines. Struts can be located at a variety of positions along the length
of the waler. The exact location of the struts will determine the safe working load of the
waler system.
2. Installation is normally carried out by lowering the assembled frame
to the correct installation level and preloading each strut in turn
to ensure that the frame is pressed firmly against the trench WALERS AND STRUTS
sheets and cannot slip. Max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar
(1500psi) must not be exceeded.
3. Restraining chains are hung off the trench sheets and
attached to the waler to assist assembly / removal of
the frame and ensure vertical support is provided at
all times. The supplied restraining chains should
be installed (min 2 per waler) and adjusted
to ensure an even vertical load distribution.
Restraining chains should never be used for
lifting nor solely relied upon to suspend loads
above personnel.
4. Ensure all hydraulic ram isolation valves
are closed and all strut pins in place and
secured using the retaining clips provided prior to
commencing works.

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.1.1

 5. Individual walers and struts should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection or
loss of ram pressure prior to entering the excavation.
6. Walers and struts should always be installed square and plumb to the excavation walls ensuring
contact with all the inward facing trench sheet pans. If this is not possible any gaps must be
securely packed by using hardwood wedges prior to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.
7. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier protection (for plant) should
always be considered.
8. Prior to removal of systems all hydraulic rams must be released and retracted to avoid the
need for excessive extraction forces and to avoid damaging the struts.
9. No matter how much care is taken during the installation and removal of the waler and strut
trench systems some ground movement will occur in the areas immediately surrounding
the excavation. Great care must be taken when specifying these systems for use adjacent to
existing structures and services.
10. Ends of trench runs should always be battered back at a safe angle. Alternatively, Endsafe
end protection struts and trench sheets should be utilised (see section 3.2).

EDGESAFE
DAVITSAFE See Section 7
See Section 7

LADDERSAFE
See Section 7

GRP
LADDER
See Section 8
WALERS AND STRUTS

END PROTECTION
STRUTS
See Section 3

STEEL TRENCH SHEETS

WALERS See Section 6

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE

FOR MGF WALERS AND STRUTS

mgf.co.uk/products/walers-and-struts

3.1.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 HANDLING POINT WLL = 2.0T* STANDARD DUTY/
Walers are lifted and handled by attaching UTILITY CHAIN TO SHEET
MGF lifting chains to the handling / CONNECTION DETAIL
restraining points as shown. The hook fits over the sheet.

*Except for Utility Waler, handling point SWL = 0.5t and

Aluminium Waler, handling point SWL = 0.4t.

WALERS AND STRUTS

STANDARD DUTY/UTILITY RESTRAINING

WALER STRUT CHAIN CONNECTION DETAIL
CONNECTION DETAIL There are 2 types of chains used, the top frame will
Waler struts are use shackle to hook type, while lower frames will use
connected to the waler shackle to shackle type. Individual chain links selected
via a pin and r-clip detail. to ensure all restraining chains are evenly loaded.

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.1.3

 Sheet to Sheet Dimension

Clear Internal Dimension

Internal Strut Clearance
C

STEEL PROFILES
115
Type Utility Waler
Waler Lengths 2.0m - 4.0m
Component

Material Grade S700

Moment Capacity 19.1kNm
204

Section Modulus 45.5cm³

Second Moment of Area 276cm4

108
Type Heavy Duty Steel
Waler Lengths 3.0m - 5.0m
Component
WALERS AND STRUTS

Material Grade S460

234

Moment Capacity 40.5kNm

Section Modulus 132cm3
Second Moment of Area 686cm4

162 Type 152UC

Waler Lengths 5.0m
Component

Material Grade S355

Moment Capacity 73.1kNm
154

Section Modulus 309cm3

Second Moment of Area 2210cm4

3.1.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 186 Type 152UC
Waler Lengths 6.0m
Component

Material Grade S355

Moment Capacity 147.2kNm
154

Section Modulus 622cm3

Second Moment of Area 4936cm4
WALERS AND STRUTS

ALUMINIUM PROFILES
100
Type Aluminium
Waler Lengths 1.5m – 4.0m
Component

Material Grade 6082T6

200

Moment Capacity 18.6kNm

Section Modulus 111cm3
Second Moment of Area 529cm4

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.1.5

 UTILITY WALER
WALERS AND STRUTS

Sheet
to Sheet
Waler Product Assembled
Description Weight ID L W C*Max Min. Max. Weight**
(kg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
2000 31.0 1.420 2000 115 1510 575 3800 98
2500 37.0 1.425 2500 115 2010 575 3800 110
3000 43.0 1.430 3000 115 2510 575 3800 122
3500 48.0 1.435 3500 115 2760 575 3800 132
4000 55.0 1.440 4000 115 3380 575 3800 146

*Depends on strut locations. **Assembled weight includes 2 No. type 800 struts without extensions.

3.1.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

HEAVY DUTY Shee
t to S
STEEL WALER e
heet
Dime
L anc nsion
ear
ut Cl
l Str
rna (C)
Inte

Hydraulic Strut

Sheet
to Sheet
Waler Product Assembled
Description Weight ID L W C*Max Min. Max. Weight**
(kg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
3000 112 1.330 3000 108 2420 565 3800 236
4000 148 1.340 4000 108 3420 565 3800 302
5000 184 1.350 5000 108 4420 565 3800 368

*Depends on strut locations. **Assembled weight includes 2 No. type 800 struts without extensions.

152UC STEEL WALER

FOR SAFE SYSTEM

OF WORKS GUIDANCE
WALERS AND STRUTS
FOR MGF 152UC
STEEL WALER

mgf.co.uk/products/
152uc-waler

Sheet
to Sheet
Waler Product Assembled
Description Weight ID L W C*Max Min. Max. Weight**
(kg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
5000 205 1.0050 5000 162 4540 950 6000 640
6000 385 1.0060 6000 186 5540 975 6000 1000

*Depends on strut locations. **Assembled weight includes 2 No. 250kN Hydraulic Struts.

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.1.7

 ALUMINIUM WALER

Sheet
to Sheet
Waler Product Assembled
Description Weight ID L W C*Max Min. Max. Weight**
(kg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
1500 18 1.015 1500 100 1010 565 3800 72
2000 24 1.020 2000 100 1510 565 3800 84
2500 30 1.025 2500 100 1910 565 3800 96
3000 36 1.030 3000 100 2410 565 3800 108
3500 42 1.035 3500 100 2910 565 3800 119
4000 47 1.040 4000 100 3310 565 3800 130

*Depends on strut locations. **Assembled weight includes 2 No. type 800 struts without extensions.
WALERS AND STRUTS

3.1.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

80kN SINGLE
ACTING HYDRAULIC
RAM ASSEMBLY

Single Acting
Material Aluminium
Bore 50.8mm
Max. Working Pressure 400 Bar (6000 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure 400 Bar (6000 psi)

Approx. Working Stroke 350mm / 600mm
Axial SWL 80kN
Min. FOS (by test) 2
Working Temp Range -20ºC* to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 20kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)

* Winter mix required for shoring fluid at low temps.

Dowty
⅜" BSP washer
Shoring fluid is pumped into the isolation
full bore side of the piston through valve
the male quick release valve (QRV).
Single acting cylinders cannot be
retracted using a pump unit and
have to be physically closed whilst
releasing the male QRV.
Ensure isolation valve is closed to ¼" male
to male
maintain pre-load pressure and
before release / connection of QRVs. ¼" BSP male QRV

PUMP UNITS The pump is used to extend waler strut single acting hydraulic
WALERS AND STRUTS
rams. The pumps contain bio-degradable Houghto Safe
SF25 shoring fluid. During the Summer months the shoring
fluid is diluted with water at a ratio of 3 parts water to 1 part
Houghto Safe SF25. In the Winter the mix ratio is 1:1. Maximum
recommended installation pressure 1500 psi (100 Bar).

Product ID 1.602 (SA)

Component

Capacity 20 litres
Weight 25kg
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure 0-1500 psi

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.1.9

 WALER HYDRAULIC STRUT CONNECTION PIN
Component Pin Ø16 bar, 160mm long
Material Grade 080M40 (EN8)
Shear SWL 80kN
Weight 1kg

The waler hydraulic strut is

connected to the waler using a
pin and r-clip detail.

Waler Struts - Hydraulic Single Acting (SWL=80kN)

External Dimensions
Type Product ID Min. Max. Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg)

550 (A) 1.455 550 900 13

800 (C) 1.480 800 1400 18
Ext. Min. Max. Weight
1 1.525 250 N/A 5
WALERS AND STRUTS

2 1.550 500 N/A 10

3 1.510 1000 N/A 20

Extension bar 88.9 x 5.0

CHS Grade S275

The waler strut extension is bolted

to the hydraulic strut using 4 No.
M10x40 (min.) grade 8.8 bolts
c/w nuts and washers. The strut
extension is connected to the waler
using a pin and r-clip detail.

3.1.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SWL FOR STEEL UTILITY WALERS
AT VARIOUS STRUT POSITIONS
1600 1250

1510 1160
2.0m
UTILITY
WALER

SWL = 64kN/m SWL = 80kN/m

∆ = 10mm ∆ = 3mm

2100 1750

2010 1660
2.5m
UTILITY
WALER

SWL = 36kN/m SWL = 61kN/m

∆ = 17mm ∆ = 11mm

2600 2000

2510 1910
3.0m
UTILITY
WALER

SWL = 23kN/m SWL = 51kN/m

∆ = 26mm ∆ = 14mm

2850 2260

2760 2170
3.5m
UTILITY
WALER

SWL = 20kN/m SWL = 43kN/m

∆ = 31mm ∆ = 18mm

3470 2640

3380 2550
WALERS AND STRUTS
4.0m
UTILITY
WALER

SWL = 13kN/m* SWL = 30kN/m

∆ = 46mm ∆ = 25mm

*BS EN 14653 recommends a minimum SWL of 20kN/m

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.1.11

 SWL FOR HEAVY DUTY STEEL WALERS
AT VARIOUS STRUT POSITIONS
2510 1930

3.0m HEAVY
2420 DUTY STEEL 1840
WALER

SWL = 51kN/m SWL = 51kN/m

∆max = 16mm ∆max = 4mm

3510 2930

3420 2840

SWL = 27kN/m 4.0m HEAVY SWL = 39kN/m

∆max = 33mm DUTY STEEL ∆max = 21mm
WALER
1755 1755 1465 1465

1665 1665 1375 1375

SWL = 38kN/m SWL = 52kN/m

∆max = 1mm ∆max = 1mm
890 800
4510 3310

4420 3220

SWL = 16kN/m* SWL = 32kN/m

∆max = 54mm 5.0m HEAVY ∆max = 22mm
DUTY STEEL
WALER
2255 2255 1965 1965

2165 2165 1875 1875

SWL = 30kN/m SWL = 36kN/m

∆max = 3mm ∆max = 2mm

SWL FOR ALUMINIUM WALERS AT VARIOUS STRUT POSITIONS

910 2410
WALERS AND STRUTS

820 2320

1.5m SWL = 97kN/m 3.0m SWL = 27kN/m

ALUMINIUM WALER ∆max = 2mm ALUMINIUM WALER ∆max = 30mm

1410 2910

1320 2820

2.0m SWL = 75kN/m 3.5m SWL = 18kN/m*

ALUMINIUM WALER ∆max = 9mm ALUMINIUM WALER ∆max = 44mm

1910 3310

1820 3320

2.5m SWL = 45kN/m 4.0m SWL = 13kN/m*

ALUMINIUM WALER ∆max = 19mm ALUMINIUM WALER ∆max = 60mm

3.1.12 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SWL FOR 152 UC STEEL WALER AT VARIOUS STRUT POSITIONS

4540 max. 5.0m 152 UC 2840

WALER
SWL = 25.5kN/m SWL = 100kN/m
∆max = 40mm ∆max = 17mm

5540 max. 6.0m 152 UC 3940 min.

WALER
SWL = 35.2kN/m SWL = 83.3kN/m
∆max = 49mm ∆max = 23mm

MGF’s 152 UC Steel Waler is designed to be used with the 200 Series 250kN Hydraulic Strut
in conjunction with 152 UC Waler clamps (5.1.11). The clamps simply bolt to the endplate
using 2 No. M20 bolts. Prior to connecting the struts it is recommended to loosely bolt the
top 152 UC clamp and then locate the strut on the waler, once positioned the top clamp can
be fully tightened and the bottom clamp can then be installed.
On the 5.0m 152 UC Waler the struts can be positioned anywhere
along the waler. On the 6.0m 152 UC Waler the struts can be
positioned anywhere in between the min. and max. clearance, as
shown above.
When the 200 Series strut is installed in its outer most positions it
can also be used as an end protection strut, allowing sheets to be
installed up against the strut, enabling up to 4 sided excavations.

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR 200 SERIES STRUT

AS WALER END PROTECTION STRUTS (kN/m)

WALERS AND STRUTS

The above graph is based on 200 Series struts being used as Endsafe Struts
when clamped to 152UC Waler.

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.1.13

Endsafe
ENDSAFE STRUTS ARE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MGF WALER FRAMES
WHEN IT IS NOT SUITABLE TO SAFELY BATTER BACK THE TRENCH ENDS
TO GROUND LEVEL. THEY ARE DESIGNED TO BE QUICKLY AND EASILY
INSTALLED, BY HAND, BY UP TO 2 OPERATIVES AT THE END OF A WALER RUN
TO SUPPORT TRENCH SHEETS.
MGF can supply 2 Endsafe Strut systems – Light Duty Endsafe Struts and Heavy Duty Endsafe
Struts. LD Endsafe is suitable for trench widths of between 0.7m and 2.0m, while the HD Endsafe
Struts are suitable for trench widths from 1.65m up to 3.375m.
Both ranges are telescopic and include 1 outer section and a range of inner sections. They can be
assembled and installed by hand, with the max. assembled weight of the LD system being 25kg,
and 50kg for the HD system.
Fabricated from grade S355 steel box sections and plates the Endsafe Struts connect to MGF
walers using waler pins and r-clips. A waler pin and r-clip should be used to connect the Endsafe
Strut inner and outer together for handling but should be removed when installing within the
waler frame prior to pre-loading the waler frame against the steel sheets. It is essential that
all the waler struts are fully pre-loaded before putting any load onto or installing trench sheets
against the Endsafe Struts.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. MGF Endsafe Struts are designed
to be quickly and easily installed
by hand to support the open end
of a trench run created using
MGF sheets and walers. 1 person
can assemble and install LD
Endsafe Struts, 2 people should
assemble and install the HD
Endsafe Struts.
2. MGF Endsafe Struts are supplied
in accordance with BS EN 13331:2002
Parts 1 & 2 Trench Lining Systems.
3. Prior to use inspect the equipment for damage and make yourself familiar with its assembly.
4. The struts are telescopic and whenever being handled they should be fully closed with the
central pin and r-clip secured to prevent any sliding / trapping of fingers. Always use the
handles provided.
5. Always work from a position of safety and ensure that the soil beyond the end of the trench is
stable / batted back and cannot collapse onto personnel installing the struts.
6. Offer the strut up to the walers and remove the central pin, extending the strut so that the
end sits squarely within the waler rails. Install the pins through the waler rail locating holes
ENDSAFE STRUTS
and struts to secure the ends. Secure pins using the r-clips. The waler frame struts must
now be pre-loaded.
7. Ensure the minimum overlap between inner and outer exceeds 150mm when the waler frame
is pre loaded - refer to section 3.2.2 for recommended strut configuration details.
8. Trench sheets can now be installed against the outside face of the struts by carefully lowering
down vertically.
9. Endsafe Struts are compatible with Heavy Duty and Utility Steel Walers, as well as Aluminium
Walers. Ensure the Endsafe bearing bolts are present if the Endsafe Struts are being used
with the Aluminium Walers.
10. Ensure that the correct Endsafe outer section is used for the desired capacity / range. LD
Outer Strut must never be used with a HD Inner Endsafe Strut and vice versa. The Endsafe
Strut ranges are coloured to suit the range. LD Endsafe Struts are painted red while the HD
Endsafe Struts are painted yellow.

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.2.1

 Trench Width

Product Description Min. Max. Weight

(mm) (mm) (kg)
1.700 550 LD Endsafe Outer Strut - - 7
1.701 634 LD Endsafe Inner Strut 700 1060 8
1.702 884 LD Endsafe Inner Strut 965 1310 10
1.703 1134 LD Endsafe Inner Strut 1210 1560 13
1.704 1384 LD Endsafe Inner Strut 1455 1810 15
Product ID

1.705 1584 LD Endsafe Inner Strut 1650 2010 17

1.720 550 HD Endsafe Outer Strut - - 9
1.721 1584 HD Endsafe Inner Strut 1650 2010 24
1.722 1834 HD Endsafe Inner Strut 1900 2260 27
1.723 2084 HD Endsafe Inner Strut 2150 2510 31
1.724 2334 HD Endsafe Inner Strut 2400 2760 34
1.725 2584 HD Endsafe Inner Strut 2650 3010 37
1.726 2950 HD Endsafe Inner Strut 3015 3375 41
ENDSAFE STRUTS

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE

FOR MGF ENDSAFE STRUTS

mgf.co.uk/products/waler-end-protection-struts

3.2.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

LIGHT DUTY ENDSAFE STRUTS

LD ENDSAFE STRUT INNERS LD ENDSAFE STRUT OUTER

(90x90x4 SHS) (100x100x4 SHS)

634mm 550mm
1.701 8kg 7kg 1.700
884mm
1.702 10kg
1134mm
1.703 13kg
1384mm
1.704 15kg
1584mm
1.705 17kg

Inner Material 90 x 90 x 4 SHS (S355)

Component

Inner Unit Mass 10.5kg/m

Outer Material 100 x 100 x 4 SHS (S355)
Outer Unit Mass 11.9kg/m

LIGHT DUTY ENDSAFE STRUT LOAD CHART

ENDSAFE STRUTS

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.2.3

 HEAVY DUTY ENDSAFE STRUTS
HD ENDSAFE STRUT INNERS HD ENDSAFE STRUT OUTER
(80x80x4 SHS c/w 5 THK (100x100x4 SHS c/w 4 THK
STRENGTHENING PLATES) STRENGTHENING PLATES)

1584mm 550mm
1.721 24kg 9kg 1.720
1834mm
1.722 27kg
2084mm
1.723 31kg
2334mm
1.724 34kg
2584mm
1.725 37kg
2950mm
1.726 41kg

Inner Material 80 x 80 x 4 SHS (S355) c/w 5thk. strengthening plates

Component

Inner Unit Mass 16.7kg/m

Outer Material 100 x 100 x 4 SHS (S355) c/w 4thk. strengthening plates
Outer Unit Mass 16.1kg/m

HEAVY DUTY ENDSAFE STRUT LOAD CHART

Safe Working Load for MGF End Protection Struts
40.0

35.0

30.0
Safe Working Load (kN/m)

25.0
ENDSAFE STRUTS

1584 Inner 2084 Inner 2584 Inner

20.0

15.0

1834 Inner 2334 Inner 2950 Inner

10.0

5.0

0.0
1.65 1.75 1.85 1.95 2.05 2.15 2.25 2.35 2.45 2.55 2.65 2.75 2.85 2.95 3.05 3.15 3.25 3.35
Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

3.2.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

LD & HD ENDSAFE STRUT CONNECTING PIN

Pin Ø16 bar, 160mm long

Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8)

Shear SWL 80kN
Weight 1kg

Ø16mm pins
and R-clips

Waler Hydraulic Strut

Endsafe Inner Endsafe Outer

ENDSAFE STRUTS

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.2.5

ENDSAFE STRUTS

3.2.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

ALUMINIUM VERTISHORE Pre-assembled, lightweight, two sided
1000 hydraulic waler strut system designed to be
board installed from ground level directly against
a soil face in the vertical plane. Suitable for
trenches up to 2.0m deep and 1.4m wide.
The system can be installed by one person

250
and is usually specified for short term
utilities type trench work where the ground
is considered self supporting and capable

650 / 1150
of arching a min 1.5m between preloaded
1500 / 2000

hydraulic vertical supports for the duration

of the works. Backing boards are available
to prevent localised pockets of loose
material entering the excavation. Personnel
should only enter and work in the space
600

between two vertishores. A competent

person should always inspect the excavation
before allowing access to ensure that all the
struts are pre-loaded and bearing directly
onto the soil, the exposed soil faces are
SWL = 20kN/m (on Vertishore) self supporting with no evidence of water
ingress or very loose material. Vertical
support must be provided at a max. 1.5m
horizontally. Always install and remove the
Description Product ID Weight* system from ground level and away from
any potentially unstable edges. Vertishores
(kg)
are supplied with an installation kit,
1500 1.014 28 including a pump unit, lowering hook and
valve release tool.
2000 1.0141 35
Available hydraulic struts
Type A: 550-900mm
*Assembled weight (excluding boards) with Type B1: 850-1375mm
type A struts.

ALUMINIUM VERTISHORE

CONTACT US [email protected] 3.3.1

 T700 Brace
and Sheet Piles
HYDRAULIC BRACING

COMPATIBILITY GUIDE 4.0

MANHOLE BRACES 4.1
ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE 4.2
203 UC BRACE 4.3
203 UC+ BRACE 4.4
305 UC BRACE 4.5
406 UC BRACE 4.6
T700 BRACE 4.7
 MGF MANHOLE BRACE COMPATIBILITY GUIDE
Leg 1

120 Series 150 Series 200 Series

1500-2400 1700 2200 1400 1900 3000 3600 4900

Aluminium - 2500 - 3600 - 1900 - 3100 - 4100 - 4700 - 6000
Utility (A Leg) (B Leg) (AB- Leg) (AB Leg) (BC Leg) (CD Leg) (D Leg)

1500-2400
Aluminium
Utility
 X X X X X X X
1700-2500
X   X X (1) (1) (1)
120 Series

(A Leg)

2200-3600
(B Leg) X   X X (1) (1) (1)
1400-1900
X X X   (2) (2) (2)
150 Series

(AB- Leg)
Leg 2

1900-3100
(AB Leg) X X X   (2) (2) (2)
3000-4100
(BC Leg) X (1) (1) (2) (2)   
200 Series

3600-4700
(CD Leg) X (1) (1) (2) (2)   
4900-6000
(D Leg) X (1) (1) (2) (2)   
(1) 120-200 Series manhole brace adaptors required.
(2) 150-200 Series manhole brace adaptors required.

MGF TANK BRACE COMPATIBILITY GUIDE

Leg 1
203 UC 203 UC+ 305 UC 406 UC T700 BRACE

203 UC   X X X
COMPATIBILITY GUIDE

203 UC+   X X X
X X
Leg 2

305 UC  (1) (1)

406 UC X X (1)  
T700 Brace X X (1)  
(1) Remove 406UC corner brackets.

203 UC 203 UC+ 305 UC 406 UC T700 BRACE

4.0.1 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, FOUR SIDED, HYDRAULIC BRACING FRAME SYSTEMS DESIGNED
TO BE USED WITH STEEL TRENCH SHEETS OR SHEET PILES TO BRACE SMALL
COFFERDAMS FOR THE SAFE INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES, PITS AND TANKS. THE
RANGE COMPRISES SEVEN SIZES OF HYDRAULIC BRACING FRAME LEGS RANGING
IN LENGTH FROM 1.4M TO 6.0M AND IS NORMALLY INSTALLED USING EITHER
EXCAVATORS OR CRANES.
Fabricated from grade S355 SHS steel box sections the legs are assembled to form a frame
using simple corner pin and retaining clip assemblies. Each leg contains a hydraulic ram with
between 630mm and 1300mm of stroke. Connecting the rams (via hydraulic hoses) to an MGF
hydraulic pump unit containing hydraulic shoring fluid allows the leg lengths to be quickly and
easily adjusted to suit the excavation dimensions. Once the frames are fully assembled and
located at the correct line and level, the rams are pre-loaded against the trench sheets using a
hydraulic pump. Pre-loading of the legs ensures the frame cannot slip and minimises the extent
of potential ground movements. Self sealing quick release valves and mechanical isolation valves
ensure that the hydraulic ram pressure cannot be accidentally released once installed. Handling
and restraining points are provided on each leg to assist assembly / removal and to allow the
brace to be supported by MGF restraining chains attached to the trench sheets by hooks.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling and restraining chains,
Edgesafe edge protection panels, Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or wooden pole ladders,
Davitsafe retrieval / fall arrest systems, hydraulic pump installation kits (including bio-degradable
shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and confined spaces regime equipment. Manufactured and
designed in accordance with BS EN 14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated shoring systems
for groundwork support and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and
the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Manhole brace should only be installed and removed by
competent persons in accordance with a site specific detailed
design & installation sequence and MGF installation guidelines.
2. Installation is normally carried out by lowering either the
assembled frame or individual legs (dependant upon lifting
capacity of excavator / crane) to the correct installation level
and once the frame is fully assembled, pre-loading each leg in turn
to ensure that the frame is pressed firmly against the trench sheets
and cannot slip. Max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi) must not be
exceeded.
3. Restraining chains are hung off the trench sheets and attached to the legs to assist assembly
/ removal of the frame and ensure vertical support is provided at all times. All the supplied
restraining chains should be installed (min. 2 per leg) and adjusted to ensure an even vertical
load distribution. Restraining chains should never be used for lifting nor solely relied upon to
suspend loads above personnel. MANHOLE BRACES
4. Ensure all hydraulic ram isolation valves are closed and all corner pins in place and secured
using the retaining clips provided prior to commencing works.
5. Individual brace legs should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection or loss of
ram pressure prior to entering the excavation.
6. Legs should always be installed square and plumb to the excavation walls ensuring contact
with all the inward facing trench sheet pans. If this is not possible any gaps must be securely
packed by using hardwood wedges prior to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.
7. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier protection (for plant) should
always be considered.
8. Prior to removal of systems all hydraulic rams must be released and retracted to avoid the
need for excessive extraction forces and to avoid damaging corner joints.
9. No matter how much care is taken during the installation and removal of hydraulic bracing
systems some ground movement will occur in the areas immediately surrounding the
excavation. Great care must be taken when specifying these systems for use adjacent to
existing structures and services.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.1.1

 DAVITSAFE
See Section 7

LADDERSAFE
See Section 7
EDGESAFE
See Section 7

MANHOLE
MANHOLE BRACES

BRACE TRENCH SHEETS

See Section 6

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE

FOR MGF MANHOLE BRACE

mgf.co.uk/products/manhole-brace

4.1.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 HANDLING POINT STANDARD DUTY RESTRAINING CHAIN
WLL = 2.0T CONNECTION DETAIL - WLL = 2.0T
All manhole brace legs There are 2 types of chains used, the top frame will use
and frames are lifted shackle to hook type, while lower frames will use shackle
and handled by attaching to shackle type. Individual chain links are selected to
MGF lifting chains to the ensure all restraining chains are evenly loaded.
handling / restraining
points as shown.

MANHOLE BRACES

LEG CONNECTION DETAIL STANDARD DUTY CHAIN TO

Manhole brace legs are connected to SHEET CONNECTION DETAIL
each other using a pin and r-clip detail. The hook fits over the sheet.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.1.3

 With the use of manhole brace
adaptors in the corners, different
manhole brace legs can be
connected to each other. Legs must
be installed at 90° to each other.

50
max. 120 (120 Series)
150 (150 Series)
200 (200 Series)

Clear Internal Dimension

MANHOLE BRACES

Pin to Pin Dimension

Sheet to Sheet Dimension

4.1.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 rlap
Ove
ter
Ou
n Manhole brace legs comprise
n sio inner and outer sleeved steel
i me
er in D box sections housing either
Inn to
P
single acting (SA) or double
Pin
acting (DA) hydraulic rams to
provide up to 1500mm of
leg adjustment.

Rod
locating pin
Cylinder
locating pin

Hydraulic valves

Sheet to Sheet
Compatible

Leg Weight
Ram SWL
Hydraulic
Dimension
Series
With*

Product
Description Min. Max.
(m) (m) (kg)
120 Series Manhole
7.201
Brace 1700-2500 (A) 1.73 2.617 200 SA 80kN 120

120 Series Manhole

7.202 2.192 3.703 200 SA 70kN 172
Brace 2200-3600 (B)
MANHOLE BRACES
150 Series Manhole
7.200 1.375 2.005 200 DA 120kN 146
Brace 1400-1900 (AB-)
Product ID

150 Series Manhole

7.207 1.943 3.143 200 DA 120kN 200
Brace 1900-3100 (AB)

200 Series Manhole

DA 7.204 2.973 4.173 120 / 150 DA 100kN 312
Brace 3000-4100 (BC)

200 Series Manhole

DA 7.205 3.573 4.773 120 / 150 DA 100kN 341
Brace 3600-4700 (CD)

200 Series Manhole

DA 7.206 4.863 6.063 120 / 150 DA 100kN 500
Brace 4900-6000 (D)

* Refer to page 4.1.14 for adaptor details.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.1.5

 OUT IN ¼" BSP
male QRV
DOUBLE ACTING HYDRAULIC
CYLINDER CONNECTIONS ¼" BSP
⅜" BSP
isolation
female QRV valve
Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore
side of the piston through the male quick Dowty
release valve (QRV) to extend the ram. washer
At the same time fluid from the return side
¼" male
of the piston is returned to the pump via to male
the female QRV. Retraction is a reverse of
extension. Ensure isolation valve is closed
to maintain pre-load pressure and before
release / connection of QRVs.

⅜" BSP
SINGLE ACTING HYDRAULIC ¼" BSP
male QRV isolation
CYLINDER CONNECTIONS valve

Dowty
Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore washer
side of the piston through the male QRV.
Single acting cylinders cannot be retracted ¼" male
using a pump unit and have to be physically to male
closed whilst releasing the male QRV.
Ensure isolation valve is closed to maintain
pre-load pressure and before release /
connection of QRVs.

PUMP UNITS The pumps are used to extend and

retract the manhole brace single
acting and double acting hydraulic
rams (SA and DA). The pumps contain
bio-degradable Houghto Safe SF25
shoring fluid. During the Summer
months the shoring fluid is diluted
with water at a ratio of 3 parts water
to 1 part Houghto Safe SF25. In the
Winter the mix ratio is 1:1. Maximum
recommended installation pressure 1500 psi (100
Bar). There are 3 types of pumps available, manually
MANHOLE BRACES

operated single acting and double acting bucket

pump and a motorised petrol pump (suitable for use
with double acting hydraulic rams only).

Bucket Pump Petrol Motorised Pump

Product ID 1.602 (SA), 1.603 (DA) 8.4007 (DA)

Component

Fluid Capacity (L) 20 70

Weight (kg) 25 270
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure (psi) 0-1500 0-1500

4.1.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

120 SERIES
MANHOLE BRACES

Inner Section Outer Section

Leg Assembly Specification 100x100x10 SHS 120x120x8 SHS

SINGLE ACTING Material Grade S355 S355

1700 TO
3600MM LEGS Unit Mass 27.4kg/m 27.6kg/m
Compatible
Axial SWL 80kN 80kN
with 200 Series
Manhole Brace. Moment SWL 24kNm 30kNm

Single Acting

Material Aluminium
Bore 50.8mm
Max. Working Pressure 400 Bar (5800 psi)[1] / 350 Bar (5000 psi)[2]
Test Pressure 400 Bar (5800 psi)[1] / 350 Bar (5000 psi)[2]
Hydraulic Cylinder

Approx. Working Stroke 800mm[1] / 1400mm[2]

Axial SWL 80kN[1] / 70kN[2]
Min. FOS (by test) 2
Working Temp Range -20ºC* to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 20kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ18 and Φ20mm MANHOLE BRACES
* Winter mix required for shoring fluid at low temps.
[1] 120 Series Manhole Brace 1700-2500. [2] 120 Series Manhole Brace 2200-3600.

120 / 150 SERIES MANHOLE BRACE PIN

Pin Φ25mm bar, 200mm long

Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8)

Shear SWL 120kN
Weight 1kg

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.1.7

 120 series (A Leg)
SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 120 SERIES
MANHOLE BRACE 1700-2500 (A)
80 4

70 6

Maximum Predicted Deflection (mm)

60 8

50 10
ximum SWL (kN/m)

40 12
Maximum

30 14

20 16

10 18

0 20
1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6

Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

120 series (B Leg)

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 120 SERIES
MANHOLE BRACE 2200-3600 (B)
Page 1

45 10

40 15

35 20 m Predicted Deflection (mm)

aximum SWL (kN/m)

30 25
MANHOLE BRACES

25 30
Maximum

20 35
Maximum

15 40

10 45
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7

Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.
Page 1

4.1.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

150 SERIES MANHOLE BRACES

DOUBLE ACTING
1400 TO 3100MM LEGS
Compatible with 200 Series
Manhole Brace.

Inner Section Outer Section

120x120x10 SHS
Specification (+ 2 No. 80x6mm thk. stiffening plates) 150x150x8 SHS
Leg Assembly

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 44kg/m 35.1kg/m
Axial SWL 120kN 120kN
Moment SWL 50kNm 50kNm

Double Acting
Material Steel
Bore 63mm
Max. Working Pressure 400 Bar (5800 psi)
Test Pressure 400 Bar (5800 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Approx. Working Stroke 630mm[1] / 1200mm[2]

Axial SWL 120kN
Min. FOS (by test) 2
Working Temp Range -20ºC* to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 30kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ18 and Φ20mm MANHOLE BRACES
* Winter mix required for shoring fluid at low temps.
[1] 150 Series Manhole Brace 1400-1900. [2] 150 Series Manhole Brace 1900-3100.

120 / 150 SERIES MANHOLE BRACE PIN

Pin Φ25mm bar, 200mm long

Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8)

Shear SWL 120kN
Weight 1kg

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.1.9

 SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 150 SERIES
120 series (B Leg)

MANHOLE BRACE 1400-1900 (AB-)

180 0

170 1

m Predicted Deflection (mm)

160 2
Maximum SWL (kN/m)

150 3

140 4

130 5

Maximum
120 6

110 7
1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2
Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 150

120 seriesPage 1 SERIES
(B Leg)

MANHOLE BRACE 1900-3100 (AB)

130 0

120 2

Maximum Predicted Deflection (mm)

110 4

100 6
aximum SWL (kN/m)

90 8
MANHOLE BRACES

80 10
Maximum

70 12

60 14

50 16

40 18
1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1
Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.
Page 1

4.1.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

200 SERIES MANHOLE BRACES

DOUBLE ACTING 3000

TO 6000MM LEGS
Compatible with 120 Series
and 150 Series Manhole Brace.

Inner Section Outer Section

200x200x8 SHS
Specification 180x180x10 SHS (+ 2 No. 200x12 thk. stiffening plates)[1]
Leg Assembly

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 50.7kg/m 47.7kg/m / 66kg/m[1]
Axial SWL 100kN DA 100kN DA
Moment SWL 90kNm 90kNm / 180 kNm[1]

[1] Corresponds to 200 Series Manhole Brace 4900-6000 only.

Double Acting
Material Steel
Bore 63mm
Max. Working Pressure 350 Bar (5000 psi)
Test Pressure 350 Bar (5000 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Working Stroke 1200mm

Axial SWL 100kN
Min. FOS (by test) 2
Working Temp Range -20ºC* to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 30kN MANHOLE BRACES
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ18 and Φ20mm

* Winter mix required for shoring fluid at low temps.

200 SERIES MANHOLE BRACE PIN

Pin Φ25mm bar, 265mm long
Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8)

Shear SWL 120kN
Weight 1kg

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.1.11

 120 series (B Leg) SA
SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 200 SERIES
MANHOLE BRACE 3000-4100 DA (BC)
70 0

65 5

m Predicted Deflection (mm)

ximum SWL (kN/m)

60 10

55 15
Maximum

Maximum
50 20

45 25
3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4 4.1
Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

120 series (B Leg) SA

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 200 SERIES

Page 1
MANHOLE BRACE 3600-4700 DA (CD)
60 0

55 5

m Predicted Deflection (mm)

Maximum SWL (kN/m)

50 10

45 15
MANHOLE BRACES

40 20
Maximum

35 25

30 30
3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8
Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.
Page 1

4.1.12 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 200 SERIES
120 series (A Leg)

MANHOLE BRACE 4900-6000 DA (D)

45 15

40 20 m Predicted Deflection (mm)

Maximum SWL (kN/m)

35 25
MANHOLE BRACES
30 30
Maximum

25 35

20 40
4.9 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6

Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.
Page 1

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.1.13

 MANHOLE BRACE ADAPTORS
120-200 SERIES MANHOLE BRACE ADAPTORS
120 Series Pin 120 Series Pin
∆ = 162
120 Series
∆ = 175

200
Series
Pin
Product ID
7.301 200
Series
Product ID Pin
7.3015

200 Series 200 Series

The 120-200 Series Manhole Brace adaptors allow 2 legs

of 120 Series to be connected with 2 legs of 200 Series.
The length of the 120 Series leg will increase by 208mm
and the 200 Series will increase by 109mm.

150-200 SERIES MANHOLE BRACE ADAPTORS

150 Series Pin 150 Series Pin
∆ = 175 150 Series

∆ = 162

200
Series
Pin
Product ID
MANHOLE BRACES

7.208 Product ID
7.2085 200
Series
Pin
200 Series 200 Series

The 150-200 Series Manhole Brace adaptors allow 2 legs

of 150 Series to be connected with 2 legs of 200 Series.
The length of the 150 Series leg will increase by 185mm
and the 200 Series will increase by 149mm.

4.1.14 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Manhole brace installed back to back to form a trench.

MANHOLE BRACES

Manhole brace used in conjunction with walers.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.1.15

Manhole Brace
SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, FOUR SIDED, ALUMINIUM HYDRAULIC BRACING FRAME
SYSTEM, DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH STEEL TRENCH SHEETS TO BRACE SMALL,
SHALLOW COFFERDAMS FOR THE SAFE INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES AND UTILITIES.
THE LEGS RANGE IN LENGTH FROM 1.5M TO 2.4M AND CAN BE INSTALLED BY HAND OR
USING SMALL EXCAVATORS.
Fabricated from extruded aluminium sections (6082TF material) the legs are assembled to form a frame
using simple corner pin and retaining clip assemblies. Each leg contains a single acting hydraulic ram
with 915mm of stroke. Connecting the rams (via hydraulic hoses) to an MGF hand operated hydraulic
pump unit containing hydraulic shoring fluid allows the leg lengths to be quickly and easily adjusted to
suit the excavation dimensions. Once the frames are fully assembled and located at the correct line and
level, the rams are pre-loaded against the trench sheets using a hydraulic pump. Pre-loading of the legs
ensures the frame cannot slip and minimises the extent of potential ground movements. Self sealing
quick release valves and mechanical isolation valves ensure that the hydraulic ram pressure cannot be
accidentally released once installed. Handling and restraining points are provided on each leg to assist
assembly / removal and to allow the brace to be supported by MGF restraining chains attached to the
trench sheets by hooks.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling and restraining chains, Edgesafe edge
protection panels, Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or wooden ladders, Davitsafe retrieval / fall
arrest systems, hydraulic pump installation kits (including bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic
hoses) and confined spaces regime equipment. Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN
14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated shoring systems for groundwork support and BS 5975
(2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Manhole brace should only be installed and

ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE

removed by competent persons in accordance
with a site specific detailed design & installation
sequence and MGF installation guidelines.
2. Installation can be carried out by hand, assembling
the frame, leg by leg, within the excavation or
by lowering the assembled frame to the correct
installation level, and once the frame is fully
assembled, pre-loading each leg in turn to ensure that the frame is pressed firmly against the
trench sheets and cannot slip. Max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi) must not be exceeded.
3. Restraining chains are hung off the trench sheets and attached to the legs to assist assembly
/ removal of the frame and ensure vertical support is provided at all times. All the supplied
restraining chains should be installed (min. 2 per leg) and adjusted to ensure an even vertical load
distribution. Restraining chains should never be used for lifting nor solely relied upon to suspend
loads above personnel.
4. Ensure all hydraulic ram isolation valves are closed and all corner pins in place and secured using
the retaining clips provided prior to commencing works.
5. Individual brace legs should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection or loss of ram
pressure prior to entering the excavation.
6. Legs should always be installed square and plumb to the excavation walls ensuring contact with
all the inward facing trench sheet pans. If this is not possible any gaps must be securely packed by
using hardwood wedges prior to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.
7. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier protection (for plant) should
always be considered.
8. Prior to removal of systems all hydraulic rams must be released and manually retracted to avoid
the need for excessive extraction forces and to avoid damaging corner joints.
9. To manually retract the manhole brace leg ensure that there is sufficient packing beneath the
frame, that the hanging chains are in position, and that there is no slack in the chains. Connect the
hydraulic hose to the cylinder and open the lock-off valve (2 turns anticlockwise). Ensure the bucket
pump is set to ‘open’ and manually retract the leg by hand until the corner pin can be released, fluid
will return into the bucket pump. Repeat this procedure for each leg.
10. No matter how much care is taken during the installation and removal of hydraulic bracing systems
some ground movement will occur in the areas immediately surrounding the excavation. Great care
must be taken when specifying these systems for use adjacent to existing structures and services.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.2.1

 LADDERSAFE
See Section 7
GRP LADDER
See Section 8 EDGESAFE
See Section 7
ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE

TRENCH SHEETS
ALUMINIUM
UTILITY MANHOLE See Section 6
BRACE

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE FOR

MGF ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE

mgf.co.uk/products/aluminium-utility-manhole-brace

4.2.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 HANDLING POINT STANDARD DUTY RESTRAINING CHAIN
WLL = 0.4T CONNECTION DETAIL
Manhole brace legs and There are 2 types of chains used, the top frame
frames are lifted and handled will use shackle to hook type, while lower frames
by attaching MGF lifting will use shackle to shackle type. Individual chain
chains to the handling / links are selected to ensure all restraining chains
restraining points as shown. are evenly loaded.

ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE

LEG CONNECTION DETAIL HYDRAULIC CONNECTION DETAIL

Manhole brace legs are Legs are pumped out by attaching a hydraulic
connected to each other using a hose to the male QRV, and pressure is locked
pin and r-clip detail. in and released via the lock-off valve.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.2.3

 ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE
Inner
Overlap

Outer

ion
ens
im
in D
to P
Pin

Manhole Brace legs comprise inner and outer sleeved bespoke aluminium box sections
housing a single acting (SA) hydraulic ram to provide 915mm of leg adjustment.

Sheet to Sheet
Dimension
Product Product Hydraulic Leg
ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE

Description ID Min. Max. Ram SWL Weight

(m) (m) (kg)

MGF Aluminium
Utility Manhole 7.209 1.5 2.4 SA 55kN 35
Brace

Single Acting

Material Aluminium
Bore 50.8mm
Max. Working Pressure 270 Bar (4000 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure 270 Bar (4000 psi)

Approx. Working Stroke 915mm
Axial SWL 55kN
Min. FOS (by test) 2
Working Temp Range -20ºC* to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 15kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 75 Bar (1100 psi)

* Winter mix required for shoring fluid at low temps.

4.2.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF
ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE
Safe Working Load for Aluminium Manhole Brace

80 0.0

70

60 10.0

50

Maximum Predicted Deflection (mm)

ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE

Maximum SWL (kN/m)

40 20.0

30

20 30.0

10

0 40.0
1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

Note: The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.2.5

 SINGLE ACTING HYDRAULIC CYLINDER CONNECTIONS
⅜" BSP
¼" BSP male QRV isolation valve

Dowty
washer Shoring fluid is pumped into
the full bore side of the piston
¼" male to male through the male QRV. Single
acting cylinders cannot be
retracted using a pump unit
and have to be physically
closed whilst releasing the
male QRV. Ensure isolation
valve is closed to maintain
pre-load pressure and before
release / connection of QRVs.

ALUMINIUM UTILITY
MANHOLE BRACE PIN
ALUMINIUM UTILITY MANHOLE BRACE

Φ20mm bar,
Pin
145mm long
Component

Material Grade 080M40 (EN8)

Shear SWL 55kN
Weight 0.5kg

MANUALLY OPERATED HYDRAULIC PUMPS

The pump is used to extend the Aluminium Utility

Manhole Brace single acting hydraulic rams. The pumps
contain bio-degradable Houghto Safe SF25 shoring fluid.
During the Summer months the shoring fluid is diluted
with water at a ratio of 3 parts water to 1 part Houghto
Safe SF25. In the Winter the mix ratio is 1:1. Maximum
recommended installation pressure 1500 psi (100 Bar).

Product ID 1.602 (SA)

Component

Capacity 20 litres
Weight 25kg
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25
Installation Pressure 0-1500 psi (0-100 Bar)

4.2.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, HIGHLY VERSATILE, MODULAR HYDRAULIC BRACING SYSTEM
COMPRISING INTERCHANGEABLE HYDRAULIC RAM ASSEMBLIES AND VARIOUS
LENGTH WALER EXTENSION BARS. DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH STEEL TRENCH
SHEETS OR SHEET PILES TO BRACE SMALL TO MEDIUM SIZED COFFERDAMS (IN A
WIDE VARIETY OF SHAPES) AND LARGER TRENCHES FOR THE SAFE INSTALLATION OF
UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES, DRIVE / THRUST PITS OR SERVICES.
Extension bars can additionally be used without the ram assemblies as waler rails for trenches or
cantilevered walls. The 203 UC system is ideally suited for cofferdams in sizes ranging from 2.1m to
9.1m and is normally assembled and installed within the excavation using either excavators or cranes.
Larger excavations can be braced using this system in conjunction with intermediate bracing struts and
it is fully compatible with the MGF 200 and 300 Series Bracing Strut systems.
Fabricated from grade S460 UC steel sections the extensions are quickly assembled into brace legs
using simple pin and retaining clip / bolt and nut assemblies. Each leg contains a double acting
hydraulic ram assembly providing 1000mm of stroke and the legs are joined together at corners to
form frames via a simple pin and retaining clip assembly. Connecting the rams (via hydraulic hoses) to
an MGF hydraulic pump unit containing hydraulic shoring fluid allows the leg lengths to be quickly and
easily adjusted to suit the excavation dimensions. Once the frames are fully assembled and located at
the correct line and level, the rams are pre-loaded against the trench sheets using the hydraulic pump.
Pre-loading of the legs ensures the frame cannot slip and minimises the extent of potential ground
movements. Self sealing quick release valves and mechanical isolation valves ensure that the ram
pressure cannot be accidentally released once installed. Handling and restraining points are provided on
each leg to assist assembly / removal and to allow the brace / waler to be supported off MGF restraining
chains attached to the trench sheets by hooks.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling and restraining chains, Edgesafe edge
protection panels, Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or wooden pole ladders, Davitsafe retrieval /
fall arrest systems, hydraulic pump installation kits (including bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic
hoses) and confined spaces regime equipment. Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN
14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated shoring systems for groundwork support and BS 5975
(2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Hydraulic brace is very heavy and should only be assembled, installed
and removed by competent persons in accordance with a site specific
detailed design & installation sequence and MGF installation guidelines.
When assembling on site ensure that all pins and retaining clips are in
place and secured and all bolts are installed and fully tightened with a
minimum two threads visible beyond the nut.
2. Installation is normally carried out by lowering either the assembled
frame or individual legs (dependant upon lifting capacity of excavator
/ crane) to the correct installation level and once the frame is fully
assembled, pre-loading each leg in turn to ensure that the frame
is pressed firmly against the trench sheets and cannot slip.
Max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi) must not be exceeded.
3. Restraining chains are hung off the trench sheets and attached to the legs to assist assembly
/ removal of the frame and ensure vertical support is provided at all times. All the supplied
restraining chains should be installed (min. 2 per leg) and adjusted to ensure an even vertical load
distribution. Restraining chains should never be used for lifting nor solely relied upon to suspend
203 UC BRACE

loads above personnel.

4. Ensure all hydraulic ram isolation valves are closed and all corner pins in place and secured using
the retaining clips provided prior to commencing works.
5. Individual brace legs should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection or loss of ram
pressure prior to entering the excavation.
6. Legs should always be installed square and plumb to the excavation walls ensuring contact with
all the inward facing trench sheet pans. If this is not possible any gaps must be securely packed by
using hardwood wedges prior to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.
7. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier protection (for plant) should
always be considered.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.3.1

 8. Prior to removal of systems all hydraulic rams must be released and retracted to avoid the need for
excessive extraction forces and to avoid damaging corner joints.
9. No matter how much care is taken during the installation and removal of hydraulic bracing systems
some ground movement will occur in the areas immediately surrounding the excavation. Great care
must be taken when specifying these systems for use adjacent to existing structures and services.

LADDERSAFE
GRP LADDER See Section 7
See Section 8

EDGESAFE
See Section 7

203 UC
SERIES TRENCH SHEETS
See Section 6
203 UC BRACE

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF 203 UC BRACE

mgf.co.uk/products/203-uc-brace

4.3.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 STANDARD DUTY
CHAIN TO SHEET
CONNECTION DETAIL
The hook fits over the sheet.

STANDARD DUTY RESTRAINING

CHAIN CONNECTION DETAIL
There are 2 types of chains used, the
top frame will use shackle to hook type,
while lower frames will use shackle HANDLING POINT WLL = 3.15T
to shackle type. Individual chain links Brace legs and frames are lifted and
selected to ensure all restraining chains handled by attaching MGF lifting chains to
are evenly loaded. the handling / restraining points as shown.

203 UC BRACE

CORNER CONNECTION DETAIL LEG CONNECTION DETAIL

Leg corners are connected to each other Brace legs are connected to each other
using the 203 UC connection pin and r-clip using a 203 UC connection pin and
detail. To fill corner void a corner bracket is r-clip detail and 2 No. M24x70 (min.)
attached to ram assembly using 2No. M24x50 grade 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers.
(min.) grade 8.8 set screws c/w washers.
MGF can supply battery impact wrenches
to facilitate assembly and removal of bolted
CONTACT US [email protected] connections. Please contact MGF for details. 4.3.3
 203 UC CONNECTION DETAILS

Legs are normally installed at 90° to each

other. However, subject to confirmation
by a competent design Engineer, angles

195
of between 75° and 135° can be achieved

270
(>90° corner bracket requires removing).
Corners should always be packed out
using hardwood wedges against the sheets
prior to final pre-load to ensure even
load distribution and avoid introducing
excessive bending in the brace legs
195 (especially ram assembly).
270

Clear Internal Dimension

203 UC BRACE

Pin to Pin Dimension

Sheet to Sheet Dimension

4.3.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 203 UC (kN/m)
150 0

140 10

130 20

120 30

110 40

100 50

m Predicted Deflection (mm)

Maximum SWL (kN/m)

90 60

80 70

70 80

Maximum
60 90

50 100

40 110

30 120

20 130

10 140

0 150
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
203 UC BRACE

Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

Recommended SWL

Max. SWL available subject to MGF Design Services checks

Page 1
The above load chart is applicable when bracing leg is built up in accordance with the recommended
brace extension combinations on page 4.3.10.
The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.3.5

 Female Lug
rlap
Ove

ter Rod
Ou n
n sio locating pin
Dime
er in
Inn oP
Pint
Male Lug
Cylinder
locating pin

203 UC hydraulic ram assembly

comprises inner and outer sleeved
steel box sections housing a double
acting (DA) hydraulic ram to provide
Hydraulic valves
up to 1000mm of leg adjustment.

Pin to Pin Dimension

Ram Product
Assembly ID Min. Max. Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg)

150kN 203 UC Ram 8.100 1747 2747 352

Female Lug

n
sio
en
Dim
Pin
to
Pin 203 UC extension bars range in length from 0.6m
Male to 5.0m and are connected to each other via a 2:1
Lug
female / male lug using a Φ50mm pin and 2 No.
grade 8.8 M24 bolts c/w nuts and washers.

Product Description Weight

203 UC BRACE

(kg)

8.105 203 UC 0.6m Extension 79

8.110 203 UC 1.0m Extension 122
Product ID

8.120 203 UC 2.0m Extension 208

8.130 203 UC 3.0m Extension 294
8.140 203 UC 4.0m Extension 380
8.150 203 UC 5.0m Extension 466

4.3.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

150kN DOUBLE ACTING HYDRAULIC RAM ASSEMBLY

Double Acting
Material Steel
Bore 63mm
Max. Working Pressure 480 Bar (7000 psi)
480 Bar (7000 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure
Approx. Working Stroke 1000mm
Axial SWL 150kN
Min. FOS (by test) 2
Working Temp Range -20ºC* to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 30kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ16 and Φ18mm

OUT IN
* Winter mix required for shoring fluid at low temps.
¼" BSP
male QRV

¼" BSP Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore side of
female QRV ⅜" BSP
isolation
the piston through the male quick release valve
valve (QRV) to extend the ram. At the same time fluid
from the return side of the piston is returned
Dowty
washer to the pump via the female QRV. Retraction is a
¼" male to male
reverse of extension. Ensure isolation valve is
closed to maintain pre-load pressure and before
release / connection of QRVs.

PUMP UNITS The pumps are used to extend and retract the
203 UC double acting hydraulic rams. The pumps
contain bio-degradable Houghto Safe SF25 shoring
fluid. During the Summer months the shoring fluid
is diluted with water at a ratio of 3 parts water to
1 part Houghto Safe SF25. In the Winter the mix
ratio is 1:1. Maximum recommended installation
pressure 1500 psi (100 Bar). There are 2 types of
pumps available, a manually operated bucket pump
203 UC BRACE

and a motorised petrol pump.

Bucket Pump Petrol Motorised Pump

Product ID 1.603 (DA) 8.4007 (DA)
Component

Fluid Capacity (L) 20 70

Weight (kg) 25 270
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure (psi) 0-1500 0-1500

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.3.7

 150kN HYDRAULIC RAM
ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS

Inner Section Outer Section

Specification 200x200x8 SHS

180x180x12.5 SHS
(+ 2 No. 180x10 thk. stiffening plates)
Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 64.4kg/m 76.0kg/m
Axial SWL 150kN 150kN
Moment SWL 121kNm 188kNm

203 UC EXTENSION BAR SPECIFICATIONS

Specification 203x203x86UC
Material Grade S460
203 UC BRACE

Unit Mass 86kg/m

Extension Bar

Axial SWL 150kN

UC Moment SWL 258kNm
Joint Moment SWL 157kNm
2 No. M24x70 (min.) grade 8.8
Bolting Details
bolts and nuts c/w washers

4.3.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

203 UC ANCILLARIES
203 UC WALER CONNECTION PIN
Φ50mm bar,
Pin
150mm long

Component
Material
708M40 (EN19A)
Grade
Shear SWL 600kN
Weight 3kg

203 UC CORNER BRACKET

Weight 11kg
Component

Material S275
Bolting 2 No. M24x50 (min.) grade
Details 8.8 set screws c/w washers

203 UC SHEAR STOP

200
100
Weight 7kg
Component

Material 90x20 flat, S275

Weld 9mm single run fillet weld.
Details No weld on bearing face
Shear SWL 600kN

325
203 UC STEEL SUPPORT BRACKET
209 Product ID 8.3003
203 UC BRACE

Weight 23kg
Material 533x210x92 UB, S355
Component
462

Weld 8mm single run fillet weld.

Details No weld on bearing face
200 SWL 30kN
Hole 6 No. Φ18 holes min.
Details 100mm c/c

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.3.9

 203 UC RECOMMENDED BRACE EXTENSION COMBINATIONS

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2.5

3.5 1.0m

4.5 2.0m

5.5 3.0m

6.5 4.0m

7.5 4.0m 1.0m

8.5 5.0m 1.0m

N.B. Single 0.6m extensions should be added to these combinations for intermediate
dimensions. The ram assemblies are shown at mid-stroke,so each length can vary by
500mm in either direction.

Sheet to Sheet Dimension Min. Length Max. Length Leg Weight

(m) (mm) (mm) (kg)

2.5 2147 3147 352

3.5 3147 4147 474
203 UC BRACE

4.5 4147 5147 560

5.5 5147 6147 646
6.5 6147 7147 732
7.5 7147 8147 854
8.5 8147 9147 940

4.3.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

203 UC 200 SERIES STRUT ADAPTORS
203 UC Pin 203 UC Pin

200 Series

Product ID Product ID
9.208 9.2085
203 UC 203 UC

203 UC extension can be utilised with 200 series struts to support trenches between 1250mm
and 5000mm wide. Adaptor uses 8 No. M20x65 (min.) grade 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers.

203 UC BRACE

Adaptors can be utilised as RC wall fixing plates (subject to bolt anchorage design).

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.3.11

 Octagonal frame designs
available for circular
excavations.

Typical trench
application utilising
200 / 300 Series Struts.
203 UC BRACE

Larger cofferdam
designs available
utilising intermediate
bracing struts.

4.3.12 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, HIGHLY VERSATILE, MODULAR HYDRAULIC BRACING SYSTEM
COMPRISING INTERCHANGEABLE HYDRAULIC RAM ASSEMBLIES AND VARIOUS
LENGTH WALER EXTENSION BARS. DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH STEEL TRENCH
SHEETS OR SHEET PILES TO BRACE MEDIUM TO LARGE SIZED COFFERDAMS (IN A WIDE
VARIETY OF SHAPES) AND LARGER TRENCHES FOR THE SAFE INSTALLATION OF LARGE
UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES, DEEPER DRIVE / THRUST PITS OR BASEMENTS.
Extension bars can additionally be used without the ram assemblies as waler rails for trenches or
cantilevered walls. The 203 UC+ system is ideally suited for cofferdam sizes ranging from 3.0m to 11.0m
and is normally assembled and installed within the excavation using either excavators or cranes. Any size
of excavation can be braced using this system in conjunction with intermediate bracing struts. The 203
UC+ extension bars have built in shear stops and web stiffeners and is fully compatible with the MGF 200
and 300 Series Bracing Strut systems. Legs of 203 UC+ can also be used in conjunction with 203 UC legs,
ensuring the most efficient frame design can be provided.
Fabricated from grade S460 UC steel sections and min. S600 plate, the extensions are quickly assembled
into brace legs using simple pin and retaining clip / bolt and nut assemblies. Each leg contains a double
acting hydraulic ram assembly providing 700mm of stroke and the legs are joined together at corners to
form frames via a simple pin and retaining clip assembly. Connecting the rams (via hydraulic hoses) to an
MGF hydraulic pump unit containing hydraulic shoring fluid allows the leg lengths to be quickly and easily
adjusted to suit the excavation dimensions. Once the frames are fully assembled and located at the correct
line and level, the rams are pre-loaded against the trench sheets using the hydraulic pump. Pre-loading
of the legs ensures the frame cannot slip and minimises the extent of potential ground movements.
Self-sealing quick release valves and mechanical isolation valves ensure that the ram pressure cannot
be accidentally released once installed. Handling and restraining points are provided on each leg to assist
assembly / removal and to allow the brace / waler to be supported off MGF restraining chains attached to
the trench sheets by hooks.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling and
restraining chains, Edgesafe edge protection panels, Laddersafe access
platforms and epoxy coated steel, GRP or wooden pole ladders, Davitsafe
retrieval / fall arrest systems, hydraulic pump installation kits (including
bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and confined spaces
regime equipment. Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS
EN 14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated shoring systems for
groundwork support and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary
works procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Hydraulic brace is very heavy and should only be assembled, installed and removed by competent
persons in accordance with a site-specific detailed design & installation sequence and MGF
installation guidelines. When assembling on site ensure that all pins and retaining clips are in place
and secured and all bolts are installed and fully tightened with a minimum two threads visible beyond
the nut.
2. Installation is normally carried out by lowering either the assembled frame or individual legs
(dependent upon lifting capacity of excavator / crane) to the correct installation level and once the
frame is fully assembled pre-loading each leg in turn to ensure that the frame is pressed firmly
against the trench sheets and cannot slip. Max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi) must not be
203 UC+ BRACE

exceeded.
3. Restraining chains are hung off the trench sheets and attached to the legs to assist assembly
/ removal of the frame and ensure vertical support is provided at all times. All the supplied
restraining chains should be installed (min. 2 per leg) and adjusted to ensure an even vertical load
distribution. Restraining chains should never be used for lifting nor solely relied upon to suspend
loads above personnel.
4. Ensure all hydraulic ram isolation valves are closed and all corner pins in place and secured using
the retaining clips provided prior to commencing works.
5. Individual brace legs should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection or loss of ram
pressure prior to entering the excavation.
6. Legs should always be installed square and plumb to the excavation walls ensuring contact with
all the inward facing trench sheet pans. If this is not possible any gaps must be securely packed by
using hardwood wedges prior to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.4.1

 7. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier protection (for plant) should
always be considered.
8. Prior to removal of systems all hydraulic rams must be released and retracted to avoid the need for
excessive extraction forces and to avoid damaging corner joints.
9. No matter how much care is taken during the installation and removal of hydraulic bracing systems
some ground movement will occur in the areas immediately surrounding the excavation. Great care
must be taken when specifying these systems for use adjacent to existing structures and services.
10. 203 UC+ extension bars and the hydraulic ram assembly feature integrated shear stops to accept
bracing struts, in conjunction with the relevant clamping details.
11. 203 UC+ leg build up combinations can be found on page 4.4.10, please adhere to this configuration
for clear spanning brace legs. It is essential the longest extension bars connect to the power pack
and the smallest extensions be placed at the opposing end.
12. 203 UC+ bracing legs can also accept 203 UC extension bars, should the design allow, these 203 UC
extensions must be placed at the opposing end of the leg to the hydraulic power pack.

EPOXY COATED DAVITSAFE

STEEL LADDER See Section 7
EDGESAFE
LADDERSAFE See Section 7
See Section 7
203 UC+ BRACE

203 UC+ TRENCH SHEETS

SERIES See Section 6

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF 203 UC+ BRACE

mgf.co.uk/products/203-UC-plus

4.4.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 HANDLING POINT STANDARD DUTY RESTRAINING CHAIN
WLL = 3.15T CONNECTION DETAIL
Brace legs and frames There are 2 types of chains used, the top frame will
are lifted and handled by use shackle to hook type, while lower frames will use
attaching MGF lifting chains shackle to shackle type. Individual chain links selected
to the handling / restraining to ensure all restraining chains are evenly loaded.
points as shown.

CORNER CONNECTION DETAIL

STANDARD DUTY Leg corners are connected to each other using the 203
CHAIN TO SHEET UC+ connection pin and r-clip detail. To fill corner void a
CONNECTION DETAIL corner bracket is attached to ram assembly using M20 x
The hook fits over the sheet. 70 (min.) grade 8.8 bolts and Nyloc nuts c/w washers.

203 UC+ BRACE

LEG CONNECTION DETAIL 203 UC EXTENSION CONNECTION DETAIL

Brace legs are connected to 203 UC extension bars can connect to the end of
each other using a 203 UC+ 203 UC+ bracing legs using a 203 UC+ connection
connection pin and r-clip detail pin and r-clip detail and 2No. M24 x 70 (min.)
and 2 No. M24 x 70 (min.) grade grade 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers.
8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers.

MGF can supply battery impact wrenches

to facilitate assembly and removal of bolted
CONTACT US [email protected] connections. Please contact MGF for details. 4.4.3
 203 UC+ CONNECTION DETAILS

Legs are normally installed at 90° to each

other. However, subject to confirmation
by a competent design Engineer, angles
of between 75° and 135° can be achieved

195

290
(>90° corner bracket requires removing).
Corners should always be packed out
using hardwood wedges against the sheets
prior to final pre-load to ensure even
load distribution and avoid introducing
excessive bending in the brace legs
195
(especially ram assembly).
275

Clear Internal Dimension

203 UC+ BRACE

Pin to Pin Dimension

Sheet to Sheet Dimension

4.4.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 203 UC+ (kN/m)
220 0

200 20

180 40

160 60

Maximum Predicted Deflection (mm)

140 80
Maximum SWL (kN/m)

120 100

100 120

80 140

60 160

40 180

20 200

0 220
203 UC+ BRACE

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

Recommended SWL

Max. SWL available subject to MGF Design Services checks

The above load chart is applicable when bracing leg is built up in accordance with the recommended
brace extension combinations on page 4.4.10.
The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.4.5

 Overlap
Female Lug
Male Lug

Rod locating pin

Outer
sion
Inner imen
o Pin D
Pin t

Hydraulic
valves

Rod locating pin

203 UC+ hydraulic ram assembly comprises inner and outer sleeved box section housing
a double acting (DA) hydraulic ram to provide up to 700mm of leg adjustment.

Pin to Pin Dimension

Ram Product
Assembly ID Min. Max. Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg)
300kN 203 UC+ Ram 8.160 1600 2300 425

Female Lug
Male
Lug

ion
imens
Pin D
Pin to

203 UC+ extension bars are available in 4 lengths, ranging from 0.25m up to 5.0m and
each are connected to each other via a 3:2 female / male lug using a Φ50mm pin and
2 No. grade 8.8 M24x70 (min.) bolts c/w nuts and washers.
203 UC+ BRACE

Product Description Weight

(kg)

8.168 203 UC+ 0.25m Extension 60

Product ID

8.170 203 UC+ 0.9m Extension 130

8.180 203 UC+ 3.3m Extension 412
8.190 203 UC+ 5.0m Extension 610

4.4.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

300kN
DOUBLE
ACTING
HYDRAULIC
CYLINDER
Double Acting
Material Steel
Bore 100mm
Max. Working Pressure 380 Bar (5500 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure 400 Bar (5800 psi)

Approx. Working Stroke 700mm
Axial SWL 300kN
Min. FOS (by calc) 1.78
Working Temp Range -20°C* to +50°C
Approx. Pre-Load 75kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ25mm
* Winter mix required for shoring fluid at low temps.
OUT IN
¼" BSP
male QRV

¼" BSP Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore side of
female QRV ⅜" BSP
isolation
the piston through the male quick release valve
valve (QRV) to extend the ram. At the same time, fluid
from the return side of the piston is returned
Dowty
washer to the pump via the female QRV. Retraction is a
¼" male to male
reverse of extension. Ensure isolation valve is
closed to maintain pre-load pressure and before
release / connection of QRVs.

PUMP UNITS The pumps are used to extend and retract the
203 UC double acting hydraulic rams. The pumps
contain bio-degradable Houghto Safe SF25 shoring
fluid. During the Summer months the shoring fluid
is diluted with water at a ratio of 3 parts water to
1 part Houghto Safe SF25. In the Winter the mix
ratio is 1:1. Maximum recommended installation
pressure 1500 psi (100 Bar). There are 2 types of
pumps available, a manually operated bucket pump
203 UC+ BRACE

and a motorised petrol pump.

Bucket Pump Petrol Motorised Pump

Product ID 1.603 (DA) 8.4007 (DA)
Component

Fluid Capacity (L) 20 70

Weight (kg) 25 270
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure (psi) 0-1500 0-1500

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.4.7

 300kN HYDRAULIC RAM ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS

Inner Section Outer Section

200x200x12.5 SHS
Specification 250x250x16 SHS
(+ 6thk. stiffening plates)
Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 72.31kg/m 115kg/m
Axial SWL 300kN 300kN
Moment SWL 203kNm 302kNm

203 UC+ EXTENSION BAR SPECIFICATIONS

Specification 203x203x100 UC
203 UC+ BRACE

Material Grade S460M

Unit Mass 99.6kg/m
Extension Bar

Axial SWL 300kN

334kNm (0.25m & 0.9m extensions)
Moment SWL
386kNm (3.3m & 5.0m extensions)
Joint Moment SWL 293kNm
Bolting Details 2 No. M24x70 (min.) grade 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers

4.5.8
4.4.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk
203 UC+ ANCILLARIES
203 UC+ WALER CONNECTION PIN
Pin Φ50mm bar, 200mm long

Component
Material Grade 708M40 (EN19A)
Shear SWL 600kN
Weight 3kg

203 UC+ WALER CORNER BRACKET

Component Weight 10kg
Material S355
Bolting 2No. M20x70 (min.) grade 8.8
Details bolts and Nyloc nuts c/w washers

203 UC+ STEEL SUPPORT BRACKET

325
Product ID 8.3003
209
Weight 23kg
Component

Material 533x210x92 UB, S355

462

Weld 8mm single run fillet weld.

Details No weld on bearing face
SWL 30kN
200
Hole Details 6 No. Φ18 holes min. 100mm c/c

203 UC+ SHEAR LUG

DETAIL
The 0.9m, 3.3m and 5.0m
203UC+ extension bars
feature a shear stop detail
203 UC+ BRACE

built in. This detail, along

with the relevant clamps
are compatible with 200/300
Series knee brace swivels.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.5.9

4.4.9
 203 UC+ RECOMMENDED BRACE EXTENSION COMBINATIONS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

3 0.6m

0.25m
3.5 0.9m

4 0.9m 0.6m

0.25m
4.5 0.9m 0.9m

5 0.25m
0.9m 0.9m 0.6m

0.25m
5.5 0.25m
0.9m 0.9m 0.9m

0.25m

6 3.3m
0.25m

6.5 3.3m 0.6m

0.25m
0.25m

7 3.3m 0.9m

7.5 5.0m

8 5.0m 0.6m
0.25m

8.5 5.0m 0.9m

9 5.0m 0.9m 0.6m

0.25m

9.5 5.0m 0.9m 0.9m

0.25m

10 5.0m 0.9m 0.9m 0.6m

203 UC+ BRACE

0.25m
0.25m

10.5 5.0m 0.9m 0.9m 0.9m

0.25m

11 5.0m 3.3m

N.B. The ram assemblies are shown at roughly mid-stroke, for intermediate dimensions single 0.25m
203 UC+ extensions or 0.6m 203 UC extensions can be added / substituted to these combinations.

4.4.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

Sheet to Sheet Dimension Min. Length Max. Length Leg Weight
(m) (mm) (mm) (kg)

3 2590 3290 523

3.5 3140 3840 625
4 3490 4190 656
4.5 4040 4740 770
5 4640 5340 852
5.5 5190 5890 966
6 5540 6240 919
6.5 6140 6840 1001
7 6690 7390 1115
7.5 6990 7690 1054
8 7590 8290 1136
8.5 8140 8840 1250
9 8490 9190 1269
9.5 9040 9740 1383
10 9640 10340 1465
10.5 10190 10890 1579
11 10540 11240 1532

203 UC+ BRACE

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.4.11

 203 UC+ 200 SERIES STRUT ADAPTORS
203 UC+ 200 Series 203 UC+
Pin Pin

Product ID Product ID
9.208 9.2085

203 UC+ 203 UC+

203 UC+ extension can be utilised with 200 Series

struts to support trenches between 1250mm and
5000mm wide. Adaptor uses 8No. M20x65 (min.)
grade 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers.

Adaptors can be utilised

as RC wall fixing
plates (subject to bolt
anchorage design).
203 UC+ BRACE

203 UC Waler support

brackets can be used to
provide vertical support
when restraining chains
are not used. Minimum
8mm single run fillet
weld recommended
when welding to pans of
steel sheets.

4.4.12 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Larger cofferdam sizes available utilising intermediate bracing struts.
203 UC+ extension bars feature integrated shear stops up against the connecting lugs,
designed to accept 200 and 300 Series knee braces.

203 UC+ BRACE

Typical trench application utilising 200/300 Series bracing struts as cross struts.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.4.13

 203 UC components can be used at the ends of 203 UC+ bracing legs, corresponding to
the recommended brace extension combinations on page 4.4.10, or subject to design.
In addition, whole legs of 203 UC can directly connect with 203 UC+ legs to create
rectangular frames.
203 UC+ BRACE

4.4.14 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, HIGHLY VERSATILE, MODULAR HYDRAULIC BRACING
SYSTEM COMPRISING INTERCHANGEABLE HYDRAULIC RAM ASSEMBLIES AND
VARIOUS LENGTH WALER EXTENSION BARS. 305 UC IS DESIGNED TO BE USED
WITH HEAVY DUTY STEEL TRENCH SHEETS OR SHEET PILES TO BRACE LARGE /
DEEP COFFERDAMS (IN A WIDE VARIETY OF SHAPES) FOR THE SAFE INSTALLATION
OF UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES, DEEP DRIVE / THRUST PITS OR BASEMENTS.
USED EXTENSIVELY ON MAJOR BASEMENTS AND SUBSTRUCTURES TO PROVIDE
TEMPORARY SUPPORT TO RC PERMANENT WORKS. THE 305 UC HYDRAULIC RAM
AND EXTENSION BARS CAN BE CONNECTED TO LEGS OF 406 UC MAKING IT HIGHLY
VERSATILE AND ECONOMIC. IN ADDITION, FOR HEAVY LOAD CONDITIONS, CENTRAL
406 UC EXTENSION BARS CAN BE INSERTED TO INCREASE SWLS.
Extension bars can additionally be used without the ram assemblies as waler rails for large trenches or
cantilevered walls. The 305 UC extension bars have built in shear stops and web stiffeners to allow the
use of knee braces and cross struts. The 305 UC system is ideally suited for projects requiring cofferdam
sizes ranging from 1.9m to 15.5m and is normally assembled and installed within the excavation using
either excavators or cranes. Any size of excavation can be braced using this system in conjunction with
intermediate bracing struts and it is fully compatible with the MGF 200, 300, 400 and 600 Series Bracing
Strut systems.
Fabricated from grade S460 UC steel sections the extensions are quickly assembled into brace legs
using simple pin and retaining clip / bolt and nut assemblies. Each leg contains a double acting hydraulic
ram assembly providing 600mm of stroke and the legs are joined together at corners to form frames via
a simple pin and retaining clip assembly. Connecting the rams (via hydraulic hoses) to an MGF hydraulic
pump unit containing hydraulic shoring fluid allows the leg lengths to be quickly and easily adjusted
to suit the excavation dimensions. Once the frames are fully assembled and located at the correct line
and level, the rams are pre-loaded against the trench sheets using the hydraulic pump. Pre-loading of
the legs ensures the frame cannot slip and minimises the extent of potential ground movements. Self
sealing quick release valves and mechanical isolation valves ensure that the ram pressure cannot be
accidentally released once installed. Handling and restraining points are provided on each leg to assist
assembly / removal and to allow the brace / waler to be supported off MGF heavy duty restraining chains
attached to the trench sheets by hooks. Alternatively 305 UC steel support brackets can be supplied
which can be welded or bolted to steel or RC walls. MGF can supply the systems with a full range of
suitable handling and restraining chains, Edgesafe edge protection panels,
Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or wooden pole ladders, Stairsafe,
Davitsafe retrieval / fall arrest systems, hydraulic pump installation
kits (including bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and
confined spaces regime equipment. Manufactured and designed
fully in accordance with BS EN 14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually
operated shoring systems for groundwork support and BS 5975
(2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and
the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Hydraulic brace is very heavy and should only be assembled, installed and removed by competent
persons in accordance with a site specific detailed design & installation sequence and MGF
installation guidelines. When assembling on site ensure that all pins and retaining clips are in
place and secured and all bolts are installed and fully tightened with a minimum two threads visible
305 UC BRACE

beyond the nut.

2. Installation is normally carried out by lowering either the assembled frame or individual legs
(dependant upon lifting capacity of excavator / crane) to the correct installation level and once the
frame is fully assembled pre-loading each leg in turn to ensure that the frame is pressed firmly
against the trench sheets and cannot slip. Max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi) must not be
exceeded.
3. Restraining chains are hung off the trench sheets and attached to the legs to assist assembly
/ removal of the frame and ensure vertical support is provided at all times. All the supplied
restraining chains should be installed (min. 2 per leg) and adjusted to ensure an even vertical load
distribution. Restraining chains should never be used for lifting nor solely relied upon to suspend
loads above personnel.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.5.1

 4. Ensure all hydraulic ram lock off valves are closed and all corner pins in place and secured using
the retaining clips provided prior to commencing works.
5. Individual brace legs should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection or loss of ram
pressure prior to entering the excavation.
6. Legs should always be installed square and plumb to the excavation walls ensuring contact with
all the inward facing trench sheet pans. If this is not possible any gaps must be securely packed by
using hardwood wedges prior to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.
7. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier protection (for plant) should
always be considered.
8. Prior to removal of systems all hydraulic rams must be released and retracted to avoid the need for
excessive extraction forces and to avoid damaging corner joints.
9. No matter how much care is taken during the installation and removal of hydraulic bracing systems
some ground movement will occur in the areas immediately surrounding the excavation. Great care
must be taken when specifying these systems for use adjacent to existing structures and services.

STAIRSAFE
See Section 7

EDGESAFE
See Section 7 DAVITSAFE
See Section 7

TRENCH SHEETS
See Section 6
305 UC BRACE

305 UC
SERIES

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF 305 UC BRACE

mgf.co.uk/products/305-uc-brace

4.5.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 HEAVY DUTY CHAIN TO SHEET HEAVY DUTY RESTRAINING CHAIN
CONNECTION DETAIL* CONNECTION DETAIL*
The hook fits over the sheet. There are 2 types of chains used, the top frame
will use shackle to hook type, while lower frames
will use shackle to shackle type. Individual chain
links selected to ensure all restraining chains
are evenly loaded.

HANDLING POINT
WLL = 7.0T
Brace legs and frames are lifted
and handled by attaching MGF
lifting chains to the handling /
restraining points as shown.

305 UC BRACE

LEG CONNECTION DETAIL CORNER CONNECTION DETAIL

Brace legs are connected to each other Leg corners are connected to each
using a 305 UC connection pin and r-clip other using the 305 UC connection
detail and 4 No. M30x90 (min.) grade 8.8 pin and r-clip detail. To fill corner void
bolts and nuts c/w washers. a corner bracket is attached to ram
assembly using 4No. M30x90 (min.)
grade 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers.
*Standard Duty Chains can be used provided the 305
UC frames are not being used with bracing struts,
and any lower frames are not heavier than 305 UC.
MGF can supply battery impact wrenches
to facilitate assembly and removal of bolted
CONTACT US [email protected] connections. Please contact MGF for details. 4.5.3
 305 UC CONNECTION DETAILS

Legs are normally installed at 90° to each

other. However, subject to confirmation
by a competent design Engineer, angles

307
of between 75° and 135° can be achieved

397
(>90° corner bracket requires removing).
Corners should always be packed out
using hardwood wedges against the sheets
prior to final pre-load to ensure even
load distribution and avoid introducing
excessive bending in the brace legs
307
(especially ram assembly).
397

Clear Internal Dimension

305 UC BRACE

Pin to Pin Dimension

Sheet to Sheet Dimension

4.5.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 305 UC (kN/m)

300 0

275 20

250 40

225 60

200 80

Maximum Predicted Deflection (mm)

Maximum SWL (kN/m)

175 100

150 120

125 140

100 160

75 180

50 200

25 220

0 240
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)
305 UC BRACE

Recommended SWL

The above load chart is applicable when bracing leg is built up in accordance with the recommended
Page 1
brace extension combinations on page 4.5.10.
The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.5.5

 lap
Over Female Lug

Hydraulic valves

ter
Ou
ion
e ns
Dim Rod
in locating pin
er oP
Inn Pint

Male Lug Cylinder

locating pin

305 UC hydraulic ram assembly comprises inner and outer sleeved steel box sections,
housing a double acting (DA) hydraulic ram to provide up to 600mm of leg adjustment.

Pin to Pin Dimension

Ram Product
Assembly ID Min. Max. Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg)

305 UC Ram 8.302 1270 1868 613

Female Lug

ion
im ens 305 UC extension bars range in
in D length from 0.5m to 6.0m and
oP
Pin t are connected to each other via
a 3:2 female / male lug using a
Male Φ50mm pin and 4 No. grade 8.8
Lug M30 bolts c/w nuts and washers.

Product Description Weight

(kg)
305 UC BRACE

8.305 305 UC 0.5m Extension 170

8.307 305 UC 0.75m Extension 220
Product ID

8.310 305 UC 1.0m Extension 260

8.315 305 UC 1.5m Extension 350
8.325 305 UC 2.5m Extension 510
8.360 305 UC 6.0m Extension 1100

4.5.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

600kN DOUBLE
ACTING HYDRAULIC
CYLINDER

Double Acting
Material Steel
Bore 140mm
Max. Working Pressure 390 Bar (5700 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure 390 Bar (5700 psi)

Approx. Working Stroke 600mm
Axial SWL 600kN
Min. FOS (by test) 2
Working Temp Range -20ºC* to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 150kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ20 and Φ25mm

OUT IN
* Winter mix required for shoring fluid at low temps.
¼" BSP
female QRV ¼" BSP
male QRV

⅜" BSP
isolation Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore side of
valve the piston through the male quick release valve
(QRV) to extend the ram. At the same time, fluid
Dowty
washer from the return side of the piston is returned
to the pump via the female QRV. Retraction is a
reverse of extension. Ensure isolation valve is
¼" male to male
closed to maintain pre-load pressure and before
release / connection of QRVs.

PUMP UNITS The pumps are used to extend and retract the
305 UC double acting hydraulic rams. The pumps
contain bio-degradable Houghto Safe SF25 shoring
fluid. During the Summer months the shoring fluid
is diluted with water at a ratio of 3 parts water to
1 part Houghto Safe SF25. In the Winter the mix
ratio is 1:1. Maximum recommended installation
pressure 1500 psi (100 Bar). There are 2 types of
pumps available, a manually operated bucket pump
305 UC BRACE

and a motorised petrol pump.

Bucket Pump Petrol Motorised Pump

Product ID 1.603 (DA) 8.4007 (DA)
Component

Fluid Capacity (L) 20 70

Weight (kg) 25 270
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure (psi) 0-1500 0-1500

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.5.7

 600kN HYDRAULIC RAM ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS

Inner Section Outer Section

250x250x16 SHS
Specification 300x300x16 SHS
(+ 8 No. 75x6 thk stiffener plates)
Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 115kg/m 141kg/m
Axial SWL 600kN 600kN
Moment SWL 432kNm 432kNm

305 UC EXTENSION BAR SPECIFICATIONS

Specification 305x305x158UC
Material Grade S460
305 UC BRACE

Unit Mass 158kg/m

Extension Bar

Axial SWL 600kN

Moment SWL 786kNm
Joint Moment SWL 786kNm If using 305 UC Brace with
bracing struts, the section
4 No. M30x90 (min.) grade 8.8
Bolting Details must be checked fully to
bolts and nuts c/w washers
structural codes.

4.5.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

305 UC ANCILLARIES
305 UC WALER CONNECTION PIN
Pin Φ50mm bar, 245mm long

Component
Material Grade 708M40 (EN19A)
Shear SWL 1250kN
Weight 4kg

305 UC WALER CORNER BRACKET

Component Weight 30kg
Material S275
Bolting 2 No. M30x90 (min.) grade 8.8
Details bolts and nuts c/w washers

305 UC STEEL SUPPORT BRACKET

180
600
Product ID 8.4002
Weight 42kg
Component

Material 457x152x52 UB, S355

525

Weld 8mm single run fillet weld.

Details No weld on bearing face
SWL 30kN
152
Hole Details 6 No. Φ18 holes min. 90mm c/c

305 UC SHEAR STOP DETAIL

The 1.5m, 2.5m and 6.0m 305 UC
extension bars feature a shear stop
detail built in. This detail, along with
the relevant clamps are compatible
with 400 Series knee brace swivels.
305 UC BRACE

200/300 Series 600kN Type A Swivel

can also connect to 305 UC Brace
via a transition plate and clamp.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.5.9

 305 UC RECOMMENDED BRACE EXTENSION COMBINATIONS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

4.0 1.0m 1.0m

5.0 2.5m 0.5m

6.0 2.5m 1.0m 0.5m

7.0 2.5m 2.5m

8.0 6.0m

9.0 6.0m 1.0m

10.0 1.0m 6.0m 1.0m

11.0 6.0m 2.5m 0.5m

12.0 1.0m 6.0m 2.5m 0.5m

13.0 2.5m 6.0m 2.5m

14.0 6.0m 6.0m

15.0 1.0m 6.0m 6.0m

N.B. Single 0.5m or 0.75m extensions can be added / substituted to these combinations to
provide intermediate dimensions. The ram assemblies are shown at mid-stroke, so each
length can vary by 300mm in either direction.

Sheet to Sheet Dimension Min. Length Max. Length Leg Weight

(m) (mm) (mm) (kg)
4 3884 4482 1133
5 4884 5482 1326
6 5884 6482 1586
7 6884 7482 1633
8 7884 8482 1713
305 UC BRACE

9 8884 9482 1973

10 9884 10482 2233
11 10884 11482 2393
12 11884 12482 2653
13 12884 13482 2733
14 13884 14482 2813
15 14884 15482 3073

4.5.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

305 UC 200 SERIES STRUT ADAPTORS
305 UC Pin 305 UC Pin

200 Series

Product ID Product ID
9.209 9.2095

305 UC 305 UC

305 UC extension can be utilised with 200 Series

Struts to support trenches between 1500mm
and 5000mm wide. Adaptor uses 8 No. M20x65
(min.) grade 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers.

Adaptors can be utilised

as RC wall fixing
plates (subject to bolt
anchorage design).

305 UC Waler support

305 UC BRACE

brackets can be used to

provide vertical support
when restraining chains
are not used. Minimum
8mm single run fillet
weld recommended
when welding to pans of
steel sheets.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.5.11

 305 UC CONFIGURATIONS

Frames can be built up combining 305 UC legs with 406 UC legs.

The system is also fully compatible with 400 Series struts and 200/300 Series struts
(600kN knee brace swivel requires transition plate to attach to 305UC).
305 UC BRACE

With the use of 305 UC to 406 UC transition adaptors, rigid sections of 406 UC
can be used within legs of 305 UC for longer spans, or for where loadings in the
middle of the leg are too great for 305 UC.

4.5.12 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, HIGHLY VERSATILE, MODULAR HYDRAULIC BRACING
SYSTEM COMPRISING INTERCHANGEABLE HYDRAULIC RAM ASSEMBLIES AND
VARIOUS LENGTH WALER EXTENSION BARS. 406 UC IS DESIGNED TO BE USED
WITH HEAVY DUTY STEEL TRENCH SHEETS OR SHEET PILES TO BRACE LARGE /
DEEP COFFERDAMS (IN A WIDE VARIETY OF SHAPES) FOR THE SAFE INSTALLATION
OF UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES, DEEP DRIVE / THRUST PITS OR BASEMENTS.
USED EXTENSIVELY ON MAJOR BASEMENTS AND SUBSTRUCTURES TO PROVIDE
TEMPORARY SUPPORT TO RC PERMANENT WORKS.
Extension bars can additionally be used without the ram assemblies as waler rails for large trenches or
cantilevered walls. The 406 UC system is ideally suited for major projects requiring cofferdam sizes ranging
from 2.9m to 20.7m and is normally assembled and installed within the excavation using either excavators
or cranes. Any size of excavation can be braced using this system in conjunction with intermediate bracing
struts and it is fully compatible with the MGF 200, 300, 400, 600 and 1000 Series Bracing Strut systems. 406
UC is also compatible with MGF 305 UC Brace, see section 4.5 for further details.
Fabricated from grade S460 UC steel sections the extensions are quickly assembled into brace legs
using simple pin and retaining clip / bolt and nut assemblies. Each leg contains a double acting hydraulic
ram assembly providing 800mm of stroke and the legs are joined together at corners to form frames via
a simple pin and retaining clip assembly. Connecting the rams (via hydraulic hoses) to an MGF motorised
hydraulic pump unit containing hydraulic shoring fluid allows the leg lengths to be quickly and easily
adjusted to suit the excavation dimensions. Once the frames are fully assembled and located at the
correct line and level, the rams are pre-loaded against the trench sheets using the hydraulic pump.
Pre-loading of the legs ensures the frame cannot slip and minimises the extent of potential ground
movements. Self sealing quick release valves and mechanical isolation valves ensure that the ram
pressure cannot be accidentally released once installed. Handling and restraining points are provided on
each leg to assist assembly / removal and to allow the brace / waler to be supported off MGF heavy duty
restraining chains attached to the trench sheets by hooks. Alternatively
406 UC steel support brackets can be supplied which can be welded or
bolted to steel or RC walls.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling and
restraining chains, Edgesafe edge protection panels, Laddersafe access
platforms and GRP or wooden pole ladders, Davitsafe retrieval / fall
arrest systems, motorised hydraulic pump installation kits (including
bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and confined spaces
regime equipment. Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN
14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated shoring systems for groundwork
support and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the
permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Hydraulic brace is extremely heavy and should only be assembled, installed and removed by
competent persons in accordance with a site specific detailed design & installation sequence and
MGF installation guidelines. When assembling on site ensure that all pins and retaining clips are in
place and secured and all bolts are installed and fully tightened with a minimum two threads visible
beyond the nut.
2. Installation is normally carried out by lowering either the assembled frame or individual legs
406 UC BRACE

(dependant upon lifting capacity of excavator / crane) to the correct installation level and once the
frame is fully assembled pre-loading each leg in turn to ensure that the frame is pressed firmly
against the trench sheets and cannot slip. Max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi) must not be
exceeded.
3. Restraining chains are hung off the trench sheets and attached to the legs to assist assembly
/ removal of the frame and ensure vertical support is provided at all times. All the supplied
restraining chains should be installed (min. 2 per leg) and adjusted to ensure an even vertical load
distribution. Restraining chains should never be used for lifting nor solely relied upon to suspend
loads above personnel.
4. Ensure all hydraulic ram lock off valves are closed and all corner pins in place and secured using
the retaining clips provided prior to commencing works.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.6.1

 5. Individual brace legs should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection or loss of ram
pressure prior to entering the excavation.
6. Legs should always be installed square and plumb to the excavation walls ensuring contact with
all the inward facing trench sheet pans. If this is not possible any gaps must be securely packed by
using hardwood wedges prior to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.
7. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier protection (for plant) should
always be considered.
8. Prior to removal of systems all hydraulic rams must be released and retracted to avoid the need for
excessive extraction forces and to avoid damaging corner joints.
9. No matter how much care is taken during the installation and removal of hydraulic bracing systems
some ground movement will occur in the areas immediately surrounding the excavation. Great care
must be taken when specifying these systems for use adjacent to existing structures and services.

LADDERSAFE
See Section 7

POLE LADDER

EDGESAFE DAVITSAFE
See Section 7 See Section 7

TRENCH SHEETS
See Section 6
406 UC BRACE

406 UC
SERIES

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF 406 UC BRACE

mgf.co.uk/products/406-uc-brace

4.6.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 HEAVY DUTY RESTRAINING CHAIN
CONNECTION DETAIL
HEAVY DUTY There are 2 types of chains used, the top frame will
CHAIN TO SHEET use shackle to hook type, while lower frames will use
CONNECTION DETAIL shackle to shackle type. Individual chain links selected
The hook fits over the sheet. to ensure all restraining chains are evenly loaded.

HANDLING POINT LEG CORNER

406 UC BRACE

WLL = 7.0T CONNECTION DETAIL CONNECTION DETAIL

Brace legs and frames Brace legs are connected to Leg corners are connected
are lifted and handled each other using a 406 UC to each other using the
by attaching MGF connection pin and r-clip 406 UC connection pin and
lifting chains to the detail and 6 No. M30x120 r-clip detail. To fill corner
handling / restraining (min.) grade 8.8 bolts and void a corner bracket is
points as shown. nuts c/w washers. attached to ram assembly
using 6 No. M30x120 (min.)
grade 8.8 bolts and nuts
MGF can supply battery impact wrenches to facilitate assembly c/w washers.
and removal of bolted connections. Please contact MGF for details.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.6.3

 406 UC CONNECTION DETAILS

Legs are normally installed at 90° to each

other. However, subject to confirmation
by a competent design Engineer, angles
of between 75° and 135° can be achieved

406
(>90° corner bracket requires removing).

496
Corners should always be packed out
using hardwood wedges against the sheets
prior to final pre-load to ensure even
load distribution and avoid introducing
excessive bending in the brace legs
406
(especially ram assembly).
496

Clear Internal Dimension

406 UC BRACE

Pin to Pin Dimension

Sheet to Sheet Dimension

4.6.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 406 UC (kN/m)

750 0

700 20

650 40

600 60

550 80

500 100

Maximum Predicted Deflection (mm)

450 120
Maximum SWL (kN/m)

400 140

350 160

300 180

250 200

200 220

150 240

100 260

50 280

0 300
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
406 UC BRACE

Sheet to Sheet Dimension (m)

Recommended SWL using 406 UC Ram

Max. SWL available subject to MGF Design Services checks

Page 1
The above load chart is applicable when bracing leg is built up in accordance with the recommended
brace extension combinations on page 4.6.11.
The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.6.5

 Female Lug
rlap
Ove

Cylinder
locating pin
ter on
Ou ensi
D i m
Rod
er Pin locating pin
to
Inn Pin
Hydraulic valves
Male Lug

406 UC hydraulic ram assembly comprises inner and outer sleeved steel box sections
housing a double acting (DA) hydraulic ram to provide up to 800mm of leg adjustment.

Pin to Pin Dimension

Product
Ram Assembly ID Min. Max. Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg)

406 UC Ram 8.399 2096 2896 1490

406 UC extension bars range in

Male Lug
length from 0.6m to 10.0m and are
connected to each other via a 3:2
female / male lug using a Φ50mm
pin and 6 No. grade 8.8 M30 bolts
c/w nuts and washers.
n
sio
en
D im Product Description Weight
in
oP
nt (kg)
Pi
Female 8.405 406 UC 0.6m Extension 374
Lug
8.410 406 UC 1.0m Extension 508
8.420 406 UC 2.0m Extension 868
8.430 406 UC 3.0m Extension 1228
8.440 406 UC 4.0m Extension 1588
8.450 406 UC 5.0m Extension 1992
Product ID
406 UC BRACE

8.460 406 UC 6.0m Extension 2309

8.470 406 UC 7.0m Extension 2659
8.480 406 UC 8.0m Extension 3173
8.490 406 UC 9.0m Extension 3388
8.499 406 UC 10.0m Extension 3749
8.411 406 UC Corner Extension Type 1 605
8.412 406 UC Corner Extension Type 2 600

4.6.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

1250kN DOUBLE
ACTING HYDRAULIC
CYLINDER
Double Acting
Material Steel
Bore 200mm
Max. Working Pressure 400 Bar (5800 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure 400 Bar (5800 psi)

Approx. Working Stroke 800mm
Axial SWL 1250kN
Min. FOS (by test) 2
Working Temp Range -50ºC to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 300kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ30
OUT IN

¼" BSP male QRV

Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore
⅜" BSP
side of the piston through the male quick
isolation valve release valve (QRV) to extend the ram. At
the same time, fluid from the return side
of the piston is returned to the pump via
¼" BSP
Dowty the female QRV. Retraction is a reverse of
washer
female QRV extension. Ensure isolation valve is closed
to maintain pre-load pressure and before
¼" male to male release / connection of QRVs.

MOTORISED PUMP UNITS

The motorised pumps are used to extend and
retract the 406 UC Brace double acting hydraulic
rams. The pumps contain neat bio-degradable
Houghto Safe SF25 shoring fluid. Maximum
recommended installation pressure 1500 psi
(100 Bar). MGF supply 2 different types of
motorised pump for 406 UC, electric and diesel.
406 UC BRACE

Electric Pump Diesel Pump

Rating 110V, 6.5kVA 8kW
Product ID 8.4001U / 8.4003U 8.4006
Component

Capacity 120 / 190 litres 100 litres

Weight (kg) 460 / 622 394
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure (psi) 0-1500 0-1500

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.6.7

 1250kN HYDRAULIC
RAM ASSEMBLY
SPECIFICATIONS

Inner Section Outer Section

350x350x16 SHS 400x400x16 SHS
Specification (+ 8 No. 100x4 thk. (+ 280x8 thk.
stiffening plates) stiffening plates)
Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 191kg/m 226kg/m
Axial SWL 1250kN 1250kN
Moment SWL 673kNm 824kNm – 1500kNm

1250kN HYDRAULIC RAM OUTER SECTION –

MOMENT SWL DETAILS
INNER SECTION

336mm 406 UC Hydraulic Ram Inner Section

- 1136mm =
406mm 673kNm
406 UC Hydraulic Ram Outer Section

150mm = 1570mm = 660mm = 280mm =

824kNm 980kNm 1500kNm 1500kNm
406 UC BRACE

OUTER SECTION

4.6.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

406 UC EXTENSION BAR Specification 356x406x340UC
SPECIFICATIONS
Material Grade S460

Unit Mass 340kg/m

Extension Bar
Axial SWL 1250kN

Moment SWL 1806kNm

Joint Moment SWL 1500kNm

6 No. M30x120 (min.)

Bolting Details grade 8.8 bolts and
nuts c/w washers

406 UC ANCILLARIES
406 UC WALER CONNECTION PIN
Φ50mm bar,
Pin
245mm long
Component

Material Grade 708M40 (EN19A)

Shear SWL 1250kN

Weight 4kg

406 UC WALER CORNER BRACKET

Weight 100kg
Component

Material S275

6 No. M30x120 (min.)

Bolting Details grade 8.8 bolts and nuts
c/w washers

406 UC STEEL SUPPORT BRACKET

180
600
Product ID 8.4002
406 UC BRACE

Weight 42kg

Material 457x152x52 UB, S355

Component
525

Weld 8mm single run fillet weld.

Details No weld on bearing face

SWL 30kN
152 6 No. Φ18 holes min.
Hole Details
90mm c/c

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.6.9

 406 UC SHEAR STOP

100

400

Component 406 UC Shear Stop

Weight 40kg

Shear Stop
Material 100x30 flat, S355

260 Weld Details

15mm multi run fillet weld.
No weld on bearing faces
Shear SWL 3500kN

406 UC extension bars can be provided with double sided integrated shear stops (as an
alternative to using bespoke welded shear stops), which when used in conjunction with
spacer plates (max. 1No.) can allow knee braces to be placed anywhere along the beam.
Integrated shear stops are available on 5.0m and 8.0m extension bars. For further
details contact MGF Design.

406 UC SHEAR STOP SPACER PLATE AND CLAMP

406 UC Shear Stop 406 UC Shear Stop
Spacer Plate Spacer Clamp
Product ID 8.4992 8.4993
600

Weight 35kg 16kg per clamp

Component

Material 30thk. S355 S355

6 No. M30x140 (min.) grade 8.8 bolts
Bolting Details
and nuts c/w washers
0
25 Shear SWL 3500kN

406 UC SHEAR LUGS

406 UC BRACE

1250kN 2500kN
Hydraulic Strut Hydraulic Strut
Min. achievable
35° 35°
int. angle (Θ)

Knee braces can also be taken directly into the connecting lugs of 406 UC extensions
(2.0m and above). These shear lugs are only suitable for 1250kN and 2500kN hydraulic
struts, the achievable angles for those capacities are shown above. Up to 1No. spacer
plates can be used to assist with positioning. For further details contact MGF Design.

4.6.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

406 UC RECOMMENDED BRACE EXTENSION COMBINATIONS

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

3.5

4.5 1.0m N.B. Single 0.6m extensions should

be added to these combinations for
5.5 2.0m
intermediate dimensions. The ram
6.5 3.0m
assemblies are shown at mid-stroke,
so each length can vary by 400mm in
7.5 4.0m either direction.
8.5 5.0m

9.5 6.0m

10.5 7.0m

11.5 8.0m

12.5 9.0m

13.5 10.0m

14.5 10.0m 1.0m

15.5 10.0m 2.0m

16.5 1.0m 7.0m 5.0m

17.5 2.0m 8.0m 4.0m

18.5 9.0m 6.0m

19.5 2.0m 10.0m 4.0m

20.5 3.0m 10.0m 4.0m

Sheet to Sheet Dimension Min. Length Max. Length Leg Weight

(m) (mm) (mm) (kg)
3.5 2948 3748 1598
4.5 3948 4748 2110
5.5 4948 5748 2470
6.5 5948 6748 2830
7.5 6948 7748 3190
8.5 7948 8748 3594
9.5 8948 9748 3911
10.5 9948 10748 4261
406 UC BRACE

11.5 10948 11748 4775

12.5 11948 12748 4990
13.5 12948 13748 5351
14.5 13948 14748 5863
15.5 14948 15748 6223
16.5 15948 16748 6769
17.5 16948 17748 7239
18.5 17948 18748 7303
19.5 18948 19748 7815
20.5 19948 20748 8175

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.6.11

 406 UC 200 SERIES STRUT ADAPTORS
406 UC Pin 406 UC Pin
200 Series

Product ID Product ID
9.209 9.2095

406 UC 406 UC

406 UC extension can be utilised with 200 series

struts to support trenches between 2225mm
and 5000mm wide. Adaptor uses 8 No. M20x65
(min.) grade 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers.

406 UC Waler support brackets can be used to

Adaptors can be utilised as provide vertical support when restraining chains
RC wall fixing plates (subject are not used. Minimum 8mm single run fillet weld
to bolt anchorage design). recommended when welding to pans of steel sheets.
406 UC BRACE

406 UC corner extensions

can be used for non-
standard excavation sizes.
They connect together like
normal 406 UC extensions
and are suitable for internal
corners of between 180°
and 270°. Additional
propping onto these corner
extensions may be required.

4.6.12 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Octagonal frame designs
available for circular excavations.

Typical trench
application utilising
400 Series Struts.

406 UC BRACE

Larger cofferdam
designs available,
utilising intermediate
bracing struts.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.6.13

UNISHORE ® MODULAR
STRUCTURAL SUPPORT
MGF’s UniShore® structural support system has been designed and manufactured in-house
using Strenx high grade steel to ensure market leading performance across the range.
Designed with safety and simplicity in mind the system offers load capacities of 20, 70 and
150 tonnes, which are fully interconnectable to enable more efficient design. Unishore is
supported by MGF’s excellence in engineering and customer service.

CONTACT US FOR A FRESH APPROACH TO STRUCTURAL SUPPORT:

[email protected] 08083 028 832

MGF’S T700 BRACE IS A HEAVY DUTY, HIGHLY VERSATILE, MODULAR HYDRAULIC BRACING SYSTEM
COMPRISING RIGID EXTENSION BARS AND TRANSITION PIECES TO ALLOW THEM TO BE USED WITH
406 UC HYDRAULIC RAM ASSEMBLIES AND RIGID EXTENSION BARS. T700 BRACE IS THE STRONGEST
MODULAR HYDRAULIC BRACING SYSTEM CURRENTLY AVAILABLE IN THE UK AND IS IDEAL FOR
LONG SPANS AND DEEP EXCAVATIONS. THE SYSTEM IS DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH SHEET
PILES TO BRACE LARGE / DEEP COFFERDAMS (IN A WIDE VARIETY OF SHAPES) FOR THE SAFE
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES, LARGE STORAGE TANKS AND TO TEMPORARILY
PROP LARGE BASEMENTS. THE T700 SYSTEM IS IDEALLY SUITED FOR CLEAR SPANS OF BETWEEN
10.9M AND 30.7M AND IS NORMALLY ASSEMBLED AND INSTALLED WITHIN THE EXCAVATION USING
EITHER EXCAVATORS OR CRANES. LARGER EXCAVATIONS CAN BE BRACED USING THIS SYSTEM IN
CONJUNCTION WITH INTERMEDIATE BRACING STRUTS AND IT IS FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH MGF 400,
600 AND 1000 SERIES BRACING STRUT SYSTEMS. T700 BRACE CAN BE USED WITH 406 UC BRACE,
WHERE THE LONG LEGS USE T700 AND THE SHORT LEGS JUST USE 406 UC BRACE.
Fabricated from twinned grade S460 UB steel sections and grade S460 steel plates, the extension bars
are quickly assembled using simple pin and retaining clip / bolt and nut assemblies and connect to
406 UC Brace components using transition pieces. In a normal configuration each leg would normally
contain a double acting 406 UC hydraulic ram assembly providing up to 800mm of stroke. The legs are
joined together at corners to form frames via a simple pin and retaining clip assembly. Connecting the
406 UC hydraulic rams (via hydraulic hoses) to an MGF motorised hydraulic pump unit containing neat
hydraulic shoring fluid allows the leg lengths to be quickly and easily adjusted to suit the excavation
dimensions. Additional lengths of 406 UC Brace extension bars can be used at the end of the legs (in
areas of lower bending) to achieve any leg length. Once the frames are fully assembled and located at
the correct line and level, the rams are pre-loaded against the sheet piles using the hydraulic pump.
Pre-loading of the legs ensures the frame cannot slip and minimises the extent of potential ground
movements. Self-sealing quick release valves and mechanical isolation valves ensure that the ram
pressure cannot be accidentally released once installed. Handling and restraining points are provided
on each leg to assist assembly / removal and to allow the brace / waler to be supported off MGF heavy
duty restraining chains attached to the sheet piles by hooks. Alternatively, steel support brackets can be
supplied which can be welded or bolted to steel or RC walls.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling and restraining chains, waler rail
support brackets, Edgesafe edge protection panels, Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or wooden
pole ladders, Davitsafe retrieval / fall arrest systems, motorised hydraulic pump installation kits
(including bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and confined spaces regime equipment.
Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN 14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated
shoring systems for groundwork support and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for
temporary works procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Hydraulic brace is extremely heavy and should only be assembled, installed and
removed by competent persons in accordance with a site-specific detailed design
& installation sequence and MGF installation guidelines. Consideration must be
given to the weight of the components when preparing lifting plans on site.
Operatives should not be in the vicinity during the lifting process.
2. Prior to assembling T700 Brace legs / frames all components should
be laid outside of the excavation on suitable timber supports.
3. When assembling on site ensure that all pins and retaining clips are in
place and secured and all bolts are installed and fully tightened with a minimum
two threads visible beyond the nut.
4. Installation of T700 Brace components is normally carried out by lowering the individual extension
bars into the excavation at the correct installation level and building up the complete legs (which
would normally include a 406 UC hydraulic ram and T700 transition pieces) within the excavation.
T700 BRACE

Do not try to install / remove entire legs or frames.

5. Legs would then be connected to each other at the corners using a pin and retaining clip assembly.
Once all legs are connected together and the frame is fully assembled each hydraulic ram / leg can
be preloaded to ensure that the frame is pressed firmly against the trench sheets / sheet piles and
cannot slip. Ensure the lock-off valves are open prior to pumping. Max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar
(1500psi) must not be exceeded.
6. It is advised to confirm the ram pressure is being held before continuing works.
7. Heavy duty restraining chains are hung off the sheet piles and attached to the legs to assist
assembly / removal of the frame and ensure vertical support is provided at all times. All the
supplied restraining chains should be installed (min. 3 per T700 Brace extension bar) and adjusted
to ensure an even vertical load distribution. Restraining chains should never be used for lifting nor

CONTACT US [email protected]
4.7.1
 solely relied upon to suspend loads above personnel. Alternatively, both the 406 UC Brace and T700
Brace are available with waler support brackets, which can be welded to sheet piles or affixed to
concrete walls / piles using bolts or anchors. These waler support brackets must be installed prior
to beginning to install the waler frames. It is essential that the 406 UC and T700 waler support
brackets be installed at the correct levels and there are sufficient brackets installed to satisfy the
installation procedure.
8. Ensure all hydraulic ram lock off valves are closed and all corner pins in place and secured using
the retaining clips provided prior to commencing works. Release the pump pressure to ease
removal of the hydraulic hoses. Never release ram pressure by depressing the nipple of the male
quick release valve.
9. Individual brace legs should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection or loss of ram
pressure prior to entering the excavation.
10. Legs should always be installed square and plumb to the excavation walls ensuring contact with
all the inward facing sheet pans. If this is not possible any gaps must be securely packed by using
hardwood wedges prior to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.
11. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier protection (for plant) should
always be considered.
12. Prior to removal of systems all hydraulic rams must be released and retracted to avoid the need for
excessive extraction forces and to avoid damaging corner joints.
13. No matter how much care is taken during the installation and removal of hydraulic bracing systems
some ground movement will occur in the areas immediately surrounding the excavation. Great care
must be taken when specifying these systems for use adjacent to existing structures and services.

DAVITSAFE LADDERSAFE
See Section 7 See Section 7
EDGESAFE LADDER
See Section 7 See Section 8

400 SERIES BRACING

SHEET PILES STRUTS
See Section 6 See Section 5

T700
T700 BRACE

BRACE

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF T700 BRACE

mgf.co.uk/products/t700-hydraulic-brace

4.7.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 HEAVY DUTY RESTRAINING CHAIN
CONNECTION DETAIL
HEAVY DUTY There are 2 types of chains used, the top frame will use
CHAIN TO SHEET shackle to hook type, while lower frames will use shackle
CONNECTION DETAIL to shackle type. Individual chain links selected to ensure
The hook fits over the sheet. all restraining chains are evenly loaded.

WALER SUPPORT BRACKET 406 UC TO T700 TRANSITION

CONNECTION DETAIL CONNECTION DETAIL
There are 2 waler support brackets, 406 UC 406 UC components are connected to the
support brackets and T700 Brace support T700 transitions using a 50mm 406 UC
brackets. These can be used in lieu of restraining connection pin and r-clip detail and 6 No.
chains and can be either welded to steel sheets M30x120 (min.) grade 8.8 bolts and nuts
or anchored to concrete walls / piles. c/w washers. T700 transition connects to
T700 legs as below.

HANDLING POINT LEG CORNER

T700 BRACE

WLL = 14T CONNECTION DETAIL CONNECTION DETAIL

T700 extension bars T700 extension bars are Leg corners are connected to
are lifted and handled connected to each other each other using the 50mm
by attaching MGF using a 60mm T700 diameter 406 UC connection pin
lifting chains to the connection pin and r-clip and r-clip detail. To fill corner void
handling / restraining detail and 8 No. M30x120 a corner bracket is attached to the
points as shown. (min.) grade 8.8 bolts and 406 UC hydraulic ram assembly
nuts c/w washers. using 6 No. M30x120 (min.) grade
8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers.

MGF can supply battery impact wrenches

to facilitate assembly and removal of bolted
CONTACT US [email protected] connections. Please contact MGF for details. 4.7.3
 T700 BRACE CORNER DETAIL

Legs are normally installed at 90° to each

other. However, subject to confirmation
by a competent design Engineer, angles
of between 75° and 135° can be achieved

406
(>90° corner bracket requires removing).

496
Corners should always be packed out
using hardwood wedges against the sheets
prior to final pre-load to ensure even
load distribution and avoid introducing
excessive bending in the brace legs
406
(especially ram assembly).
496

Clear Internal Dimension

Max. Section Depth = 728mm

T700 BRACE

Pin to Pin Dimension

Sheet to Sheet Dimension

4.7.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF T700 BRACE (kN/m)
140 0

120 50

100 100

Maximum Anticipated Deflecdtion (mm)

80 150
Maximum SWL (kN/m)

60 200

40 250

20 300

0 350
T700 BRACE

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Recommended SWL using 406 UC Hydraulic Ram

The above load chart is applicable when bracing leg is built up in accordance with the
recommended brace extension combinations on page 4.7.14.
The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.7.5

 SAFE WORKINGSafe
LOAD FOR MGF T700 BRACE (kN/m)
Working Load for MGF T700 Brace (kN/m)
1100 0

20

1000
40

60

900
80

100
800
120

140
700

Maximum Predicted Deflection (mm)

160
Maximum SLW (kN/m)

600 180

200

500 220

240

400
260

280
300
300

320
200

340

360
100

380
T700 BRACE

0 400
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Clear Span (m)

The above graph is based purely on the max. bending moment capacity of the T700 Brace when
used in conjunction with 3500kN Bracing Struts. Joints and 406 UC components not taken into
consideration.
The load chart deflections are based on calculated values and not test data.

4.7.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Female Lug
rlap
Ove

Cylinder
locating pin
ter
Ou sion
en
im
er Pi nD Rod
locating pin
Inn to
Pin
Hydraulic valves
Male Lug

406 UC hydraulic ram assemblies comprise inner and outer sleeved steel box sections
housing a double acting (DA) hydraulic ram to provide up to 800mm of leg adjustment.

Pin to Pin Dimension

Ram Product
Assembly ID Min. Max. Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg)

406 UC Ram 8.399 2096 2896 1490

406 UC 406 UC
Male Female Lug
Lug
406 UC TO T700
TRANSITION TYPE 1
100
0m T700 T700 Brace
m
Brace Female Lug
Male Lug
Male
Lug
406 UC TO T700 TRANSITION TYPE 2

Female
Lug
nsion
Dime
o Pin
Pin t

Product Description Weight

T700 Brace extension
(kg)
bars range in length
T700 BRACE

from 6.0m to 12.0m 8.606 T700 Brace 6.0m Extension 3785

and are connected
to each other via a 8.609 T700 Brace 9.0m Extension 5445
Product ID

4:3 female / male lug

using a Φ60mm pin 8.612 T700 Brace 12.0m Extension 6985
and 8 No. grade 8.8
8.601 406 UC to T700 Transition Type 1 670
M30x120 (min.) bolts
c/w nuts and washers. 8.602 406 UC to T700 Transition Type 2 620

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.7.7

 1250kN DOUBLE
ACTING HYDRAULIC
CYLINDER
Double Acting
Material Steel
Bore 200mm
Max. Working Pressure 400 Bar (5800 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure 400 Bar (5800 psi)

Approx. Working Stroke 800mm
Axial SWL 1250kN
Min. FOS (by test) 2
Working Temp Range -50ºC to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 300kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ30

OUT IN

¼" BSP male QRV

Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore
⅜" BSP
side of the piston through the male quick
isolation valve release valve (QRV) to extend the ram. At
the same time fluid from the return side
of the piston is returned to the pump via
¼" BSP
Dowty the female QRV. Retraction is a reverse of
washer
female QRV extension. Ensure isolation valve is closed
to maintain pre-load pressure and before
¼" male to male release / connection of QRVs.

MOTORISED PUMP UNITS

The motorised pumps are used to extend and
retract the 406 UC Brace double acting hydraulic
rams. The pumps contain neat bio-degradable
Houghto Safe SF25 shoring fluid. Maximum
recommended installation pressure 1500 psi
(100 Bar). MGF supply 2 different types of
motorised pump for 406 UC, electric and diesel.

Electric Pump Diesel Pump

T700 BRACE

Rating 110V, 6.5kVA 8kW

Product ID 8.4001U / 8.4003U 8.4006
Component

Capacity 120 / 190 litres 100 litres

Weight (kg) 460 / 622 394
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure (psi) 0-1500 0-1500

4.7.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

T700 Brace
 1250kN HYDRAULIC RAM
ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS

Inner Section Outer Section

350x350x16 SHS 400x400x16 SHS
Specification (+ 8 No. 100x4 thk. stiffening (+ 280x8 thk.
plates) stiffening plates)
Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 191kg/m 226kg/m
Axial SWL 1250kN 1250kN
Moment SWL 673kNm 824kNm – 1500kNm

1250KN HYDRAULIC RAM OUTER SECTION –

MOMENT SWL DETAILS
INNER SECTION

336mm 406 UC Hydraulic Ram Inner Section

- 1136mm =
406mm 673kNm
406 UC Hydraulic Ram Outer Section

150mm = 1570mm = 660mm = 280mm =

824kNm 980kNm 1500kNm 1500kNm

OUTER SECTION
T700 BRACE

4.7.9 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

T700 BRACE EXTENSION
BAR SPECIFICATIONS

T700 Brace Extension

Specification Twinned 686x254x152 UB c/w 20mm thk. plates

Material Grade S460
Extension Bar

Unit Mass 600kg/m

Axial SWL 1250kN
Moment SWL 4640kNm
Joint Moment SWL 3750kNm
Bolting Details 8 No. M30x120 (min.) grade 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers

T700 TRANSITION SPECIFICATIONS

T700 Transitions

Specification 356x406x340UC
Material Grade S460
Unit Mass 340kg/m
Component

Axial SWL 1250kN

Moment SWL 1806kNm
Joint Moment SWL 1500kNm
6 No. M30x120 (min.) bolts and nuts c/w washers
T700 BRACE

Bolting Details
& 8 No. M30x120 (min.) bolts and nuts c/w washers

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.7.10

 406 UC ANCILLARIES

406 UC WALER CORNER BRACKET

Weight 100kg

Component
Material S275
Bolting 6 No. M30x120 (min.) grade 8.8
Details bolts and nuts c/w washers

406 UC WALER CONNECTION PIN

Φ50mm bar,
Pin
245mm long
Component

Material Grade 708M40 (EN19A)

Shear SWL 1250kN
Weight 4kg

406 UC STEEL SUPPORT BRACKET

180
600
Product ID 8.4002
Weight 42kg
Component

Material 457x152x52 UB, S355

525

Weld 8mm single run fillet weld.

Details No weld on bearing face
SWL 30kN
152
Hole Details 6 No. Φ18 holes min. 90mm c/c

T700 BRACE ANCILLARIES

T700 BRACE CONNECTION PIN

T700 BRACE

Φ60mm bar,
Pin
Component

405mm long
Material Grade 817M40 (EN24T)
Weight 9kg

4.7.11 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

T700 BRACE ANCILLARIES
T700 BRACE
345
SHEAR STOP
60
T700 Brace extension bars
feature integrated shear
stops at set locations.
Bracing strut swivels
simply bear up against the
shear stops and are then
500

physically clamped to the

T700 flanges.

Component Material Grade 60thk. S460

Shear SWL 3500kN
Weld 15mm multi run fillet weld.
Details No weld on bearing face

T700 BRACE STEEL SUPPORT BRACKET

937 200

Product ID 8.604
Weight 145kg
1160

Component

Material S355
Weld 8mm single run fillet weld.
Details No weld on bearing face
SWL 30kN
225
Hole Details 6 No. φ22 holes

T700 BRACE 3500kN SWIVEL TRANSITION ADAPTOR

600
20

Product ID 8.605
T700 BRACE

Weight 80kg
Component

Material S355
10 No. M24x100 (min.) grade
Bolting
820

8.8 countersunk bolts and

Details
nuts c/w washer

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.7.12

 T700 BRACE 3500kN SWIVEL
TRANSITION CLAMP

Product ID 8.613
Weight 35kg
Component

Material S355
5 No. M30x140 (min.)
Bolting
grade 8.8 bolts and nuts
Details
c/w washers

Type A swivels can be connected

to the T700 Brace using the
swivel transition adaptor in either
orientation using 10 No. M24x100
(min.) countersunk bolts, nuts
and washers, as shown above.
It is essential that the swivel is
connected to the transition adaptor
using the correct lines of bolting
holes, so the bearing face is flush
with the end of the transition plate
so it fully bears onto the T700
T700 BRACE

shear stop. The swivel can only be

installed in a horizontal plane.

Type B swivels connect to the swivel

transition adaptor using the outer
lines of bolt holes. The swivel can only
be installed in a horizontal plane.

4.7.13 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

T700 BRACE RECOMMENDED EXTENSION COMBINATIONS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
11.5 6.0m

N.B. Single 0.6m 406 UC

12.5
extensions should be added
1.0m
6.0m

13.5 6.0m
2.0m
to these combinations for
intermediate dimensions.
14.5 9.0m
The ram assemblies are
15.5 9.0m 1.0m
shown at mid-stroke so each
16.5 9.0m 2.0m
length can vary by 400mm in
either direction.
17.5 12.0m

18.5 12.0m
1.0m

19.5 12.0m
2.0m

20.5 9.0m 6.0m

21.5 9.0m 6.0m 1.0m

22.5 9.0m 6.0m

2.0m

23.5 12.0m 6.0m

24.5 12.0m 6.0m 1.0m

25.5 12.0m 6.0m

2.0m

26.5 12.0m 9.0m

27.5 12.0m 9.0m 1.0m

28.5 12.0m 9.0m 2.0m

29.5 12.0m 12.0m

30.5 12.0m 12.0m

1.0m

Sheet to Sheet Dimension Min. Length Max. Length Weight

(m) (mm) (mm) (kg)
11.5 10909 11709 6695
12.5 11909 12709 7207
13.5 12909 13709 7567
14.5 13909 14709 8355
15.5 14909 15709 8867
16.5 15909 16709 9227
17.5 16909 17709 9895
18.5 17909 18709 10407
19.5 18909 19709 10767
20.5 19909 20709 12149
21.5 20909 21709 12661
22.5 21909 22709 13021
T700 BRACE

23.5 22909 23709 13689

24.5 23909 24709 14201
25.5 24909 25709 14561
26.5 25909 26709 15349
27.5 26909 27709 15861
28.5 27909 28709 16221
29.5 28909 29709 16889
30.5 29909 30709 17401

CONTACT US [email protected] 4.7.14

 T700 Brace is ideal for use when installing
large tanks. T700 Brace can be used with
406 UC legs to create a rectangular frame
without the need for cross struts.

T700 Brace can

be used in large
cofferdams in
T700 BRACE

conjunction with heavy

duty bracing struts.
Bracing struts connect
to the T700 Brace
components using
transition pieces.

4.7.15 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 T700 Brace
T700 Brace
BESPOKE
MANUFACTURING
At MGF we design, develop and manufacture our range of shoring, structrual
and lifting equipment in-house, providing our customers with the flexibility to
meet their requirements with unique and complex schemes.

We have a fully qualified team of experienced welders and fabricators working

alongside our engineering designers to ensure we can provide our customers
with both straightforward and made to measure shoring, structural and
specialised lifting equipment.

FIND OUT MORE ABOUT OUR TAILORED SOLUTIONS:

mgf.co.uk
BRACING STRUTS

COMPATIBILITY GUIDE 5.0

200 SERIES STRUT 5.1
300 SERIES STRUT 5.2
400 SERIES STRUT 5.3
600 SERIES STRUT 5.4
1000 SERIES STRUT 5.5
 MGF BRACING STRUT COMPATIBILITY TABLE

Hydraulic Bracing Range

203 UC 203 UC+ 305 UC 406 UC T700 BRACE
200 Series   (1) (1) X
300 Series   (1) (1) X
Strut Range
Bracing

400 Series X X (2)  

600 Series X X (2)  
1000 Series X X X  
(1) Knee Braces require 600kN Type A Swivel 305 UC Brace transition plate.
(2) Subject to detailed design checks when used in conjunction with 2500kN or 3500kN Hydraulic Struts.
STRUT COMPATIBILITY GUIDE

1000 Series Strut

5.0.1 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

HIGHLY VERSATILE, SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, MEDIUM DUTY MODULAR
HYDRAULIC BRACING STRUTS DESIGNED PRIMARILY TO BE USED IN
CONJUNCTION WITH MGF HYDRAULIC BRACING SYSTEMS.
The system can also be used in any plane to prop steel, concrete or masonry structures. Each strut
comprises either hydraulic ram or mechanical jack assemblies together with various length strut
extension bars. The system can support loads of up to 600kN and span from 0.625m to approx 10.5m.
Components are heavy and are normally assembled on site prior to being lifted into place and installed
within the excavation using either large excavators or cranes. A variety of end bearings are available
allowing the struts to be used at a wide range of angles and within any plane.
Fabricated from grade S355 200x200 steel box section the extensions are quickly assembled into
the required strut lengths using flanged plates c/w bolt, nut and washer assemblies. Final length
adjustment is provided by either a double acting hydraulic ram or a mechanical (screw thread adjusted)
jack providing up to 745mm of stroke. Once located at the correct line and level the struts are pre-loaded
(or tightened) against the faces to be supported using a hydraulic pump on the ram (or by striking the
locking collar of the mechanical jack). Preloading of the legs ensures the strut cannot slip, takes up
any slack or hogging in the system and minimises the extent of potential ground movements. Handling
points are provided at regular intervals on each leg to assist assembly / removal.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling chains, hydraulic pump installation
kits (including bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and confined spaces regime equipment.
Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN 14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated
shoring systems for groundwork support and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works
procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Strut systems are heavy and should only be assembled, installed and removed by competent persons
in accordance with a site specific detailed design & installation sequence and MGF installation
guidelines.
2. Installation is normally carried out by assembling the complete strut and then lowering into place
(subject to crane / excavator capacity). Struts are normally long and unbalanced (due to the weight
of ram / jack unit) and great care must be taken in preparing the lift / maintaining lift angle (tag
lines strongly recommended). On the ram assembly max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi)
must not be exceeded unless design states otherwise.
3. Additional restraining chains or support brackets are normally provided to the brace at intermediate
strut locations to carry the additional strut weight.
4. Ensure struts are fully pre-loaded or tightened, end fixings packed, all hydraulic ram isolation
valves are closed prior to releasing strut from lifting chains and commencing works. When
assembling on site ensure that all pins and retaining clips are in place and secured and all flange
plate bolts are installed and fully tightened / torqued with a minimum two threads visible beyond the
nut. Any gaps in bearing plates must be securely packed by using hardwood wedges or grout prior
to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.
5. Individual components should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection, loss of ram
pressure or loose locking collars prior to entering the excavation.
200 SERIES STRUT
6. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier protection (for plant) should
always be considered.
7. Prior to removal of systems the complete weight of the strut must be
independently supported. Once this is accomplished the hydraulic
rams (or struts) must be released and retracted to avoid the
need for excessive extraction forces.
8. When installing struts at angles great care must be taken to
ensure that the angles match the design, all shear stops are in
place and all elements are supported / jacked and capable of
transmitting loads effectively.
9. Extreme care must be taken when handling the
mechanical jack as the screw thread is free to move
within the outer and can accidentally retract or extend. It is
therefore recommended that during handling operations the
jack is fully extended and the locking collar closed against the
outer to prevent any sudden movements.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.1.1

 DAVITSAFE
See Section 7
EDGESAFE
See Section 7
LADDERSAFE
See Section 7

POLE LADDER

MGF 200 SERIES

203 UC /
254 UC SERIES
See Section 4
200 SERIES STRUT

TRENCH SHEETS
See Section 6

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF BRACING STRUTS

mgf.co.uk/products/200-series-strut

5.1.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 STRUT FLANGE HANDLING POINT
CONNECTION DETAIL WLL = 7.0T
200 Series struts and extensions are connected Strut assemblies are lifted and
via a flange plate (300x300x20mm) using 8 No. handled by attaching MGF lifting
M20x65 (min.) grade 8.8 bolts and nuts c/w chains to the handling / restraining
washers (recommended min. torque 300Nm). points as shown.
Pi
n
to
Pi
n
Di
m
en
si
º

on
40
to
22º

TOP SWIVEL BEARING DETAIL

The swivel is secured to the
UC section by bolting on RSA
sections to the swivel base plate
using 12 No. M20x65 (min.) grade
8.8 bolts and nuts c/w washers.

200 SERIES STRUT

VERTICAL SHEAR RESTRAINT DETAIL

The vertical restraint detail should be used BASE SWIVEL
whenever there is a raking prop. It can either BEARING DETAIL
be welded to the pan of sheets or bolted to a The swivel can be secured to the
concrete wall using anchors. floor slab using anchor bolts.

MGF can supply battery impact wrenches to facilitate assembly and removal of bolted connections.
Please contact MGF for details.
CONTACT US [email protected] 5.1.3
 n
ensio
e Dim
to Fac
Face

CLEAT END BEARING DETAIL KNEE BRACE END

The end cleat is bolted to the strut or extension BEARING DETAIL
using 4 No. M20x65 (min.) grade 8.8 countersunk The swivel is secured to the UC
bolts and nuts c/w washers. The cleat then sits on section by bolting RSA sections
the UC section. When using this end detail MGF to the swivel base plate using
recommend that restraining chains are used to lash 12 No. M20x65 (min.) grade 8.8
the waler and strut together at each end to prevent bolts and nuts c/w washers.
the strut being dislodged if struck accidentally.
200 SERIES STRUT

Pin to Pin Dimension

65º
22º to

5.1.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 200 SERIES (kN)
650

600

550

500

450
Maximum SWL (kN)

400

350

300

250

200
200 SERIES STRUT
150
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Strut Span (m)

250kN HYDRAULIC STRUT 540kN MECHANICAL STRUT 600kN HYDRAULIC STRUT

Axial load only Axial load only
Axial + 10kN Axial + 10kN Axial + 10kN
accidental load accidental load accidental load
Curves include allowance for self weight deflection, eccentricity and fabrication tolerances.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.1.5

 Striking point on
Overlap locking collar

n
nsio
sio
n ter me
er Ou e Di
Out im
en c
D Fa
ace er ce
to
Inn
er toF Inn Fa
ce
Fa

540kN Mechanical Strut assembly comprises inner screw

250kN and 600kN threaded sections and outer sleeved steel sections combined
Hydraulic Strut with a threaded collar to provide up to 745mm of leg adjustment.
assemblies
comprise of inner
and outer sleeved
Hydraulic
steel box sections valves
housing a double Rod
acting (DA) hydraulic locating pin
ram to provide up Cylinder
to 600mm of leg locating pin
adjustment.

Face to Face Dimension

Product
ID Product Description Min. Max. Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg)

9.400 250kN Hydraulic Strut 625 925 100

9.015 540kN Mechanical Strut 1085 1830 147
9.016 600kN Hydraulic Strut 1150 1750 375

n
sio
en
Dim Product Description Weight
e
ac
toF (kg)
200 SERIES STRUT

ce
Fa
9.202 200 Series 0.25m Extension 40
9.205 200 Series 0.5m Extension 52
9.210 200 Series 1.0m Extension 76
200 Series extension
Product ID

9.215 200 Series 1.5m Extension 101

bars range in length
9.220 200 Series 2.0m Extension 124
from 0.25m to 6.0m
and are connected to 9.230 200 Series 3.0m Extension 173
each other via 8 No.
9.240 200 Series 4.0m Extension 223
grade 8.8 M20x65
(min.)bolts c/w nuts 9.250 200 Series 5.0m Extension 268
and washers.
9.260 200 Series 6.0m Extension 316

5.1.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Inner Section Outer Section
200x200x12.5 SHS (+ 4 No. 90x10mm
Specification thk. stiffening plates) 250x250x12.5 SHS
Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 95.8kg/m 91.9kg/m
Axial SWL 600kN 600kN
Moment SWL 100kNm 100kNm

Inner Section Outer Section

120x120x8 SHS
Specification Φ100x12.5 thk. CHS (+ 4 No. 90x8mm fin plates)
Mechanical Jack

Material Grade ST52 S355

Screw Thread Detail Φ100, 24 pitch Φ100, 24 pitch
Unit Mass 27.0kg/m 50.8kg/m
Axial SWL 540kN 540kN
Moment SWL 22kNm 100kNm

200 SERIES STRUT

Specification 200x200x8 SHS

Material Grade S355
Extension Bar

Unit Mass 47.7kg/m

Axial SWL 600kN
Moment SWL 100kNm
Joint Moment SWL 100kNm
Bolting Details 8 No. M20x65 (min.) bolts and nuts c/w washers

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.1.7

 MGF’s 250kN Hydraulic
Strut has been designed
for use with 203 UC
and 203 UC+ Brace as
well as MGF’s 152 UC
Waler. It is suitable for
narrow trenches and
is compatible with 200
Series extensions and
adaptors.

Inner Section Outer Section

Specification 140x140x8 SHS 160x160x8 SHS

Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 32.6kg/m 37.6kg/m
Axial SWL 250kN 250kN
Moment SWL 50kNm 65kNm

When used with the 152 UC When used with 203 UC or 203 UC+ Brace, the 250kN
Waler, the 250kN Hydraulic hydraulic strut can either bear directly onto the UC
Struts must be clamped using end cleats or clamping plates (5.1.11) as above, or
in position. The 250kN connect to the UC Brace connecting lugs using 203 UC
200 SERIES STRUT

strut can also be used as / 203 UC+ 200 Series Strut adaptors (4.3.11 & 4.4.12) as
Endsafe when used in the below. When using these Strut adaptors the 200 Series
outermost position. can also be used as an end protection strut.

5.1.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

200 SERIES DOUBLE
ACTING HYDRAULIC
RAM ASSEMBLIES

250kN Double Acting 600kN Double Acting

Material Steel Steel
Bore 85mm 140mm
Max. Working Pressure 440 Bar (6400 psi) 390 Bar (5700 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure 440 Bar (6400 psi) 390 Bar (5700 psi)
Approx. Working Stroke 300mm 600mm
Axial SWL 250kN 600kN
Min. FOS (by test) 2 2
Working Temp Range -20ºC* to +50ºC -20ºC* to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 60kN 150kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi) 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ22mm Φ22 and Φ26mm

* Winter mix required for shoring fluid at low temps.

¼" BSP OUT IN
female QRV ¼" BSP
male QRV
Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore side of ⅜" BSP
the piston through the male quick release valve isolation
valve
(QRV) to extend the ram. At the same time fluid
from the return side of the piston is returned Dowty
to the pump via the female QRV. Retraction is a washer
reverse of extension. Ensure isolation valve is
¼" male to male
closed to maintain pre-load pressure and before
release / connection of QRVs.

PUMP UNITS The pumps are used to extend and retract the 200
Series double acting hydraulic rams. The pumps
contain bio-degradable Houghto Safe SF25 shoring
fluid. During the Summer months the shoring fluid
is diluted with water at a ratio of 3 parts water to
1 part Houghto Safe SF25. In the Winter the mix
200 SERIES STRUT
ratio is 1:1. Maximum recommended installation
pressure 1500 psi (100 Bar). There are 2 types of
pumps available, a manually operated bucket pump
and a motorised petrol pump.

Bucket Pump Petrol Motorised Pump

Product ID 1.603 (DA) 8.4007 (DA)
Component

Fluid Capacity (L) 20 70

Weight (kg) 25 270
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure (psi) 0-1500 0-1500

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.1.9

 600kN TYPE A SWIVEL ASSEMBLY

‘Type A’ swivels can be connected directly to concrete

structures or the 203 UC / 203 UC+ Brace systems by
bolting on the associated clamp assemblies (product
ID = 9.320). Type A swivels can also connect to 305 or
406 UC Brace in conjunction with a transition plate and
clamp assemblies, as detailed on page 5.1.12.

Type A Type B

9.209 (single lug)

Product ID 9.301
& 9.2095 (double lug)
Weight 75kg 32kg
Raking Prop
22°- 40° 65°- 90°
Operating Range
200 Series Swivel

Knee Brace / Cross

22°- 65° 65°- 90°
Strut Operating Range
Axial SWL 600kN 600kN
385 x 420 x 30mm thk. 300 x 300 x 20mm thk.
Swivel Base Plate
(S355) (S275)
Base Plate Hole Details 20 No. Φ22 holes 8 No. Φ22 holes
Φ50, 150 long (708M40 /
Pin Detail Φ62 (080M40 / EN8) EN19A) – 203 UC / 203 UC+
waler connection pin
200 SERIES STRUT

600kN TYPE B SWIVEL ASSEMBLY ‘Type B’ swivels can

be connected to both
the 203 UC and 203
UC+ Brace systems
by using the 200
Series clamping
plate as detailed on
page 5.1.11.

5.1.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

200 SERIES ANCILLARIES

200 SERIES END SEATING PLATE

Product ID 9.300
Weight 15kg

Component
Material 15mm thk. flat, S275
4 No. M20x65 (min.) grade 8.8
Bolting
countersunk bolts and nuts
Details
c/w washers
Bearing SWL 600kN

200 SERIES 152 UC WALER CLAMP

Product ID 9.317
Component

Weight 3kg
Material S275
Bolting 2No. grade 8.8 M20x80 (min.)
Details c/w nuts and washers

When connecting 200 Series to 152 UC, 2 No. of the above

clamps should be attached to each end of the strut.

200 SERIES CLAMPING PLATE

Connecting Plate - 9.318,
weight = 21kg
203 UC Clamp - 9.314,
Product
200 SERIES STRUT
weight = 13kg
ID
203 UC+ requires 203 UC
clamp and 6mm spacer plate -
Component

8.166, weight = 1.5kg

Material 20mm thk. flat, S275
4No. grade 8.8 M20x65 (min.)
Bolting countersunk bolts and 4No.
Details grade 8.8 M20x80 (min.) bolts
c/w nuts and washers
Bearing
600kN
SWL

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.1.11

 200 / 300 SERIES VERTICAL 200
RESTRAINT
Product ID 8.3003
Component

Weight 23kg
533x210x92 UB,

462
Material
S355

209

325

600kN TYPE A SWIVEL TO 305/406 UC BRACE TRANSITION PLATE

Product ID 9.319
Weight 76kg
Material 25mm thk. flat, S355

12No. grade 8.8 M20x80 (min.)

countersunk bolts c/w nuts and
Plate Bolting
washers - installed on 2 lines of bolt
Details
holes parallel to the orientation of
Component

the lugs (as shown below)

2No. 400 Series Swivel Clamp

Type A to 305 UC
Clamp (product ID = 8.303)
Details 2No. 400 Series Swivel Clamp
Type A to 406 UC Brace
(product ID = 8.40016)

Clamp Bolting 8No. grade 8.8 M30x140 (min.)

Details bolts c/w nuts and washers
200 SERIES STRUT

5.1.12 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

200 SERIES RECOMMENDED EXTENSION COMBINATIONS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1.5 N.B. Single 0.25 or 0.5m extensions

should be added to these combinations
for intermediate dimensions. The strut
2.5 1.0m
assemblies are shown at mid-stroke,
so each length can vary by up to
3.5 2.0m 372mm in either direction. The 250kN
Hydraulic Strut can be used in lieu of
the 600kN Hydraulic.
4.5 3.0m

5.5 4.0m

6.5 5.0m

7.5 5.0m 1.0m

8.5 4.0m 3.0m

9.5 2.0m 3.0m 3.0m

10.5 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m

250kN Hydraulic 540kN Mechanical 600kN Hydraulic

Min. Max. Leg Min. Max. Leg Min. Max. Leg
Length Length Weight Length Length Weight Length Length Weight

(mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (mm) (kg)

0.7 655 955 130 - - - - - -

1.5 1405 1705 222 1118 1863 197 1190 1790 405

2.5 2405 2705 298 2118 2863 273 2190 2790 481
Face to Face Dimension (m)

200 SERIES STRUT

3.5 3405 3705 346 3118 3863 321 3190 3790 529

4.5 4405 4705 395 4118 4863 370 4190 4790 578

5.5 5405 5705 445 5118 5863 420 5190 5790 628

6.5 6405 6705 490 6118 6863 465 6190 6790 673

7.5 7405 7705 566 7118 7863 541 7190 7790 749

8.5 8405 8705 618 8118 8863 593 8190 8790 801

9.5 9405 9705 692 9118 9863 667 9190 9790 875

10.5 10405 10705 742 10118 10863 717 10190 10790 925

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.1.13

 TYPICAL RAKING PROP APPLICATION
200 SERIES STRUT

Typical bearing detail Typical bearing detail on

on RC capping beam. concrete thrust block.

5.1.14 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

200 Series Strut
 HIGHLY VERSATILE, SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, MEDIUM DUTY, MODULAR
BRACING STRUT SYSTEM DESIGNED PRIMARILY TO BE USED AS
INTERMEDIATE STRUTS WITH MGF HYDRAULIC BRACING SYSTEMS.
The system can also be used in any plane to prop steel, concrete or masonry structures. Each strut
comprises either hydraulic ram or mechanical jack assemblies together with various length strut
extension bars. The system can support loads of up to 600kN and span from 1.1m to approx. 17.8m and
can incorporate a central cruciform bar offering intermediate vertical support to perpendicular struts.
Components are heavy and are normally assembled on site prior to being lifted into place and installed
within the excavation using either large excavators or cranes. A variety of end bearings are available
allowing the struts to be used at a wide range of angles and within any plane.
Fabricated from grade S355 300x300 steel box section the extensions are quickly assembled into
the required strut lengths using flanged plates c/w bolt, nut and washer assemblies. Final length
adjustment is provided by either a double acting hydraulic ram or a mechanical (screw thread adjusted)
jack providing up to 745mm of stroke. Once located at the correct line and level the struts are pre-loaded
(or tightened) against the faces to be supported using a hydraulic pump on the ram (or by striking the
locking collar of the mechanical jack). Preloading of the legs ensures the strut cannot slip, takes up
any slack or hogging in the system and minimises the extent of potential ground movements. Handling
points are provided at regular intervals on each leg to assist assembly / removal.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling chains, hydraulic pump installation
kits (including bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and confined spaces regime equipment.
Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN 14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated
shoring systems for groundwork support and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works
procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Strut systems are heavy and should only be assembled, installed and removed by competent
persons in accordance with a site specific detailed design & installation sequence and MGF
installation guidelines.
2. Installation is normally carried out by assembling the complete strut and then lowering into place
(subject to crane / excavator capacity). Struts are normally long and unbalanced (due to the weight
of ram / jack unit) and great care must be taken in preparing the lift / maintaining lift angle (tag
lines strongly recommended). On the ram assembly max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi)
must not be exceeded unless design states otherwise.
3. Additional restraining chains or support brackets are normally provided to the brace at intermediate
strut locations to carry the additional strut weight.
4. Ensure struts are fully pre-loaded or tightened, end fixings packed, all hydraulic ram isolation
valves are closed prior to releasing strut from lifting chains and commencing works. When
assembling on site ensure that all pins and retaining clips are in place and secured and all flange
plate bolts are installed and fully tightened / torqued with a minimum two threads visible beyond the
nut. Any gaps in bearing plates must be securely packed by using hardwood wedges or grout prior
to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.
5. Individual components should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection, loss of ram
pressure or loose locking collars prior to entering the excavation.
300 SERIES STRUT

6. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier

protection (for plant) should always be considered.
7. Prior to removal of systems the complete weight of the strut
must be independently supported. Once this is accomplished the
hydraulic rams (or struts) must be released and retracted to avoid
the need for excessive extraction forces.
8. When installing struts at angles great care must be taken to
ensure that the angles match the design, all shear stops
are in place and all elements are supported / packed
and capable of transmitting loads effectively.
9. Extreme care must be taken when handling the
mechanical jack as the screw thread is free to move
within the outer and can accidentally retract or extend.
It is therefore recommended that during handling
operations the jack is fully extended and the locking collar
closed against the outer to prevent any sudden movements.

5.2.1 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 DAVITSAFE
See Section 7
POLE LADDER

EDGESAFE LADDERSAFE
See Section 7 See Section 7

300 SERIES

TRENCH SHEETS 203 UC /

See Section 6 254 UC SERIES
See Section 4

CRUCIFORM STRUT OPTION

Compatible with 200 / 300 Series
Struts using 254 UC 200 / 300
Series Strut adaptors. 300 SERIES STRUT
Note: 300 Series cruciforms should
not be used on strut lengths greater
than 12.0m.

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF BRACING STRUTS

mgf.co.uk/products/300-series-strut

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.2.2

 STRUT FLANGE CONNECTION DETAIL HANDLING POINT
300 Series Strut assemblies and swivel plates are WLL = 7.0T
connected to 300 Series extensions using a transition Strut assemblies are lifted
plate (400x400x20mm), 8No. grade 8.8 M20x65 (min.) and handled by attaching
countersunk bolts and 8No. grade 8.8 M20x65 (min.) MGF lifting chains to the
bolts, c/w nuts and washers. 300 Series extensions are handling / restraining
connected to each other via a flange plate (400x400x20mm) points as shown.
using 8No. grade 8.8 M20x65 (min.) bolts c/w nuts and
washers (recommended min. torque 300Nm).
n
sio
en
m
Di
n
Pi

2
to
n

2º

TOP SWIVEL BEARING DETAIL

Pi

to

The swivel is secured to the UC

40º

section by bolting RSA sections to

the swivel base plate using 12No.
grade 8.8 M20x65 (min.) bolts c/w
nuts and washers.
300 SERIES STRUT

BASE SWIVEL BEARING DETAIL

VERTICAL SHEAR RESTRAINT DETAIL The swivel can be secured to the floor
The vertical restraint detail should be used slab using anchor bolts.
whenever there is a raking prop. It can
either be welded to the pan of sheets or
MGF can supply battery impact wrenches
bolted to a concrete wall using anchors.
to facilitate assembly and removal of bolted
connections. Please contact MGF for details.

5.2.3 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Face to
Face D
im ension

CLEAT END BEARING DETAIL KNEE BRACE END

The end cleat is bolted to the strut or extension BEARING DETAIL
using 4No. grade 8.8 M20x65 (min.) bolts c/w nuts The swivel is secured to the UC
and washers. The cleat then sits on the UC section. section by bolting RSA sections
When using this end detail MGF recommend that to the swivel base using 12No.
restraining chains are used to lash the waler and grade 8.8 M20x65 (min.) bolts
strut together at each end to prevent the strut c/w nuts and washers.
being dislodged if struck accidentally.

300 SERIES STRUT

Pin to Pin Dimension
65º
22º to

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.2.4

 SAFE WORKING LOAD
SafeFOR MGF
Working Load300 SERIES
for MGF (kN)
300 Series (kN)
650

600

550

500
Maximum SWL (kN)

450

400

350
300 SERIES STRUT

300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Strut Span (m)

540kN MECHANICAL STRUT 600kN HYDRAULIC STRUT

Axial load only Axial load only
Axial + 10kN Axial + 10kN
accidental load accidental load
Curves include allowance for self weight deflection, eccentricity and fabrication tolerances.

5.2.5 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Striking point on
Overlap locking collar

n
nsio
sio
n ter me
er Ou e Di
Out im
en c
D Fa
ace er ce
to
Inn
er toF Inn Fa
ce
Fa

540kN Mechanical Strut assembly comprises inner screw

600kN Hydraulic threaded sections and outer sleeved steel sections combined
Strut assembly with a threaded collar to provide up to 745mm of leg adjustment.
comprises inner
and outer sleeved
steel box sections
Hydraulic
housing a double valves
acting (DA) hydraulic Rod
ram to provide up locating pin
to 600mm of leg Cylinder
adjustment. locating pin

Face to Face Dimension

Product
ID Product Description Min. Max. Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg)

9.015 540kN Mechanical Strut 1085 1830 147

9.016 600kN Hydraulic Strut 1150 1750 375

n
sio
en
im
eD
ac
300 SERIES STRUT
F
to
ce
Fa
Product Description Weight
(kg)

9.000 300 Series 0.5m Extension 107

300 Series extension
bars range in length 9.001 300 Series 1.0m Extension 163
Product ID

from 0.5m to 5.0m and

are connected to each 9.002 300 Series 2.0m Extension 280
other via 8No. grade
9.003 300 Series 3.0m Extension 388
8.8 M20x65 (min.) bolts
c/w nuts and washers. 9.005 300 Series 5.0m Extension 610

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.2.6

 Inner Section Outer Section
Specification 200x200x12.5 SHS (+ 4 No. 90x10mm 250x250x12.5 SHS
thk. stiffening plates)
Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 95.8kg/m 91.9kg/m
Axial SWL 600kN 600kN
Moment SWL 100kNm 100kNm

Inner Section Outer Section

Specification Φ100x12.5 thk. CHS 120x120x8 SHS
(+ 4 No. 90x8mm fin plates)
Mechanical Jack

Material Grade ST52 S355

Screw Thread Detail Φ100, 24 pitch Φ100, 24 pitch
Unit Mass 27.0kg/m 50.8kg/m
Axial SWL 540kN 540kN
Moment SWL 22kNm 100kNm
300 SERIES STRUT

Specification 300x300x12.5 SHS

Material Grade S355
Extension Bar

Unit Mass 112.0kg/m

Axial SWL 600kN
Moment SWL 308kNm
Joint Moment SWL 126kNm

5.2.7 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

600kN DOUBLE
ACTING HYDRAULIC
RAM ASSEMBLY

Double Acting
Material Steel
Bore 140mm
Max. Working Pressure 390 Bar (5700 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure 390 Bar (5700 psi)

Approx. Working Stroke 600mm
Axial SWL 600kN
Min. FOS (by test) 2
Working Temp Range -20ºC* to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 150kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ22 and Φ26mm

* Winter mix required for shoring fluid at low temps.

¼" BSP OUT IN
female QRV ¼" BSP
male QRV
Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore side of ⅜" BSP
the piston, through the male quick release valve isolation
valve
(QRV) to extend the ram. At the same time fluid
from the return side of the piston is returned Dowty
to the pump via the female QRV. Retraction is a washer
reverse of extension. Ensure isolation valve is
¼" male to male
closed to maintain pre-load pressure and before
release / connection of QRVs.

PUMP UNITS The pumps are used to extend and retract the 300
Series double acting hydraulic rams. The pumps
contain bio-degradable Houghto Safe SF25 shoring
fluid. During the Summer months the shoring fluid
is diluted with water at a ratio of 3 parts water to
1 part Houghto Safe SF25. In the Winter the mix
300 SERIES STRUT
ratio is 1:1. Maximum recommended installation
pressure 1500 psi (100 Bar). There are 2 types of
pumps available, a manually operated bucket pump
and a motorised petrol pump.

Bucket Pump Petrol Motorised Pump

Product ID 1.603 (DA) 8.4007 (DA)
Component

Fluid Capacity (L) 20 70

Weight (kg) 25 270
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure (psi) 0-1500 0-1500

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.2.8

 600kN TYPE A SWIVEL ASSEMBLY

‘Type A’ swivels can be connected directly to concrete

structures or the 203 UC / 203 UC+ Brace systems
by bolting on the associated clamp assemblies. Type
A swivels can also connect to 305 or 406 UC Brace
in conjunction with a transition plate and clamp
assemblies, as detailed on page 5.2.11.

Type A Type B

9.209 (single lug)

Product ID 9.301
& 9.2095 (double lug)
Weight 75kg 32kg
Raking Prop
22°- 40° 0°- 28°
Operating Range
200 Series Swivel

Knee Brace / Cross

22°- 65° 65°- 90°
Strut Operating Range
Axial SWL 600kN 600kN
385 x 420 x 30mm thk. 300 x 300 x 20mm thk.
Swivel Base Plate
(S355) (S275)
Base Plate Hole Details 20 No. Φ22 holes 8 No. Φ22 holes
Φ50, 150 long (708M40 /
Pin Detail Φ62 (080M40 / EN8) EN19A) – 203 UC / 254 UC
waler connection pin

600kN TYPE B SWIVEL ASSEMBLY

300 SERIES STRUT

‘Type B’ swivels can be

connected to both the
203 UC and 203 UC+
Brace systems by using
the 200 Series clamping
plate as detailed on
page 5.1.11.

5.2.9 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

300 SERIES ANCILLARIES

300 SERIES END SEATING PLATE

Product ID 9.3005
Weight 27kg

Component
Material 15mm thk. flat, S275
Bolting 4No. grade 8.8 M20x65 (min.)
Details bolts c/w nuts and washers
Bearing SWL 600kN

200-300 SERIES TRANSITION

Product ID 9.303
Weight 25kg
Component

Material 20mm thk. flat, S355

8No. grade 8.8 M20x65 (min.)
Bolting bolts & 8No. grade 8.8 M20x65
Details (min.) countersunk bolts – c/w
nuts and washers
200

200 / 300 SERIES VERTICAL RESTRAINT

Product ID 8.3003
Component

Weight 23kg
462

Material 533x210x92 UB, S355

209

325

300 SERIES CRUCIFORM

300 SERIES STRUT
Product ID 9.011
Weight 140kg
Material 254x254x107 UC, S460
Component

16No. grade 8.8 M20x65 (min.)

Bolting Details
bolts c/w nuts and washers
Strut Adaptor SWL 600kN
Axial SWL 600kN
Moment SWL 308kNm

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.2.10

 600kN TYPE A SWIVEL TO 305/406 UC BRACE TRANSITION PLATE

Product ID 9.319
Weight 76kg
Material 25mm thk. flat, S355

12No. grade 8.8 M20x80 (min.)

countersunk bolts c/w nuts and
Plate Bolting
washers – installed on 2 lines of bolt
Details
holes parallel to the orientation of

Component
the lugs (as shown below)

2No. 400 Series Swivel Clamp

Type A to 305 UC
Clamp (product ID = 8.303)
Details 2No. 400 Series Swivel Clamp
Type A to 406 UC
(product ID = 8.40016)

Clamp Bolting 8No. grade 8.8 M30x140 (min.)

Details bolts c/w nuts and washers
300 SERIES STRUT

5.2.11 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

300 SERIES RECOMMENDED EXTENSION COMBINATIONS

N.B. Single 0.5m extensions should be added to these combinations for intermediate
dimensions. The strut assemblies are shown at mid-stroke, so each length can vary by
up to 372mm in either direction.

540kN Mechanical 600kN Hydraulic

Min. Max. Leg Min. Max. Leg
Length Length Weight Length Length Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (mm) (kg)

6.5 6138 6883 852 6210 6810 1027

7.5 7138 7883 1015 7210 7810 1190
8.5 8138 8883 1132 8210 8810 1307
Face to Face Dimension (m)

300 SERIES STRUT

9.5 9138 9883 1240 9210 9810 1415
10.5 10138 10883 1412 10210 10810 1587
11.5 11138 11883 1520 11210 11810 1695
12.5 12138 12883 1625 12210 12810 1800
13.5 13138 13883 1742 13210 13810 1917
14.5 14138 14883 1850 14210 14810 2025
15.5 15138 15883 2022 15210 15810 2197
16.5 16138 16883 2072 16210 16810 2247
17.5 17138 17883 2235 17210 17810 2410

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.2.12

 TYPICAL RAKING PROP APPLICATION
300 SERIES STRUT

Typical bearing detail Typical bearing detail on

on RC capping beam. concrete thrust block.

5.2.13 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

HIGHLY VERSATILE, SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, HEAVY DUTY, MODULAR BRACING
STRUT SYSTEM DESIGNED PRIMARILY TO BE USED AS INTERMEDIATE
STRUTS WITH MGF HYDRAULIC BRACING SYSTEMS.
The system can also be used in any plane to prop steel, concrete or masonry structures. Each strut
comprises either hydraulic ram or mechanical jack assemblies together with various length strut
extension bars. The system can support loads of up to 3500kN and span from 1.6m to approx. 24.5m
and can incorporate a central cruciform bar offering intermediate vertical support to perpendicular
struts. Components are very heavy and are normally assembled on site prior to being lifted into place
and installed within the excavation using either large excavators or cranes. A variety of end bearings are
available allowing the struts to be used at a wide range of angles and within any plane.
Fabricated from grade S355 400x400 steel box section the extensions are quickly assembled into
the required strut lengths using flanged plates c/w bolt, nut and washer assemblies. Final length
adjustment is provided by either a double acting hydraulic ram or a mechanical (screw thread adjusted)
jack providing up to 800mm of stroke. Once located at the correct line and level the struts are pre-loaded
(or tightened) against the faces to be supported using a hydraulic pump on the ram (or by striking the
locking collar of the mechanical jack). Preloading of the legs ensures the strut cannot slip, takes up
any slack or hogging in the system and minimises the extent of potential ground movements. Handling
points are provided at regular intervals on each leg to assist assembly / removal.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling chains, hydraulic pump installation kits
(including bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and confined spaces regime equipment.
Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN 14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated
shoring systems for groundwork support and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works
procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Strut systems are very heavy and should only be assembled, installed and removed by competent
persons in accordance with a site specific detailed design & installation sequence and MGF
installation guidelines.
2. Installation is normally carried out by assembling the complete strut and then lowering into place
(subject to crane / excavator capacity). Struts are normally long and unbalanced (due to the weight
of ram / jack unit) and great care must be taken in preparing the lift / maintaining lift angle (tag
lines strongly recommended). On the ram assembly max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi)
must not be exceeded unless design states otherwise.
3. Additional restraining chains or support brackets are normally provided to the brace at intermediate
strut locations to carry the additional strut weight.
4. Ensure struts are fully pre-loaded or tightened, end fixings packed, all hydraulic ram isolation
valves are closed prior to releasing the strut from lifting chains and commencing works. When
assembling on site ensure that all pins and retaining clips are in place and secured and all flange
plate bolts are installed and fully tightened / torqued with a minimum of two threads visible beyond
the nut. Any gaps in bearing plates must be securely packed by using hardwood wedges or grout
prior to final pre-loading of the hydraulic rams.
5. Individual components should be visually inspected for damage,
excessive deflection, loss of ram pressure or loose locking collars
400 SERIES STRUT
prior to entering the excavation.
6. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel)
and barrier protection (for plant) should always be
considered.
7. Prior to removal of systems the complete weight of
the strut must be independently supported. Once this
is accomplished the hydraulic rams (or struts) must be
released and retracted to avoid the need for excessive
extraction forces.
8. When installing struts at angles great care must be taken to
ensure that the angles match the design, all shear stops are
in place and all elements are supported / packed and capable
of transmitting loads effectively.
9. Extreme care must be taken when handling the mechanical jack
as the screw thread can detach from the outer if fully wound out.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.3.1

 DAVITSAFE
See Section 7 EDGESAFE
See Section 7

LADDERSAFE
See Section 7

POLE LADDER

400 SERIES

406 UC
TRENCH SHEETS SERIES
See Section 6 See Section 4
400 SERIES STRUT

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF BRACING STRUTS

mgf.co.uk/products/400-series-strut

5.3.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

STRUT FLANGE CONNECTION DETAIL HANDLING POINT
400 Series Struts and extensions are WLL = 7.0T
connected to each other via a flange plate Strut assemblies are lifted and
(520x520x30mm) using 12No. grade 8.8 handled by attaching MGF lifting
M24x100 (min.) bolts c/w nuts and spring chains to the handling / restraining
washers (recommended min. torque 400Nm). points as shown.
ion
ns
me

22
Di

º
Pin

to
to

40
Pin

TOP SWIVEL BEARING DETAIL

The swivel hooks over the 406UC
flange during installation, and
when the strut is pre-loaded the
birds mouth detail bears onto the
UC flanges.

400 SERIES STRUT

VERTICAL SHEAR RESTRAINT DETAIL BASE SWIVEL

The vertical restraint detail should be used BEARING DETAIL
whenever there is a raking prop. It can either The swivel can be secured to the
be welded to the pan of sheets or bolted to a floor slab using anchor bolts.
concrete wall using anchors.

MGF can supply battery impact wrenches

to facilitate assembly and removal of bolted
CONTACT US [email protected] connections. Please contact MGF for details. 5.3.3
 Face to F
a ce Dimen
sion

CLEAT END BEARING DETAIL KNEE BRACE END

The end cleat is bolted to the strut or extension using BEARING DETAIL
9No. grade 8.8 M24x100 (min.) countersunk bolts The swivel is secured to the
c/w nuts and spring washers. The cleat then sits UC section using 2No. swivel
on the UC section. When using this end detail, MGF clamps as detailed on page
recommend that restraining chains are used to lash 5.3.13 using 8No. grade 8.8
the waler and strut together at each end to prevent M30x140 (min.) bolts c/w
the strut being dislodged if struck accidentally. nuts and washers.
400 SERIES STRUT

Pin to Pin Dimension

o 65º
22º t

5.3.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SAFE WORKING Safe
LOAD FOR MGF 400 SERIES (kN)
Working Load for MGF 400 Series (kN)
3600

3500

3400

3300

3200

3100

3000

2900

2800

2700

2600

2500

2400
Maximum SWL (kN)

2300

2200

2100

2000

1900

1800

1700

1600

1500

1400

1300

1200

1100

1000
400 SERIES STRUT
900

800
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Strut Span (m)

2500kN HYDRAULIC STRUT 3500kN HYDRAULIC STRUT

Axial load only Axial load only
Axial + 10kN Axial + 10kN
accidental load accidental load
Curves include allowance for self weight deflection, eccentricity and fabrication tolerances.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.3.5

 Striking point
on thread
Overlap r
Oute
Outer

i on n
er ens sio
Out im e d en
ace
D ead Dim
r oF Thrinner ce
Inne et Fa
a c to
F ce
Fa

1250kN Mechanical Strut assembly comprises inner threaded rod

2500kN Hydraulic and outer threaded tube providing up to 400mm of leg adjustment.
Strut assembly
comprises
inner and outer Cylinder
sleeved steel box locating pin
Rod locating pin
sections housing
a double acting
(DA) hydraulic MGF’s 2500kN hydraulic struts can
ram to provide up be used for prop load monitoring,
to 800mm of leg please contact MGF Design for
adjustment. Hydraulic
valves more information.

Face to Face Dimension

Product
ID Product Description Min. Max. Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg)

9.701 1250kN Mechanical Strut 795 1170 326

8.500 2500kN Hydraulic Strut 1625 2425 1716

Product Description Weight

on
nsi (kg)
Dime
ace
e to F 9.706 400 Series 0.25m Extension 165
Fa c
400 SERIES STRUT

9.705 400 Series 0.5m Extension 214

9.710 400 Series 1.0m Extension 310
9.720 400 Series 2.0m Extension 505
Product ID

9.730 400 Series 3.0m Extension 697

9.740 400 Series 4.0m Extension 889
400 Series extension
9.750 400 Series 5.0m Extension 1083
bars range in length
from 0.25m to 10.0m and 9.760 400 Series 6.0m Extension 1275
are connected to each
9.770 400 Series 7.0m Extension 1465
other via 12No. grade 8.8
M24x100 (min.) bolts c/w 9.780 400 Series 8.0m Extension 1660
nuts and spring washers.
9.799 400 Series 10.0m Extension 2048

5.3.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Max. 225mm Max. 225mm

Inner Section Outer Section

Φ152.4x19.1 thk. CHS

Specification Φ127x25.4 thk. CHS
(+ 4 No. 280x200x20 fin plates)
Mechanical Jack

Material Grade ST52 S355

Screw Thread Detail 5” ACME 5” ACME
Unit Mass 63.6kg/m 105kg
Axial SWL 1250kN 1250kN
Moment SWL 60kNm 277kNm

400 SERIES STRUT

Specification 400x400x16 SHS

Material Grade S355
Extension Bar

Unit Mass 191.0kg/m

Axial SWL 3500kN
Moment SWL 703kNm
Joint Moment SWL 277kNm

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.3.7

 2500kN HYDRAULIC RAM

Inner Section Outer Section

Specification 400x400x16 SHS 450x450x20 SHS

Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 191kg/m 275kg/m
Axial SWL 2500kN 2500kN
Moment SWL 277kNm 277kNm
400 SERIES STRUT

5.3.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

2500kN DOUBLE
ACTING HYDRAULIC
RAM ASSEMBLY
2500kN Double Acting
Material Steel
Bore 250mm
Max. Working Pressure 500 Bar (7250 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure 500 Bar (7250 psi)

Approx. Working Stroke 800mm
Axial SWL 2500kN
Min. FOS 2 (by test)
Working Temp Range -50ºC to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 500kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ30

OUT IN
¼" BSP male QRV
Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore side of ⅜" BSP
the piston through the male quick release valve isolation
(QRV) to extend the ram. At the same time fluid valve

from the return side of the piston is returned

Dowty
to the pump via the female QRV. Retraction is a ¼" BSP washer
reverse of extension. Ensure isolation valve is female QRV

closed to maintain pre-load pressure and before ¼" male to male

release / connection of QRVs.

MOTORISED PUMP UNITS

The motorised pumps are used to extend
and retract the 400 Series double acting
hydraulic rams. The pumps contain
neat bio-degradable Houghto Safe SF25
shoring fluid. Maximum recommended
installation pressure 1500 psi (100 Bar).
400 SERIES STRUT
MGF supply 2 different types of motorised
pump for 400 Series, electric and diesel.

Electric Pump Diesel Pump

Rating 110V, 6.5kVA 8kW
Product ID 8.4001U / 8.4003U 8.4006
Component

Capacity 120 / 190 litres 100 litres

Weight (kg) 460 / 622 394
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure 0-1500 psi 0-1500 psi

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.3.9

 3500kN TYPE A SWIVEL ASSEMBLY

These swivels can be connected directly to concrete structures, 305 UC Brace or 406 UC
Brace systems by bolting on the associated clamp assemblies detailed on page 5.3.13.

Type A Type B

Product ID 9.704 9.310

Weight 264kg 320kg
Raking Prop
22°- 40° 0°- 28°
Operating Range
400 Series Swivel

Knee Brace / Cross

22°- 65° 65°- 90°
Strut Operating Range
Axial SWL 3500kN 3500kN
500 x 600 x 30mm thk. 600 x 600 x 40mm thk.
Swivel Base Plate
(S355) (S355)
Base Plate Hole Details 14 No. Φ32 holes 16 No. Φ32 holes
Pin Detail Φ90 (817M40 / EN24T) Φ90 (817M40 / EN24T)

3500kN TYPE B SWIVEL ASSEMBLY

400 SERIES STRUT

5.3.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

BIRDSMOUTH TYPE C SWIVEL ASSEMBLY

Type C swivels can bear

directly onto the corners of
concrete structures such as
pile caps or capping beams.

Type C Type D

Product ID 9.315 9.312

Weight 270kg 305kg
Raking Prop
22°- 40° 22°- 40°
Birdsmouth

Operating Range
Bearing Plate 20mm thk. (S355) 20mm thk. (S355)
Base Plate Hole Details 2 No. Φ26 holes 8 No. Φ26 holes
Pin Detail Φ90 (817M40 / EN24T) Φ90 (817M40 / EN24T)
Axial SWL 2500kN* 2500kN

* Subject to verification of concrete.

BIRDSMOUTH TYPE D SWIVEL ASSEMBLY

400 SERIES STRUT

Type D swivels can be connected

directly to the 406 UC Brace Systems.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.3.11

 400 SERIES ANCILLARIES

400 SERIES END SEATING PLATE

Product ID 9.703
Weight 102kg
Component

Material 30mm thk. flat, S275

Bolting 9No. grade 8.8 M24x100 (min.) countersunk
Details bolts c/w nuts and spring washers
Bearing SWL 3500kN

400 SERIES END SEATING PLATE CLAMP

Product ID 9.7035
Component

Weight 25kg
Material S275
Bolting 3No. grade 8.8 M24x170 (min.)
Details bolts c/w nuts and washers

152

400 SERIES VERTICAL RESTRAINT

Product ID 8.4002
Component

525

Weight 42kg
Material 457x152x52 UB, S355
180 600

400 SERIES CRUCIFORM

400 SERIES STRUT

Product ID 9.609
Weight 475kg
Material 356x406x340UC, S460
Component

24No. grade 8.8 M24x100 (min.)

Bolting Details
bolts c/w nuts and spring washers
Strut Adaptor SWL 1250kN
Axial SWL 1250kN
Moment SWL 703kNm
Max. Span 16m

5.3.12 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

3500kN SWIVEL CLAMPING
PLATES TYPE A

Swivel Clamp Type A is to be used on 3500kN

Swivel Type A, when used on a knee brace
connected to 305 UC / 406 UC.

Swivel Clamp Swivel Clamp Modular

Type A Type B Swivel Cleat
8.303 (305 UC) 8.304 (305 UC)
Product ID 9.809
8.40016 (406 UC) 8.40017 (406 UC)
34kg (305 UC) 45kg (305 UC)
Weight 53kg
46kg (406 UC) 54kg (406 UC)
30mm & 25mm thk. 30mm & 25mm thk. 40mm thk. flat,
Component

Material (305 UC) or 40mm thk. (305 UC) or 40mm 600 long, S275
(406 UC) flat, thk. (406 UC) flat,
500 long, S275 600 long, S275
8No. grade 8.8 10No. grade 8.8 5No. M30x120 (min.)
Bolting
M30x140 (min.) bolts M30x150 (min.) bolts grade 8.8 bolts c/w
Details
c/w nuts and washers c/w nuts and washers nuts and washers
Bearing
3500kN 3500kN 570kN
SWL

3500kN SWIVEL CLAMPING

PLATES TYPE B

Swivel Clamp Type B is to be used on 3500kN

Swivel Type B, when used as a cross strut
connected to 305 UC / 406 UC.

3500kN SWIVEL TYPE

A & B - MODULAR
400 SERIES STRUT
SWIVEL CLEAT

The Modular Swivel Cleat is

compatible with the 3500kN
Swivels, Type A & B. They
simply bolt onto the swivel base
plate to allow bracing struts
to cleat onto concrete capping
beams or thrust blocks without
0º to 22º
anchoring into the concrete.
Suitable for use at angles
between 0°-22°.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.3.13

 400 SERIES RECOMMENDED EXTENSION COMBINATIONS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

3 1m

4 2m

5 3m

6 4m

7 5m

8 6m

9 7m

10 7m 1m

11 7m 2m

12 7m 3m

13 10m 1m

14 10m 2m

15 8m 5m

16 10m 4m

17 10m 5m

18 10m 6m

19 10m 7m

20 3m 10m 5m

21 4m 10m 5m

22 5m 10m 5m

23 7m 7m 7m

24 7m 7m 8m

N.B. Single 0.25m and 0.5m extensions should be added to these combinations
for intermediate dimensions. The strut assemblies are shown at mid-stroke,
so each length can vary by up to 400mm in either direction.
400 SERIES STRUT

5.3.14 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 2500kN Hydraulic 3500kN Hydraulic
Min. Max. Leg Min. Max. Leg
Length Length Weight Length Length Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (mm) (kg)

3 2685 3485 2026 2730 3330 2510

4 3685 4485 2221 3730 4330 2705

5 4685 5485 2412 4730 5330 2896

6 5685 6485 2605 5730 6330 3089

7 6685 7485 2799 6730 7330 3283

8 7685 8485 2989 7730 8330 3473

9 8685 9485 3181 8730 9330 3665

10 9685 10485 3491 9730 10330 3975

10685 11485 3686 10730 11330 4170

Face to Face Dimension (m)

11

12 11685 12485 3878 11730 12330 4362

13 12685 13485 4074 12730 13330 4558

14 13685 14485 4269 13730 14330 4753

15 14685 15485 4459 14730 15330 4943

16 15685 16485 4653 15730 16330 5137

17 16685 17485 4847 16730 17330 5331

18 17685 18485 5037 17730 18330 5521

19 18685 19485 5229 18730 19330 5713

20 19685 20485 5544 19730 20330 6028

21 20685 21485 5736 20730 21330 6220 400 SERIES STRUT

22 21685 22485 5930 21730 22330 6414

23 22685 23485 6111 22730 23330 6595

24 23685 24485 6497 23730 24330 6981

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.3.15

 TYPICAL CONCRETE PROPPING APPLICATION

Typical bearing detail Typical bearing detail Typical bearing detail

on RC capping beam on concrete floor. on concrete piles.
concrete corbel.
400 SERIES STRUT

Typical steel corbel knee brace application.

5.3.16 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

Bracing Strut System
 SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, HEAVY DUTY, MODULAR BRACING STRUT SYSTEMS
DESIGNED PRIMARILY TO BE USED AS CROSS STRUTS WITH THE MGF 305 /
406 UC AND T700 HYDRAULIC BRACING SYSTEMS ON MAJOR EXCAVATIONS.
The system can also be used to prop reinforced concrete piles and capping beams forming the walls
of major basement structures. Each strut comprises hydraulic ram assemblies together with various
length strut extension bars. The system can support loads of up to 3500kN and span up to approx. 30.6m
unsupported. Components are very heavy and are normally assembled on site prior to being lifted into
place and installed within the excavation using large cranes. A variety of end bearings are available
allowing the struts to be used at a range of angles.
Fabricated from a API grade X70 610x12.5 hollow circular steel section, and S355 grade 660x20 / 25 CHS,
the extensions are quickly assembled into the required strut lengths using circular flanged plates c/w
bolt, nut and washer assemblies. Final length adjustment is provided by a double acting hydraulic ram
providing up to 800mm of stroke. Once located at the correct line and level the struts are pre-loaded
(or tightened) against the faces to be supported using a hydraulic pump on the ram. Pre-loading of the
legs ensures the strut cannot slip, takes up any slack or hogging in the system and minimises the extent
of potential ground movements. Handling points are provided at regular intervals on each leg to assist
assembly / removal.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling chains, hydraulic pump installation kits
(including bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and confined spaces regime equipment.
Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN 14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated
shoring systems for groundwork support and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works
procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Strut systems are very heavy and should only be assembled, installed and removed by competent
persons in accordance with a site specific detailed design & installation sequence and MGF
installation guidelines.
2. Installation is normally carried out by assembling the complete strut and then lowering into place
(subject to crane / excavator capacity). Struts are normally long and unbalanced (due to the weight
of ram / jack unit) and great care must be taken in preparing the lift / maintaining lift angle (tag
lines strongly recommended). On the ram assembly max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi)
must not be exceeded unless the design states otherwise.
3. Additional restraining chains or support brackets are normally provided to the brace at intermediate
strut locations to carry the additional strut weight.
4. Ensure struts are fully pre-loaded or tightened, end fixings fully packed, all hydraulic ram isolation
valves are closed prior to releasing the strut from lifting chains and commencing works. When
assembling on site ensure that all pins and retaining clips are in place and secured and all flange
plate bolts are installed and fully tightened / torqued with a minimum two threads visible beyond the
nut. Any gaps in bearing plates must be securely packed using grout prior to final pre-loading of the
hydraulic rams.
5. Individual components should be visually inspected for
600 SERIES STRUT

damage, excessive deflection, loss of ram pressure prior

to entering the excavation.
6. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and
barrier protection (for plant) should always be considered.
7. Prior to removal of systems the complete weight of the
strut must be independently supported. Once this is
accomplished the hydraulic rams (or struts) must be
released and retracted to avoid the need for excessive
extraction forces.
8. When installing struts at angles great care must be
taken to ensure that the angles match the design,
all shear stops are in place and all elements are
supported / packed and capable of transmitting loads
effectively. On large unsupported spans the pre-load must be
applied prior to removing vertical support to minimise sagging.

5.4.1 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 EDGESAFE
See Section 7
406 UC SERIES
See Section 4

600 SERIES

DAVITSAFE
See Section 7
TRENCH SHEETS
See Section 6 LADDERSAFE
See Section 7
POLE LADDER

HANDLING POINTS
WLL = 12.0T
Strut assemblies are lifted
and handled by attaching STRUT FLANGE TRANSITION FLANGE
MGF lifting chains to the CONNECTION CONNECTION DETAIL
handling / restraining points DETAIL The transition adaptor is
as shown. Assemblies can 600 Series Struts connected to the hydraulic
also be handled using a fork and extensions are strut or 400 Series extension
lift on the pockets on the connected to each via a square flange plate
underside of the extensions. other via a flange (520x520x30mm) and
plate (Ø850x30mm) connects to 600 Series
using 12No. grade via a circular end plate
600 SERIES STRUT
8.8 M24x100 (Φ850x30mm) both
(min.) bolts c/w connections using 12 No.
nuts and washers grade 8.8 M24x100 (min.)
(recommended min. bolts c/w nuts and washers
torque 400Nm). (recommended min. torque
400Nm).

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF BRACING STRUTS

mgf.co.uk/products/600-series-strut

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.4.2

 Face to Face Dim
ension

CLEAT END BEARING DETAIL SWIVEL END

The end cleat is bolted to the strut or extension BEARING DETAIL
/ transition using 9No. grade 8.8 M24x100 (min.) Swivels can be anchored
countersunk bolts c/w nuts and washers. directly to concrete or
The cleat then sits on the UC section. When clamped to the UC Brace
using this end detail MGF recommend that system using 2 No. swivel
restraining chains are used to prevent the strut clamps as detailed on page
being dislodged if struck accidentally. 5.4.13.

Pin to Pin Dimension

600 SERIES STRUT

65º
22º to

MGF can supply battery impact wrenches to facilitate assembly and removal of bolted connections.
Please contact MGF for details.

5.4.3 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR Load
Safe Working MGFfor600
MGF SERIES (kN)
600 Series (kN)
3600

3500

3400

3300

3200

3100

3000

2900

2800

2700

2600

2500

2400
Maximum SWL (kN)

2300

2200

2100

2000

1900

1800

1700

1600

1500

1400

1300

1200

1100

1000
600 SERIES STRUT
900

800
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Strut Span (m)

2500kN HYDRAULIC STRUT 3500kN HYDRAULIC STRUT

Axial load only Axial load only
Axial + 10kN Axial + 10kN
accidental load accidental load
Curves include allowance for self weight deflection, eccentricity and fabrication tolerances.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.4.4

 SAFE WORKING LOAD FORLoad
Safe Working MGF
for660 SERIES
MGF 660 (kN)
Series (kN)
3600

3500

3400

3300

3200

3100

3000

2900

2800

2700

2600

2500

2400
Maximum SWL (kN)

2300

2200

2100

2000

1900

1800

1700

1600

1500

1400

1300

1200

1100

1000
600 SERIES STRUT

900

800
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Strut Span (m)

2500kN HYDRAULIC STRUT 3500kN HYDRAULIC STRUT

Axial load only Axial load only
Axial + 10kN Axial + 10kN
accidental load accidental load
Curves include allowance for self weight deflection, eccentricity and fabrication tolerances.

5.4.5 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Overlap MGF’s 2500kN and
3500kN Hydraulic
Struts can be
used for prop load
monitoring, please
contact MGF Design
er for more information.
Out ion
ens
Dim
ace
Inne
r toF Rod locating pin
e
Fac
Cylinder
locating pin

2500kN and 3500kN Hydraulic Strut

assembly comprises inner and outer
sleeved steel box sections housing a
double acting (DA) hydraulic ram to
provide up to 800mm of leg adjustment. Hydraulic valves

Face to Face Dimension

Product
ID Product Description Min. Max. Weight

(mm) (mm) (kg)

8.500 2500kN Hydraulic Strut 1625 2425 1716

8.700 3500kN Hydraulic Strut 1670 2270 2200

ion
im ens
eD Product Description Weight
to Fac
e
Fac (kg)
600 SERIES STRUT
9.605 600 Series 1.0m Extension 480

9.611 600 Series 2.0m Extension 700

9.610 600 Series 3.0m Extension 880

9.606 600 Series 4.0m Extension 1065

Product ID

9.607 600 Series 7.0m Extension 1680

600/660 Series extension bars
range in length from 1.0m to 9.608 600 Series 11.5m Extension 2600
11.5m and are connected to 9.612 660 Series 5.0m Extension 2316
each other via 12No. grade
8.8 M24x100 (min.) bolts c/w 9.613 660 Series 10.0m Extension 4352
nuts and washers. 9.614 660 Series 3.5m Extension 1710

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.4.6

 2500kN HYDRAULIC RAM
Inner Section Outer Section
400x400x16 450x450x20
Specification
SHS SHS

Hydraulic Ram
Material Grade S355 S355
Unit Mass 191kg/m 275kg/m
Axial SWL 2500kN 2500kN
Moment SWL 277kNm 277kNm

3500kN HYDRAULIC RAM

Inner Section Outer Section
559x16 610x20
Specification
CHS CHS
Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 214kg/m 291kg/m
Axial SWL 3500kN 3500kN
Moment SWL 847kNm 1251kNm

600 Series 660 Series

610x12.5 660x25
Specification
CHS CHS
Extension Bar

Material Grade X70 S355

Unit Mass 184kg/m 391kg/m
Axial SWL 3500kN 3500kN
Moment SWL 1418kNm 1885kNm
Joint Moment SWL 396kNm 396kNm
600 SERIES STRUT

5.4.7 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

2500kN AND 3500kN
DOUBLE ACTING
HYDRAULIC RAM
ASSEMBLY
2500kN Double Acting 3500kN Double Acting
Material Steel Steel
Bore 250mm 300mm
Max. Working Pressure 500 Bar (7250 psi) 495 Bar (7200 psi)
500 Bar (7250 psi) 495 Bar (7200 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure
Approx. Working Stroke 800mm 600mm
Axial SWL 2500kN 3500kN
Min. FOS 2 (by test) 1.78 (by design)
Working Temp Range -50ºC to +50ºC -50°C to +50°C
Approx. Pre-Load 500kN 700kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi) 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ30 Φ40

OUT IN
¼" BSP male QRV
Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore side of ⅜" BSP
the piston through the male quick release valve isolation
(QRV) to extend the ram. At the same time fluid valve

from the return side of the piston is returned

Dowty
to the pump via the female QRV. Retraction is a ¼" BSP washer
reverse of extension. Ensure isolation valve is female QRV

closed to maintain pre-load pressure and before ¼" male to male

release / connection of QRVs.

MOTORISED PUMP UNITS

The motorised pumps are used to extend
and retract the 600 Series double acting
hydraulic rams. The pumps contain
neat bio-degradable Houghto Safe SF25
shoring fluid. Maximum recommended
installation pressure 1500 psi (100 Bar).
600 SERIES STRUT
MGF supply 2 different types of motorised
pump for 600 Series, electric and diesel.

Electric Pump Diesel Pump

Rating 110V, 6.5kVA 8kW
Product ID 8.4001U / 8.4003U 8.4006
Component

Capacity 120 / 190 litres 100 litres

Weight (kg) 460 / 622 394
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure 0-1500 psi 0-1500 psi

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.4.8

 3500kN TYPE A SWIVEL ASSEMBLY

These swivels can be connected directly to concrete structures or the 305 UC or 406 UC
Brace systems by bolting on the associated clamp assemblies detailed on page 5.4.13.

Type A Type B

Product ID 9.704 9.310

Weight 264kg 320kg

400 Series Swivel

Knee Brace / Cross 22°- 65° 65°- 90°

Strut Operating Range
Axial SWL 3500kN 3500kN

Swivel Base Plate 500 x 600 x 30mm 600 x 600 x 40mm

thk. (S355) thk. (S355)

Base Plate Hole Details 14 No. Φ32 holes 16 No. Φ32 holes

Pin Detail Φ90 (817M40 / EN24T) Φ90 (817M40 / EN24T)

3500kN TYPE B SWIVEL ASSEMBLY

600 SERIES STRUT

5.4.9 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

600 SERIES ADAPTORS
1000 / 600 SERIES
TRANSITION

T700 3500kN
1000 / 600 600 / 400 SWIVEL TRANSITION
Product ID 9.800 9.604 8.605

Weight 475kg 352kg 80kg

14.6 thk. tube, 400x400x16 SHS, 20mm thk.

Material X65 S355 S355 plate

24 / 12No. grade 12No. grade 8.8

10No. M24x100 (min.)
Bolting 8.8 M24x100 (min.) M24x100 (min.)
countersunk bolts,
Transition

Details bolts c/w nuts and bolts c/w nuts and

nuts and washers
washers washers

Strut Adaptor 3500kN 3500kN 3500kN

SWL
Axial SWL 3500kN 3500kN 3500kN

Moment SWL 1125kNm 396kNm -

Joint Moment 1125 / 396kNm 396 / 277kNm -

SWL

600 / 400 SERIES T700 SWIVEL TRANSITION PLATE

TRANSITION
600
20
600 SERIES STRUT
820

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.4.10

 600 SERIES RECOMMENDED EXTENSION COMBINATIONS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

15 11.5m

16 11.5m 1.0m

17 1.0m 11.5m 1.0m

18 10.0m 4.0m 0.5m

19 11.5m 4.0m

20 11.5m 5.0m

21 1.0m 11.5m 5.0m

22 11.5m 7.0m

23 1.0m 11.5m 7.0m

24 4.0m 11.5m 5.0m

25 5.0m 11.5m 5.0m

26 4.0m 11.5m 7.0m

27 5.0m 11.5m 7.0m

28 7.0m 10.0m 7.0m 0.5m

29 7.0m 11.5m 7.0m

30 5.0m 11.5m 10.0m

N.B. Single 0.25 or 0.5m 400 Series extensions should be added to these combinations for
intermediate dimensions. The strut assemblies are shown at mid-stroke, so each length
can vary by up to 400mm in either direction. Individual 7m pieces can be exchanged for a
3m and 4m. Additional compatible extensions are available (660 diameter / 1000 Series).
Contact MGF Design department for details.
The above strut combinations use the 600 Series extensions (610 tube).
600 SERIES STRUT

5.4.11 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 2500kN Hydraulic 3500kN Hydraulic
Min. Max. Leg Min. Max. Leg
Length Length Weight Length Length Weight
(mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (mm) (kg)

15 14875 15675 5660 14420 15020 5792

16 15875 16675 6140 15420 16020 6272
17 16875 17675 6620 16420 17020 6752
18 17875 18675 6634 17420 18020 6766
19 18875 19675 6785 18420 19020 6917
Face to Face Dimension (m)

20 19875 20675 7265 19420 20020 7397

21 20875 21675 7575 20420 21020 7707
22 21875 22675 7340 21420 22020 7472
23 22875 23675 7910 22420 23020 8042
24 23875 24675 8220 23420 24020 8352
25 24875 25675 8314 24420 25020 8446
26 25875 26675 8465 25420 26020 8597
27 26875 27675 8474 26420 27020 8606
28 27875 28675 8954 27420 28020 9086
29 28875 29675 9020 28420 29020 9152
30 29875 30675 9330 29420 30020 9462

600 SERIES STRUT

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.4.12

 3500kN SWIVEL CLAMPING
PLATES TYPE A

Swivel Clamp Type A is to be used on

3500kN Swivel Type A, when used on a
knee brace connected to 305 UC / 406 UC.

Modular T700 3500kN

Swivel Clamp Swivel Clamp Swivel Swivel Transition
Type A Type B Cleat Clamp

Product 8.303 (305 UC) 8.304 (305 UC)

9.809 8.613
ID 8.40016 (406 UC) 8.40017 (406 UC)

34kg (305 UC) 45kg (305 UC)

Weight 53kg 35kg
46kg (406 UC) 54kg (406 UC)

30mm & 25mm 30mm & 25mm

thk. (305 UC) or thk. (305 UC) or 40mm thk. 40mm thk.
Component

Material 40mm thk. 40mm thk. flat, 600 long, flat, 600 long,
(406 UC) flat, (406 UC) flat, S275 S275
500 long, S275 600 long, S275

Bolting 8No. grade 8.8 10No. grade 8.8 5No. M30x120 5No. M30x140
Details M30x140 (min.) M30x150 (min.) (min.) grade 8.8 (min.) grade 8.8
bolts c/w nuts bolts c/w nuts bolts c/w nuts bolts c/w nuts
and washers and washers and washers and washers

Bearing 3500kN 3500kN 570kN 3500kN

SWL

3500kN SWIVEL TYPE A & B -

MODULAR SWIVEL CLEAT

The Modular Swivel Cleat is compatible with

the 3500kN Swivels, Type A & B. They simply
bolt onto the swivel base plate to allow bracing
600 SERIES STRUT

struts to cleat onto concrete capping beams or

thrust blocks without anchoring into the concrete.
Suitable for use at angles between 0°-22°.

0º to 22º

5.4.13 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

3500kN SWIVEL CLAMPING T700 3500kN SWIVEL
PLATES TYPE B TRANSITION CLAMP

Swivel Clamp Type B is to be used on The T700 3500kN swivel transition clamps
3500kN Swivel Type B, when used as a are used to connect the T700 3500kN swivel
cross strut connected to 305 UC / 406 UC. transition plate to T700 extension bars.

600 SERIES STRUT

TYPICAL BASEMENT
WALL APPLICATION

Typical bearing detail on RC corbel.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.4.14

600 Series Strut
SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, HEAVY DUTY, MODULAR BRACING STRUT SYSTEM
DESIGNED PRIMARILY TO BE USED AS CROSS STRUTS WITH THE MGF 406 UC
AND T700 HYDRAULIC BRACING SYSTEM ON MAJOR EXCAVATIONS.
The system can also be used to prop reinforced concrete piles and capping beams forming the walls
of major basements structures. Each strut comprises hydraulic ram assemblies together with various
length strut extension bars. The system can support loads of up to 3500kN and span up to approx. 46.0m
unsupported (clear unsupported spans of up to 55.0m possible using MGF Super 1000 Series, please
contact MGF Design for further details). Components are extremely heavy and are normally assembled
on site prior to being lifted into place and installed within the excavation using large cranes. A variety of
end bearings are available allowing the struts to be used at a range of angles.
Fabricated from API grade X65 1067x14.3 or S355 1067x19.1 hollow circular steel section, the
extensions are quickly assembled into the required strut lengths using circular flanged plates c/w
bolt, nut and washer assemblies. Final length adjustment is provided by a double acting hydraulic ram
providing up to 800mm of stroke. Once located at the correct line and level the struts are pre-loaded (or
tightened) against the faces to be supported using a hydraulic pump on the ram. Pre-loading of the legs
ensures the strut cannot slip, takes up any slack or hogging in the system and minimises the extent of
potential ground movements. Handling points are provided at regular intervals on each leg to assist
assembly / removal.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable handling chains, hydraulic pump installation
kits (including bio-degradable shoring fluid and hydraulic hoses) and confined spaces regime equipment.
Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN 14653:2005 Parts 1 and 2 Manually operated
shoring systems for groundwork support and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works
procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Strut systems are extremely heavy and should only be assembled, installed and removed by
competent persons in accordance with a site specific detailed design & installation sequence and
MGF installation guidelines.
2. Installation is normally carried out by assembling the complete strut and then lowering into place
(subject to crane / excavator capacity). Struts are normally long and unbalanced (due to the weight
of ram / jack unit) and great care must be taken in preparing the lift / maintaining lift angle (tag
lines strongly recommended). On the ram assembly max. pre-load pressure of 100Bar (1500psi)
must not be exceeded unless the design states otherwise.
3. Additional restraining chains or support brackets are normally provided to the brace at intermediate
strut locations to carry the additional strut weight.
4. Ensure struts are fully pre-loaded or tightened, end fixings fully packed, all hydraulic ram isolation
valves are closed prior to releasing the strut from lifting chains and commencing works. When
assembling on site ensure that all pins and retaining clips are in place and secured and all flange
plate bolts are installed and fully tightened / torqued with a minimum two threads visible beyond the
nut. Any gaps in bearing plates must be securely packed using grout prior to final pre-loading of the 1000 SERIES STRUT
hydraulic rams.
5. Individual components should be visually inspected for damage,
excessive deflection loss of ram pressure prior to entering the
excavation.
6. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier
protection (for plant) should always be considered.
7. Prior to removal of systems the complete weight of the strut must be
independently supported. Once this is accomplished the hydraulic
rams (or struts) must be released and retracted to avoid
the need for excessive extraction forces.
8. When installing struts at angles great care
must be taken to ensure that the angles match
the design, all shear stops are in place and all
elements are supported / packed and capable of
transmitting loads effectively. On large unsupported
spans the pre-load must be applied prior to removing
vertical support to minimise sagging.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.5.1

 1000 SERIES

STRUT FLANGE TRANSITION FLANGE HANDLING POINT

CONNECTION DETAIL CONNECTION WLL = 12.0T
1000 Series Struts and DETAIL Strut assemblies are
extensions are connected The transition adaptor is lifted and handled by
to each other via a flange connected to the hydraulic attaching MGF lifting
1000 SERIES STRUT

plate (Ø1270x30mm) using strut or 600/400 Series chains to the handling

24No. grade 8.8 M24x100 transition via a flange / restraining points as
(min.) bolts c/w nuts and plate (Ø850x30mm) using shown.
washers (recommended 12No. grade 8.8 M24x100
min. torque 400Nm). (min.) bolts c/w nuts and
washers (recommended
min. torque 400Nm).

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF BRACING STRUTS

mgf.co.uk/products/1000-series-strut

5.5.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Pin to Pin Dimension

65
to

º
90 º

SWIVEL END BEARING DETAIL

Swivels can be anchored directly to concrete or clamped to the 406 UC Brace or
T700 Brace using 2 No. swivel clamps as detailed on page 5.5.13.

Pin to Pin Dimension 1000 SERIES STRUT

6 5º
2 2 º to

MGF can supply battery impact wrenches

to facilitate assembly and removal of bolted
CONTACT US [email protected] connections. Please contact MGF for details. 5.5.3
 SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF 1000 SERIES (kN)
Safe Working Load for MGF 1000 Series (kN)
3600

3500

3400

3300

3200

3100

3000
Maximum SWL (kN)

2900

2800

2700

2600

2500

2400

2300

2200
1000 SERIES STRUT

2100

2000
16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46
Strut Span (m)

2500kN HYDRAULIC STRUT 3500kN HYDRAULIC STRUT

Axial + 25kN Axial + 25kN
accidental load accidental load
Curves include allowance for self weight deflection, eccentricity and fabrication tolerances.

5.5.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR MGF SUPER 1000 SERIES (kN)
Safe Working Load for MGF Super 1000 Series (kN)
3600

3500

3400

3300

3200

3100

3000

2900
Maximum SWL (kN)

2800

2700

2600

2500

2400

2300

2200 1000 SERIES STRUT

2100

2000
20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
Strut Span (m)

2500kN HYDRAULIC STRUT 3500kN HYDRAULIC STRUT

Axial + 25kN Axial + 25kN
accidental load accidental load
Curves include allowance for self weight deflection, eccentricity and fabrication tolerances.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.5.5

 Overlap
MGF’s 2500kN and
3500kN hydraulic struts
can be used for prop
load monitoring, please
contact MGF Design for
Out
er ion
ens more information.
Dim
Face
r o
Inne et
Fac Rod locating pin
Cylinder
locating pin

2500kN and 3500kN hydraulic strut

assembly comprises inner and outer
sleeved steel box sections housing a
double acting (DA) hydraulic ram to
provide up to 800mm of leg adjustment.
Hydraulic valves

Face to Face Dimension

Product
ID Product Description Min. Max. Weight

(mm) (mm) (kg)

8.500 2500kN Hydraulic Strut 1625 2425 1716

8.700 3500kN Hydraulic Strut 1670 2270 2200

n
sio Product Description Weight
en
Dim
ce
Fa (kg)
e to
c
Fa
9.850 1000 Series 5.0m Extension 2105
1000 SERIES STRUT

9.860 1000 Series 6.0m Extension 2480

9.870 1000 Series 7.0m Extension 2850

9.899 1000 Series 10.0m Extension 4000

1000 Series extension
bars range in length 9.900 1000 Series 11.5m Extension 4930
Product ID

from 5.0m to 11.5m.

9.901 Super 1000 Series 2.605m Extension 1884
Super 1000 Series
extension bars range in 9.902 Super 1000 Series 6.15m Extension 3609
length from 2.605m to
14.05m. Both sections 9.903 Super 1000 Series 11.03m Extension 6050
are connected to each 9.904 Super 1000 Series 11.10m Extension 6100
other via 24 No. grade
8.8 M24x100 (min.) bolts 9.905 Super 1000 Series 13.5m Extension 7200
c/w nuts and washers. 9.906 Super 1000 Series 14.05m Extension 7500

5.5.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

2500kN HYDRAULIC RAM

Inner Section Outer Section

Specification 400x400x16 SHS 450x450x20 SHS
Material Grade S355 S355
Hydraulic
Ram

Unit Mass 191kg/m 275kg/m

Axial SWL 2500kN 2500kN
Moment SWL 277kNm 277kNm

3500kN HYDRAULIC RAM

Inner Section Outer Section

Specification 559x16 CHS 610x20 CHS
Hydraulic Ram

Material Grade S355 S355

Unit Mass 214kg/m 291kg/m
Axial SWL 3500kN 3500kN
Moment SWL 847kNm 1251kNm

1000 SERIES STRUT

1000 Series Super 1000 Series

Specification 1067x14.3 CHS 1067x19.1 CHS
Material Grade X65 (448N/mm2) S355
Extension Bar

Unit Mass 371kg/m 493kg/m

Axial SWL 3500kN 3500kN
Moment SWL 3668kNm 3722kNm
Joint Moment SWL 1125kNm 1466kNm

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.5.7

 2500kN AND 3500kN
DOUBLE ACTING
HYDRAULIC RAM
ASSEMBLY
2500kN Double Acting 3500kN Double Acting
Material Steel Steel
Bore 250mm 300mm
Max. Working Pressure 500 Bar (7250 psi) 495 Bar (7200 psi)
Hydraulic Cylinder

Test Pressure 500 Bar (7250 psi) 495 Bar (7200 psi)
Approx. Working Stroke 800mm 600mm
Axial SWL 2500kN 3500kN
Min. FOS 2 (by test) 1.78 (by design)
Working Temp Range -50ºC to +50ºC -50ºC to +50ºC
Approx. Pre-Load 500kN 700kN
Approx. Pre-Load Pressure 100 Bar (1500 psi) 100 Bar (1500 psi)
Locating Pins Φ30 Φ40

OUT IN
¼" BSP male QRV
Shoring fluid is pumped into the full bore side of ⅜" BSP
the piston through the male quick release valve isolation
(QRV) to extend the ram. At the same time fluid valve

from the return side of the piston is returned

Dowty
to the pump via the female QRV. Retraction is a ¼" BSP washer
reverse of extension. Ensure isolation valve is female QRV

closed to maintain pre-load pressure and before ¼" male to male

release / connection of QRVs.

MOTORISED PUMP UNITS

The motorised pumps are used to extend
and retract the 1000 Series double acting
hydraulic rams. The pumps contain
neat bio-degradable Houghto Safe SF25
1000 SERIES STRUT

shoring fluid. Maximum recommended

installation pressure 1500 psi (100 Bar).
MGF supply 2 different types of motorised
pump for 1000 Series, electric and diesel.

Electric Pump Diesel Pump

Rating 110V, 6.5kVA 8kW
Product ID 8.4001U / 8.4003U 8.4006
Component

Capacity 120 / 190 litres 100 litres

Weight (kg) 460 / 622 394
Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25 Houghto Safe SF25
Working Pressure 0-1500 psi 0-1500 psi

5.5.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

3500kN TYPE A SWIVEL ASSEMBLY

These swivels can be connected directly to concrete structures or the 406 UC Brace
systems by bolting on the associated clamp assemblies detailed on page 5.5.13.

Type A Type B

Product ID 9.704 9.310

Weight 264kg 320kg

400 Series Swivel

Knee Brace / Cross 22°- 65° 65°- 90°

Strut Operating Range
Axial SWL 3500kN 3500kN

500 x 600 x 30mm 600 x 600 x 40mm

Swivel Base Plate thk. (S355) thk. (S355)

Base Plate Hole Details 14 No. Φ32 holes 16 No. Φ32 holes

Pin Detail Φ90 (817M40 / EN24T) Φ90 (817M40 / EN24T)

3500kN TYPE B SWIVEL ASSEMBLY 1000 SERIES STRUT

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.5.9

 1000 SERIES ADAPTORS
1000 / 600 SERIES
TRANSITION

T700 3500kN
1000 / 600 600 / 400 SWIVEL TRANSITION
Product ID 9.800 9.604 8.605

Weight 475kg 352kg 80kg

14.6 thk. 400x400x16 SHS, 20mm thk.

Material tube, S355 S355 S355 plate

24 / 12No. grade 12No. grade 8.8

10No. M24x100 (min.)
Bolting 8.8 M24x100 (min.) M24x100 (min.)
countersunk bolts,
Transition

Details bolts c/w nuts and bolts c/w nuts and

nuts and washers
washers washers

Strut Adaptor 3500kN 3500kN 3500kN

SWL
Axial SWL 3500kN 3500kN 3500kN

Moment SWL 1125kNm 396kNm -

Joint Moment 1125 / 396kNm 396 / 277kNm -

SWL

600 / 400 SERIES T700 SWIVEL TRANSITION PLATE

TRANSITION
600
1000 SERIES STRUT

20
820

5.5.10 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

1000 SERIES RECOMMENDED EXTENSION COMBINATIONS

N.B. Single 0.25m or 0.5m 400 Series extensions should be added to these combinations for
intermediate dimensions. The strut assemblies are shown at mid-stroke, so each length can vary 1000 SERIES STRUT
by up to 400mm in either direction. The above strut combinations use the 1000 Series extensions.

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.5.11

 2500kN Hydraulic 3500kN Hydraulic
Min. Max. Approx. Min. Max. Approx.
Length Length Leg Weight Length Length Leg Weight

(mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (mm) (kg)

16 16395 17195 8220 15940 16540 8352

17 17395 18195 8595 16940 17540 8727
18 18395 19195 8970 17940 18540 9102
19 19395 20195 9340 18940 19540 9472
20 20395 21195 9710 19940 20540 9842
21 21395 22195 10325 20940 21540 10457
22 22395 23195 10700 21940 22540 10832
23 23395 24195 11075 22940 23540 11207
24 24395 25195 11450 23940 24540 11582
25 25395 26195 11820 24940 25540 11952
26 26395 27195 12220 25940 26540 12352
27 27395 28195 12595 26940 27540 12727
Face to Face Dimension (m)

28 28395 29195 12970 27940 28540 13102

29 29395 30195 13340 28940 29540 13472
30 30395 31195 13710 29940 30540 13842
31 31395 32195 14115 30940 31540 14247
32 32395 33195 14490 31940 32540 14622
33 33395 34195 14860 32940 33540 14992
34 34395 35195 15450 33940 34540 15582
35 35395 36195 15820 34940 35540 15952
36 36395 37195 16010 35940 36540 16142
37 37395 38195 16595 36940 37540 16727
1000 SERIES STRUT

38 38395 39195 16970 37940 38540 17102

39 39395 40195 17340 38940 39540 17472
40 40395 41195 17710 39940 40540 17842
41 41395 42195 18115 40940 41540 18247
42 42395 43195 18490 41940 42540 18622
43 43395 44195 18860 42940 43540 18992
44 44395 45195 19445 43940 44540 19577
45 45395 46195 19820 44940 45540 19952

Clear unsupported spans of up to 55.0m possible using MGF Super 1000 Series, please contact
MGF Design for further details.

5.5.12 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

3500kN SWIVEL CLAMPING
PLATES TYPE A

Swivel Clamp Type A is to be used on

3500kN Swivel Type A, when used on a
knee brace connected to 406 UC.

Modular T700 3500kN

Swivel Clamp Swivel Clamp Swivel Swivel Transition
Type A Type B Cleat Clamp

Product
8.40016 8.40017 9.809 8.613
ID
Weight 46kg 54kg 53kg 35kg

30mm & 40mm 30mm & 40mm 40mm thk. 40mm thk.
Component

Material thk. flat, thk. flat, 600 flat, 600 long, flat, 600 long,
500 long, S275 long, S275 S275 S275
8No. grade 8.8 10No. grade 8.8 5No. M30x120 5No. M30x140
Bolting M30x140 (min.) M30x150 (min.) (min.) grade 8.8 (min.) grade 8.8
Details bolts c/w nuts bolts c/w nuts bolts c/w nuts bolts c/w nuts
and washers and washers and washers and washers

Bearing
3500kN 3500kN 570kN 3500kN
SWL

3500kN SWIVEL TYPE A & B -

MODULAR SWIVEL CLEAT

The Modular Swivel Cleat is compatible with

the 3500kN Swivels, Type A & B. They simply 1000 SERIES STRUT
bolt onto the swivel base plate to allow bracing
struts to cleat onto concrete capping beams or
thrust blocks without anchoring into the concrete.
Suitable for use at angles between 0°-22°.

0º to 22º

CONTACT US [email protected] 5.5.13

 3500kN SWIVEL CLAMPING T700 3500kN SWIVEL
PLATES TYPE B TRANSITION CLAMP

Swivel Clamp Type B is to be used on The T700 3500kN swivel transition clamps
3500kN Swivel Type B when used as a are used to connect the T700 3500kN swivel
cross strut connected to 406 UC. transition plate to T700 extension bars.
1000 SERIES STRUT

TYPICAL BASEMENT
WALL APPLICATION

Typical bearing detail on RC corbel.

5.5.14 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

1000 Series Strut
LARGEST FULLY OWNED
SHORING TRANSPORT
FLEET IN THE UK
We operate our own transport fleet yielding logistical control of our operations
and flexibility to respond rapidly to meet customer delivery requirements.
• A fleet of commercial vehicles
• Operating from strategically placed locations
• FORS silver accredited across the entire business
• Full logistical control
• Maximum flexibility
TRENCH SHEETS,
SHEET PILES
AND ANCILLARIES

ANCILLARIES: 6.6
DRIVING CAPS
QUICK RELEASE
TRENCH SHEETS 6.1 PITCHING SHACKLES
SHEET PILES 6.2 EXTRACTORS
WALER AND TIE BACK SYSTEM 6.3 DRIVESAFE
TRENCH STRUTS 6.4 PILING HAMMERS (EMVS) 6.7
TELESCOPIC / ACROW PROPS 6.5 AUGER 6.8
Trench sheets used in combination
with the MGF Tie Back and Waler
system to retain canal banks
MGF TRENCH SHEETS ARE AVAILABLE IN A WIDE RANGE OF PROFILES AND
LENGTHS AND ARE GENERALLY SPECIFIED TO SUPPORT THE VERTICAL
FACES OF MOST SMALL TO MEDIUM SIZED TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS
BETWEEN 1M AND 9M IN DEPTH.
The sheets are primarily designed to be handled and installed by excavators using the bucket
to drive the sheets vertically into the ground and are fully compatible with the complete
MGF shoring range. The sheets are manufactured in the UK by MGF in a variety of steel
grades to BS EN 10249 Part 1. The range includes both lapped and interlocking systems.
Handling holes are provided as standard at one end of the sheet, all MGF FLP, ER, KKD and
FKD trench sheets are supplied with 2 handling holes at the top of the sheet. Extra handling
holes can be provided upon request. MGF design and specify the sheets in accordance with
BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible stress
design of falsework and the Piling Handbook 9th Edition (revised 2016) by Arcelor Mittal.
MGF can supply the sheets with a range of compatible driving caps, Drivesafe quick hitch
driving caps, lifting chains, Quick Release Shackles, extractors, Edgesafe edge protection
panels, Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or wooden pole ladders and Davitsafe
retrieval / fall arrest systems.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Trench sheets should only be installed and removed by a person with the relevant
skills and experience using excavators specified to suit the size of trench sheet and the
anticipated ground conditions / site constraints.
2. Trench sheets are heavy and difficult to handle / pitch on site and these operations
should only be carried out by experienced banksmen. Always ensure that the sheets
are not lifted over personnel and that the trailing ropes on Quick Release Shackles
cannot snag. Great care should be taken to avoid trapping fingers whilst pitching the
sheets. Additional care must be taken in windy conditions when it is recommended that
at least 2 persons are used to pitch the sheets.
3. MGF strongly recommend that a driving cap is always used to prevent unnecessary
damage to the tops of the trench sheet when being driven into the ground using the
excavator bucket.
4. When stacking sheets on site it is recommended that they are placed in bundles of no
more than 6 sheets and staggered on timber spacers to allow for ease of handling and
to minimise the risk of trapping hands / fingers.
5. Other sheet lengths, profiles and grades are available upon
request. MGF can also provide sheets for sale with a galvanised
finish.
6. In order to assist installation MGF can supply guide walings and
TRENCH SHEETS
piling frames. For availability and details contact MGF direct.
7. Trench sheets must only be removed using MGF extractors.
Use of a Quick Release Shackle for extraction will lead to
damage of the spring mechanism.
8. MGF offer a complete re-roll and refurbishment
facility for damaged trench sheets.
9. MGF interlocking trench sheets can provide
limited protection against groundwater ingress
and should always be used with caution where
high water flows are anticipated.
10. Trench sheets are generally not recommended
for cantilevered designs as deflections can be
a significant issue.

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.1.1

 LAPPED SHEETS

STANDARD

3.5
34.5
Product ID: 3.10
Available lengths:
2m-4m
330

FKD 400/6
50
Product ID: 3.2

6
Available lengths:
2m-6m
400

KKD 600/6
Product ID: 3.3
78

Available lengths:
3m-7m
600

KKD 600/8
Product ID: 3.4
80

Available lengths:
4m-8m
TRENCH SHEETS

600

ER 750/8
Product ID: 3.7
94

Available lengths:
4m-9m
742

6.1.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Material Max. Section Moment Weight Weight
Sheet Type Grade SWL Modulus of Inertia per m per m2
(kNm/m) (cm3/m) (cm4/m) (kg/m) (kg/m2)

STANDARD S275 JRC 9.3 45.7 84.8 11.3 34.4

FKD 400/6 S275 JRC 19.8 98.8 250.1 22.1 55.3
KKD 600/6 S275 JRC 36.8 184 717.5 37.5 62.5
KKD 600/8 S275 JRC 48.4 242 947 50 83.3
ER 750/8 S355 J0C 66.0 254 1197.2 53.6 72.2
L8 S275 JRC 10.7 52.3 98.15 14.4 33.2
FLP 600/3.5 S275 JRC 33.5 183 1215.1 23.1 38.5
FLP 600/6 S275 JRC 61.2 306 2067.2 38.8 64.6

Max. SWL based on temporary works allowable stresses.

INTERLOCKING SHEETS

L8
Product ID: 3.9
37.5

3.5

Available lengths:
SALE ONLY
430

FLP 600/3.5
127.5

Product ID: 3.8

3.5

Available lengths:
SALE ONLY
600
TRENCH SHEETS

FLP 600/6
130

Product ID: 3.5

Available lengths:
4m-7m
600

All MGF FLP, ER, KKD and FKD trench sheets are supplied with 2 handling holes at the
top of the sheet. Extra handling holes to any sheet can be provided upon request.

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.1.3

EXPORT
OPPORTUNITIES
AVAILABLE
MGF have developed a solid reputation and are recognised as market leaders in the design,
manufacture and provision of modular and bespoke excavation support systems.
We have been exporting products and services internationally for over 25 years from trench
sheets and trench boxes through to hydraulic bracings and struts; establishing ourselves as
trusted exporters.

CONTACT OUR EXPORTS TEAM FOR MORE INFORMATION:

[email protected] 08083 028 832

MGF INTERLOCKING STEEL SHEET PILES ARE A HIGH STRENGTH SHEETING
SYSTEM GENERALLY SPECIFIED TO SUPPORT THE VERTICAL FACES OF
LARGE EXCAVATIONS BETWEEN 4M AND 13M IN DEPTH.
The piles are fully compatible with the MGF shoring product range. Interlocking piles
should be specified to help reduce ground water ingress. Additional design checks are
required to determine a suitable toe length. They are installed using specialist equipment
such as impact hammers, vibrating pile drivers or hydraulic presses (subject to suitability
of the equipment for driving the piles into the anticipated ground conditions). The piles
are sourced in 0.5m increments of length from major EU steel mills in grade S390 (BS EN
10248 Part 1). Handling holes are provided as standard at one end of the sheet. MGF design
and specify the piles in accordance with BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary
works procedures and the permissible stress design of falsework and the Piling Handbook
9th Edition (revised 2016) by Arcelor Mittal.
MGF can supply the piles with a range of compatible lifting chains, Quick Release Shackles,
extractors, Edgesafe edge protection panels, Laddersafe access platforms and GRP or
wooden pole ladders and Davitsafe retrieval / fall arrest systems.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Interlocking steel sheet piles should only be specified, installed and removed by a
person with the relevant skills and experience using specialist equipment selected to
suit the size of sheet pile and the anticipated ground conditions / site constraints.
2. Sheet piles are heavy and difficult to handle / pitch on site and these operations should
only be carried out by experienced banksmen. Always ensure that the excavator has
sufficient reach to safely lift the sheets, the piles are not lifted over
personnel and that the trailing ropes on Quick Release Shackles
cannot snag. Great care should be taken to avoid trapping fingers
whilst pitching the piles. Additional care must be taken in windy
conditions when it is recommended that at least 2 persons are
used to pitch the piles.
3. A range of corner piles are available when groundwater is
anticipated to maintain full interlocks along the perimeter
of cofferdam structures. Waterproof clutch sealants
can be supplied by MGF to provide additional water
tightness.
4. For cantilevered sheet pile wall designs a suitable
Site Investigation must be provided with a location
plan of the SI in relation to the proposed works.
5. When stacking piles on site it is recommended
that they are placed in bundles of no more than
6 sheets and staggered on timber spacers to
allow for ease of handling and to minimise
SHEET PILES

the risk of trapping hands / fingers.

6. Other pile lengths, profiles and grades
are available upon request.
7. Sheet piles must only be removed
using MGF extractors. Use of a Quick
Release Shackle for extraction
will lead to damage of the spring
mechanism.

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.2.1

 Max. SWL

of Inertia
Modulus

Modulus

Moment
Material

Coating
Area **
Section

Section

Weight

Weight
Plastic
Elastic

per m2
per m
Grade

Part 5
Sheet

Class
Type

EC3:
Temporary

(kNm/m) (cm3/m) (cm³/m) (cm4/m) (kg/m) (kg/m2) (m²/m)

223.3 770 12010 1.51

GU8N S390 GP 935 48.5 80.9 3
(108.8) (375) (4033) (0.76)
368.3 1270 26590 1.69
GU13N S390 GP 1535 59.9 99.8 2
(190.8) (658) (9066) (0.85)
484.3 1670 35950 1.72
GU16N S390 GP 1988 72.6 121.0 2
(229.7) (792) (11600) (0.87)
597.4 2060 46380 1.79
GU21N S390 GP 2422 81.9 136.5 2
(258.7) (892) (14100) (0.90)
677.2 2335 52510 1.79
GU23N S390 GP 2735 90.4 150.7 2
(268.3) (925) (15033) (0.90)
774.2 2680 60580 1.85
PU28-1* S390 GP 3087 97.4 162.3 2
(278.4) (960) (16233) (0.93)
904.2 3130 70770 1.83
PU32-0.5 S390 GP 3607 112 186.7 2
(286.0) (990.0) (17062.9) (0.92)

N.B. Values in brackets apply to a single pile/m, i.e. unclutched.

Sheet pile design based on permissible stress design should be based on the elastic section modulus.
* PU28-1 Sheet Pile also known as GU27N. ** 1 side, excluding inside of interlocks.

600

GU8N
Product ID: 3.11
SALE ONLY
Recommended for easy
312

driving conditions.
7.5

1200

600

GU13N
Product ID: 3.12
Available minimum
lengths: 4.5m
418

Recommended for easy to

9.0

normal driving conditions.

1200
SHEET PILES

600

GU16N
Product ID: 3.13
Available minimum
lengths: 6.0m
430

10.2

Recommended for normal

driving conditions.
1200

6.2.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 N.B. Choice of a sheet profile is normally governed by driveability considerations.

600

GU21N
Product ID: 3.14
Available minimum
lengths: 7.0m

450

11.1
Recommended for normal
to hard driving conditions.
1200

600

GU23N
Product ID: 3.19
SALE ONLY
450

Recommended for hard

13.1

driving conditions.

1200

600

PU28-1*
Product ID: 3.15
SALE ONLY
452

Recommended for hard

14.2

driving conditions.

1200

600

PU32-0.5
Product ID: 3.17
SHEET PILES

SALE ONLY
452

Recommended for hard

19.0

driving conditions.

1200

Further sheet lengths can be supplied. Please contact MGF for details.

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.2.3

 Ø40

150 150
5º
Ø40

INTERLOCK DETAIL
All MGF Sheet Piles are supplied with 2 40mm diameter The interlock allows
handling holes at the top of the sheet, compatible with for up to 5° horizontal
MGF 6t Pitching Shackles and Extractors. deviation between each
successive sheet.

CORNER PILES
BS20 / C14
The BS20 Corner Pile is suitable for 90°
internal corners and is compatible with all the
MGF pile profiles.
Angle = 90° 0º

9
BS20 / C14
Mass per Metre = 14.4kg/m

OMEGA
The Omega Corner Pile is suitable for 90° to
135° internal corners and is compatible with all
the MGF pile profiles. 90º
13
Angle = 90° - 135° 5º
-
Omega
Mass per Metre = 18.0kg/m

E22 / C9
The E22 / C9 Corner Pile is suitable for 90°
internal corners and is compatible with all the
MGF pile profiles. The Corner Pile is welded
to the pan of an interlocked pile to give added 0º
flexibility for interlocking sheet frames.
9

E22 / C9
Angle = 90°
Mass per Metre = 9.3kg/m
SHEET PILES

E20 XL
The E20 XL Corner Pile is suitable for 60° to
150° internal corners and is compatible with
all the MGF pile profiles.
60º

-1
Angle = 60° - 150° 50º
E20 XL
Mass per Metre = 11.7kg/m

MGF CAD blocks are available to assist with sizing of interlocked

cofferdams utilising various combinations of corner piles.

6.2.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

600 Series Bracing Struts
IN HOUSE TEMPORARY
WORKS DESIGN
AND ENGINEERING
Based at our engineering centre, our team of highly qualified civil,
structural and mechanical engineers provide a comprehensive,
temporary works design service in support of the hire and sale of our
products.
Producing over 4000 temporary works designs per year, this capability
is further enhanced through our team of regionally based engineers
who provide both a design service and customer support.

CONTACT OUR ENGINEERING CENTRE FOR MORE INFORMATION:

[email protected] 08083 028 832

For technical information about our products and services

view our latest technical file: mgf.co.uk/brochures
AN ANCHORED RETAINING SYSTEM DESIGNED FOR THE BANKSIDE
PROTECTION OF CANALS, RIVERS AND MARINAS. THE SYSTEM COMPRISES
LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL WALER RAILS, STEEL TIE BACK RODS AND STEEL
INTERLOCKING L8 TRENCH SHEETS.
The Tie Back Waler rail is manufactured out of 3mm
thick S275 steel and available in lengths of 4.0m. The
rails feature a swagged end section for overlapping
and connecting rails together and to the interlocked
L8 sheets. When Tie Back Walers are connected the
effective width is 3.88m. The interlocking L8 sheets
are available in lengths of up to 3.5m, while the
anchor sheets are generally up to 1.0m long. The
Tie Back Waler Rails are supplied fully galvanised
to BS729, L8 sheets can be supplied galvanised on
request. The 20mm tie back rods are supplied in
either 1.8m or 2.4m lengths and come with threaded
ends for connecting the Tie Back Waler Rail to
anchored L8 sheets using M20 nuts and washers, all
fittings are supplied zinc plated.
Each Tie Back Waler rail feature 4 25x60mm slotted
holes for either connecting the rail to the retaining
sheet using M20 bolts, nuts and washers, or for connecting the tie back rod between the
waler rail and the anchored sheet. The centres between the tie back anchors will vary
depending on load / ground conditions, usually every 2-3 slotted holes on the waler.

WALER AND TIE BACK SYSTEM

Moment
Effective of Section Sectional Steel
Width Weight Thickness Inertia Modulus Area Grade

(mm) (kg/m) (mm) (cm⁴) (cm³) (cm2)

Interlocking
430 14.4 3.5 42.84 22.8 18.5 S275
L8 Sheet
Item

Tie Back
3888 5.4 3.0 8.4 4.3 6.8 S275
Waler Rail

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.3.1

AWARD-WINNING
DIGITALLY ANIMATED
INSTALLATION GUIDES
Created specifically to assist our customers with the safe installation of our products,
MGF’s award-winning digitally animated guides are available to view online.

Visit: mgf.co.uk
ROBUST, STEEL STRUTS IDEAL FOR SMALL TRENCH APPLICATIONS
AVAILABLE IN SIZES RANGING FROM 0.3M TO 1.7M. TRENCH STRUTS ARE
DESIGNED FOR HORIZONTAL USE.
Manufactured out of steel 60.3mm and 48.3mm tubes the struts are roughly adjusted using
pins and fine adjustment is achieved with a screw thread. The 75mm x 75mm x 6mm thick
strut end plates feature two nail holes and are spiked to support and grip the trench lining.
MGF Trench Struts are manufactured to BS4074:2000 Specification for Steel Trench Struts.

Strut Type Min. Length Max. Length Weight

(mm) (mm) (kg)

9.600 0 300 500 4.6

Product ID

9.601 1 500 700 6

9.602 2 700 1100 8
9.603 3 1000 1700 11

TRENCH STRUTS

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.4.1

HEALTH AND SAFETY
MGF place health and safety at the forefront of everything we do and
are committed to the promotion of best practice in the industry.
To help assist our customers in creating safe working
environments we can provide equipment demonstrations,
training sessions and toolbox talks.

FOR MORE INFORMATION CONTACT:

[email protected]
ROBUST, STEEL PROPS FOR GENERAL APPLICATIONS AVAILABLE IN SIZES
RANGING FROM 1.0M TO 4.9M. THEY ARE GENERALLY DESIGNED FOR
VERTICAL USE.
Manufactured out of steel 60.3mm and 48.3mm tubes the props are roughly adjusted using
pins and fine adjustment is achieved with a screw thread.
MGF Telescopic Acrow Props are manufactured to BS EN 1065:1999 Adjustable Telescopic
steel props.

Strut Type Min. Length Max. Length Weight

(mm) (mm) (kg)

9.500 0 1000 1800 11

9.501 1 1800 3100 16
Product ID

9.502 2 2000 3300 18

9.503 3 2600 3900 20
9.504 4 3200 4900 24

TELESCOPIC / ACROW PROPS

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.5.1

Piling Hammer (EMV)
DRIVING CAPS

Suitable
Standard

Component
Sheets
Product ID 2.301

Weight 11kg

Suitable
FKD 400/6 MGF have a complete range of
Component
Sheets
driving caps to suit individual trench
Product ID 2.302 sheet profiles. Great care must be
taken when locating the driving
Weight 14kg
cap on top of a sheet to ensure that
the operation is safe and the cap
Suitable KKD 600/6 is fitted securely and cannot be
Component

Sheets KKD 600/8 dislodged / fall onto personnel.

Product ID 2.303

Weight 23kg

Suitable FLP 600/3.5

Component

Sheets FLP 600/6

Product ID 2.304
Suitable Sheets L8
Component

Weight 39kg
Product ID 2.305

Weight 15kg
QUICK RELEASE PITCHING SHACKLES

MGF manufacture and supply 2t, 3t and 6t Quick Release Pitching Shackles (QRSs) for the
safe and efficient handling and pitching of MGF trench sheets and sheet piles. MGF QRSs
are supplied with rope lines to allow the release of piles / sheets once pitched. All MGF
pitching shackles feature a simple safety mechanism that prevents the accidental release
of the shackle in the event the rope snags. A short length of chain is attached from the lever
arm of the shackle to a metal ring, to which the nylon rope line is attached. When this is in
use it ensures that the rope cannot snag and release the mechanism. QRSs should always
be inspected for damage prior to each use - especially the spring mechanism, which can be
easily damaged by use as an extractor (for which they are not designed). They must not be
violently shaken or snatched prior to lifting piles always ensure pin is fully engaged.

Product ID 2.102 2.106

ANCILLARIES

SWL (t) 2 6
Jaw Width (mm) 20 20
Component

Jaw Depth (mm) 220 220

Pin Diameter (mm) 20 35
Weight (kg) 22 26
BS / L8 / KKD / ER /
Suitable Sheets
FKD FLP / PU / GU

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.6.1

 EXTRACTORS

MGF manufacture and supply 2t and 6t SWL pile extractors for the safe removal of MGF trench
sheets and sheet piles. Extractors should always be inspected for damage prior to each use.
Prior to extraction ensure that the pin is located in the pile / sheet handling hole with an r-clip
attached, and fully locked to prevent accidental release during extraction. Extractors are
designed to cope with large extraction forces but must not be violently shaken or snatched.

Product ID 2.403 2.406

SWL (t) 2 6
Jaw Width (mm) 20 20
Component

Jaw Depth (mm) 220 220

Pin Diameter (mm) 20 38
Weight (kg) 23 27
BS / L8 KKD / ER /
Suitable Sheets / FKD FLP / PU / GU

DRIVESAFE

MGF Drivesafe is an excavator attachment designed to be used for the safe and
ANCILLARIES

efficient driving of trench sheets using the push and dig method. Compatible with a
range of excavators, ranging in capacity from 13t to 25t, the Drivesafe units can be
quickly attached to the excavator boom using the quick hitch mechanism. The Drivesafe
unit is an alternative to using a Driving Cap, and avoids the need for working at height.
The sheets are pitched, as normal, using an MGF Quick Release Pitching Shackle. Once
the sheet is pitched then the Drivesafe should apply slow, steady pressure to the top of
the sheet to drive it into the ground. The guide plates on the underside of the unit are
there to re-align the sheet if needed. Before use, ensure the Drivesafe is compatible
with the quick hitch bracket on which it is to be used (see 6.6.3).

6.6.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Product Geith Quick Miller Quick Hill TEFRA
ID Weight Coupler Coupler Quick Coupler

(kg)

QC65H,
65mm 2.500 100 Range 4 Tefra 13t
QH65M
Drivesafe
Type

Tefra 16t,
QC80H, Range 5,
80mm 2.501 126 Tefra 21t,
QH80M Range 6
Tefra 25t

ANCILLARIES

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF DRIVESAFE

mgf.co.uk/products/drivesafe

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.6.3

Piling Hammer (EMV)
MGF’S PILING HAMMERS ARE EXCAVATOR ATTACHMENTS THAT USE
VIBRATIONS TO DRIVE TRENCH SHEETS AND SHEET PILES INTO THE GROUND
BY CLAMPING DIRECTLY ONTO THE PAN OF THE SHEET AND ARE GENERALLY
USED WITH THE PRE-DRIVE SHEET INSTALLATION METHOD. THE PRE-DRIVE
METHOD IS THE SAFEST AND MOST ACCURATE METHOD OF INSTALLING
SHEETS WITH LITTLE RISK OF THE SHEETS KICKING IN DURING EXCAVATION.
PILING HAMMERS OPERATE BY REDUCING THE COHESION OF SOILS
THROUGH VIBRATIONS, WHICH EFFECTIVELY LIQUIFIES THE SOIL, MAKING IT
SAFER, EASIER AND QUICKER TO INSTALL TRENCH SHEETS OR SHEET PILES.
MGF piling hammers can connect to excavator quick hitches with the use of an MGF quick
hitch connector. There are 7 different types of quick hitch connector. From 40mm pins to
100mm pins. Alternatively, the piling hammers can be manually connected to the excavator
dipper arm. All clamps can be rotated 90 degrees to allow face working. The piling
hammers connect to the excavator hydraulics using a simple mounting with 3 hoses.
MGF piling hammers are suitable for 6t to 50t excavators and sheet lengths between 3.0m
and 7.0m. The hammers are recommended for use with dense granular or soft cohesive
ground types. Please contact MGF for further details. A detailed user guide for MGF piling
hammers is available on our website.

PILING HAMMERS (EMVS)

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Operators should familiarise themselves with the Safe System of Work guidance
available on MGF’s website mgf.co.uk.
2. The choice of sheet is usually dictated by the stresses imposed through driving the
sheets, over those produced by the lateral earth pressure alone.
3. All bolt and connections should be checked before every use as the vibrations can
cause them to become loose.
4. Due to the vibrations generated special care should be taken when using this
installation method near any structures.
5. Ensure adequate PPE is worn at all times. Operatives must not work underneath any
suspended loads and loads must never be lifted over operatives.
6. The piling hammer comes with a safety chain and chain clamp, that should the piling
hammer clamp release, will stop the sheet from dropping.

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.7.1

 7. The push / pull forces in the table on page 6.7.3
must not be exceeded as this will damage the
elastomer / buffers.
8. Prior to use ensure a pre-hire checklist has
been completed and a site / task specific Risk
Assessment / Method Statement has been
prepared.
9. Ensure that lifting operations have been
appropriately planned prior to use.
10. Ensure that all associated equipment is of sound
condition, rated appropriately and is tested in
accordance with legislative requirements.
11. Ensure that Temporary Works Coordinators (TWC)
and Temporary Works Supervisors (TWS) have
been consulted prior to operations commencing.
12. If works are permanent, ensure a suitably
qualified engineer has been consulted prior to
operations commencing.
13. Ensure competent operatives are appointed to fit piling hammers to excavators prior to
operations commencing.
14. Ensure competent operatives and supervisors are appointed to operate and assist in
the operation of piling hammers prior to operations commencing.
15. Ensure control measures are in place for the protection of operatives, third parties,
plant and structures in the proximity of operations prior to them commencing.
16. Piling hammers should only be operated on firm level ground.
17. Ensure any overhead cable hazards and associated risks are identified and controlled.
18. Ensure that regular checks are carried out to ensure that hazards are controlled and
the equipment is in good working order.
19. Ground vibrations may lead to substantial nuisance or hazard to the adjoining areas.
20. Improper use of the vibrator can lead to dangerous situations.
21. Only operate the piling hammer if you are suitably qualified and competent to do so.
22. Complete all the required weekly, daily and pre-use checks – report any defects.
23. Ensure there is visual contact between the operator and the slinger / signaller (or
PILING HAMMERS (EMVS)

banksman) at all times ensure that no operatives are within the fall radius of the sheet
when it is in operation.
24. Monitor the piling operation constantly – interrupt the process immediately if there are
operational issues or any danger occurs.
25. Follow the agreed (and briefed) safe system of work / RAMS.
26. Do not operate the piling hammer if anyone is in the exclusion zone do not enter the
exclusion zone if the piling hammer is being operated.
27. Do not use the piling hammer if it is faulty in any way.
28. Do not touch the piling hammer during the operating process (even when the excavator
is switched off) as it can become very hot.
29. It is advised that the piling hammer should be fitted by an MGF Service Engineer
making the necessary hose connections and checking for full functionality. The piling
hammer should only be operated by suitably trained personnel.
30. During operation it is essential that the piling hammer be kept vertical at all times.
31. MGF EMVs are only compatible with excavators that have bi-directional flow circuits
and require minimum flow and pressure figures to operate. MGF EMVs require drain
back to tank, if not present this can be fitted as an additional drain line by the fitter at
the start of the hire.

6.7.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

MGF PILING HAMMER DATA

MS-1 HFB MS-3 HFB MS-4 HFB

Centrifugal Force max. kN 90 296 374

Eccentric Moment max. kgm 0.7 3.0 4.2

Frequency max. Hz 56 50 47.5

Speed max. rpm 3360 3000 2850

Pulling Force max. kN 34 60 120

Push Down max. kN 34 40 80

Max. Power at Vibrator kW 60 70 100

Total Weight*
kg 350 830 1230
(Including clamping device)

Dyn. Weight*
Type

kg 230 585 940

(Including clamping device)

Amplitude mm 6.1 10.3 8.9

Oil Flow max.l/min 102 120 171

Length* L mm 722 1153 1216

Width* B mm 472 623 725

Height*
H mm 538 1175 1250
(Including clamping device)

Width at Throat T mm 230 260 340

Standard Clamping Device MS-U 12 MS-U 40 MS-U 60

Recommended Power Pack N/A MS-A 110V MS-A 110V

PILING HAMMERS (EMVS)

*Does not include quick hitch connector, universal head connector or carry frame.

Ground vibration monitors are available to monitor vibration levels during

use of MGF EMVs. Please contact MGF for further details.

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE

FOR MGF PILING HAMMER (EMV)

mgf.co.uk/products/piling-hammer-emv

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.7.3

 QUICK HITCH CONNECTORS

Piling Piling Hammer Hill Tefra

Hammer Quick Hitch Geith Quick Miller Quick Quick
Model Connector Pin Size Weight Coupler Coupler Coupler
(mm) (kg)

QC40H,
Tefra 3t,
QC40M, P Class,
Tefra 4t,
40-45 45 QC40MPL, R Class,
Tefra 5t,
QC45H, Range 1B,
Tefra 6t,
QC45M, Range 2A
3CX
QC45MPL
QC50H,
MS1 50-55 50 QC50M, Range 3 Tefra 7t,
QC55H, Tefra 8t
QC55M
QC60H,
60-65 72 QC60M, Range 4 Tefra 13t
QC65H,
QC65M
QC65H,
65 80.5 Range 4 Tefra 13t
QH65M
Tefra 16t,
QC80H, Range 5,
80 125.5 Tefra 21t,
QC80M Range 6
MS3 Tefra 25t
PILING HAMMERS (EMVS)

/ MS4 QC90H, Range 7,

90 247 Tefra 30t
QC90M Range 8
Range 8,
100 291 QC100H Tefra 35t
Range 9

MGF Quick Hitch Connectors are compatible with more quick hitches than detailed above.
Please contact MGF to discuss further. Manual connectors are also available, should the
excavator not have a quick hitch.

CARRY FRAME DETAIL

The piling hammers will be delivered to site in a

self-contained carry frame. The carry frame weighs
between 120-300kg and features fork pockets and
dedicated lift points for ease of handling.

6.7.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

MGF’S AUGERS ARE EXCAVATOR ATTACHMENTS USED TO DRILL HOLES
INTO THE GROUND AND ARE OFTEN SPECIFIED WHEN HARD GROUND
CONDITIONS ARE ENCOUNTERED TO ASSIST THE DRIVING OF STEEL SHEET
PILES. THE MGF AUGER IS DESIGNED TO LOOSEN UP THE GROUND AHEAD OF
INSTALLING SHEET PILES USING THE MGF EMV.
MGF Augers are supplied within a cradle, which is designed to safely handle the Auger and
control it during use. The Auger cradle connects to excavator quick hitches via the user of
quick hitch bolted head plates. There are 4 different types of quick hitch bolted head plates,
ranging from 65mm to 100mm pins. MGF Augers are suitable for use with excavators
ranging in capacity from 13t to 45t.
They are supplied with 3.2m long drills, either 400mm or 600mm in diameter. These drills
are fully flighted to aid with removal of material from the ground. Telescopic extensions
are available to allow for maximum drilling depths of up to 5.4m, further rigid extensions
can be added on to these to achieve a maximum drilling depth of up to 9.0m (using the
Ø400 drill) and up to 8.0m (using the Ø600 drill). The drills are suitable for hard ground
conditions and rock. Please contact MGF for further details. A detailed user guide for MGF
Augers is available on our website.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Operators should familiarise themselves with
the Auger User Guide available on MGF’s website
mgf.co.uk.
2. Ensure a pre-hire checklist has been completed
and a site/task specific Risk assessment/Method
Statement has been prepared prior to use.
3. Ensure that Temporary Works Coordinators
(TWC) and Temporary Works Supervisors
(TWS) have been consulted prior to operations
commencing.
4. Ensure that lifting operations have been
appropriately planned prior to use.
5. Ensure that all associated equipment is of sound
condition, rated appropriately and is tested in
accordance with legislative requirements.
6. Adequate PPE must be worn at all times.
7. Operatives must not work underneath any suspended loads and loads must never be
lifted over operatives. It is recommended that exclusion zones are maintained whilst
the auger is operating.
8. All pinned / bolted connections should be checked before every use.
9. Ensure competent operatives are appointed to fit Augers / EMVs to excavators prior to
operations commencing.
10. Ensure competent operatives and supervisors are appointed to operate and assist in
the operation of Augers / EMVs prior to operations commencing.
11. Ensure control measures are in place for the protection of operatives, third parties,
plant and structures in the proximity of operations prior to them commencing.
12. Augers / EMVs should only be operated on stable ground.
AUGER

13. Ensure any overhead cable hazards and associated risks are identified and controlled.
14. Ensure that regular checks are carried out to ensure that hazards are controlled and
the equipment is in good working order.
15. Ground vibrations may lead to substantial nuisance or hazard to the adjoining areas.

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.8.1

 MGF AUGER DATA
35000 Max.
Oil Pressure Range Bar 180 - 310

Torque Range Nm 20510 - 35323

Oil Flow Range lpm 80 - 225*

Speed Range rpm 11 - 31

Hub Options mm 110 sq

Height mm 1411
Type

Width mm 406

Weight kg 442

Single Pin Hitch

Hitch Options
Double Pin Cradle Hitch

Auger Range PA

Rec. Drilling Diameter Range mm 300 - 1500

* Flow rates quoted are continuously, intermittent flow rates up to 225lpm allowed.

Ground vibration monitors are

available to monitor vibration levels
during use of MGF Augers. Please
contact MGF for further details.

Description Weight
(mm) (kg)

2.950 MGF Auger and Cradle 835

2.951 Auger Drill - Ø400, 3.2m long 320
Product ID
AUGER

2.952 Auger Drill - Ø600, 3.2m long 450

2.953 Auger Drill – 1.5m Telescopic Extension 180
2.954 Auger Drill – 2.0m Rigid Extension 160

6.8.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

MGF AUGER BOLTED HEAD –
QUICK COUPLER COMPATIBILITY

MGF Auger Geith Quick Miller Quick Hill TEFRA Quick

Bolted Head Pin Size Coupler Coupler Coupler
(mm)

65 QC65H, QH65M Range 4 Tefra 13t

80 QC80H, QH80M Range 5, Range 6 Tefra 16t, Tefra 21t,
Tefra 25t
90 QC90H, QH90M Range 7, Range 8 Tefra 30t
100 QC100H Range 8, Range 9 Tefra 35t

For other quick coupler manufacturers please contact MGF for further details.

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

AUGER

GUIDANCE FOR MGF AUGER

mgf.co.uk/products/auger

CONTACT US [email protected] 6.8.3

Auger
SHORING SAFETY
PRODUCTS

EDGESAFE 7.1
ENDSAFE PANELS 7.2
LADDERSAFE 7.3
STAIRSAFE 7.4
DAVITSAFE 7.5
GANGWAY RAMPS 7.6
ROAD PLATES 7.7
MGF ARE COMMITTED TO IMPROVING SITE SAFETY IN AND AROUND
EXCAVATIONS THROUGH INNOVATION. OUR RANGE OF EXCAVATION
SAFETY SYSTEMS BEAR TESTAMENT TO THIS COMMITMENT AND ARE
AVAILABLE FOR USE WITH THE COMPLETE RANGE OF MGF EXCAVATION
SUPPORT SYSTEMS.
These systems are manufactured by MGF to meet the requirements of the Work
at Height Regulations 2005, the Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations
(PUWER) 1998 and BS EN 13374 (2013) Temporary Edge Protection Systems.
MGF EDGESAFE SYSTEMS ARE LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL EDGE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS AVAILABLE IN A VARIETY OF SIZES WITH A RANGE OF FIXING CLAMPS
ALLOWING IT TO BE USED TO PROVIDE PERIMETER EDGE PROTECTION TO ANY
EXCAVATIONS EMPLOYING MGF EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS. THERE ARE 2
TYPES OF EDGESAFE PANELS, EDGESAFE AND EDGESAFE-MESH.
Edgesafe panels are manufactured from grade min. S235 hollow steelwork sections and plate.
Edgesafe-Mesh panels are manufactured from 5mm steel mesh and plate. Both systems are
designed to be installed by two persons directly onto MGF excavation support systems using
solid steel clamps with clamping bolts. These systems satisfy the requirements of BS EN 13374
(2013) Class A Temporary Edge Protection Systems and are suitable for site use where the
ground slopes up to a maximum of 10°. It is not suitable for use as a pedestrian barrier.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Ensure that the panels are not damaged and that the correct clamps are provided prior
to use.
2. Always install the system from a position of safety. If working from an unsupported
edge a full risk assessment should be carried out for the installation.
3. When Edgesafe panels are clamped check each panel cannot be lifted, slide or rotate.
N.B. Edgesafe panels can be flipped to allow tightening of clamping bolts from either
side (subject to a risk assessment).
4. Prior to installing Edgesafe-Mesh panels ensure the connecting clamp is fully secure
and cannot slide prior to installing the mesh panels.
5. Never lean over the panel or the edge of the excavation to adjust the clamps.
6. Always ensure that bolts are fully tightened and panels sit square and plumb with the
upper rail at a minimum 1.0m above ground level.
7. Avoid gaps in-between the panels that are greater than 120mm.
8. Always replace damaged panels.
9. Edgesafe and Edgesafe-Mesh panels should only be fitted to MGF excavation support
systems using the clamps specified. The customer must ensure that these support
systems are installed in accordance with MGF guidelines and are sufficiently robust and
stable to act as an effective edge protection support.
10. Take care when handling and storing on site as panels can be easily damaged. Always
stack on timbers and lift either by hand or using a fork lift.
11. Do not use panels to support ladders, services, equipment or materials.
12. Edgesafe-Mesh panels can be simply overlapped to create a constant run of edge
protection. Each connecting adaptor can be used with 2 overlapping Edgesafe-Mesh
panels. Cable ties can be used to secure panels together if desired. EDGESAFE

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.1.1

 Edgesafe panels can be attached to all MGF box panels, trench sheets and sheet piles.

The sheet clamp can secure The box clamp pins through the
anywhere along the panel. connection points on the panel.

Panel Type Panel Length Panel Height Weight*

(mm) (mm) (kg)

4.319 Edgesafe 500 1603 7

4.3195 Edgesafe 1000 1063 12
4.320 Edgesafe 2000 1063 22
Product ID

4.325 Edgesafe 2500 1063 27

4.330 Edgesafe 3000** 1063 31
4.335 Edgesafe 3500** 1063 37
4.346 Edgesafe-Mesh 2700 1120 26
4.347 Edgesafe-Mesh 1300 1120 13

*Panel only - excludes clamps.

** On larger panels consideration should be given to providing a third central clamp to reduce deflection -
particularly if there is a possibility of more than one person working immediately against the panel.

Edgesafe-Mesh panels can be attached to all MGF trench sheets and sheet piles.
EDGESAFE

The Edgesafe-Mesh sheet clamp can secure anywhere within the mesh panel.

7.1.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

EDGESAFE CONNECTING CLAMPS

60-110 THICK PANEL CONNECTOR CLAMP

Made from S275 steel and designed to be used on all 60-110mm
thick MGF boxes. The pin is used to connect the clamp to the
Edgesafe panel. The clamping screw and integrated spanner are
used to fix the clamp to the box panel.

Product ID Weight Jaw Gap

(kg) (mm)

4.314 9 55-121

SHEET CONNECTOR CLAMP

Made from S275 steel and designed to be used on all MGF
trench sheets and sheet piles. The top bolt is used to connect
the clamp to the Edgesafe panel. The bottom 2 bolts are used to
fix the clamp to the sheet.

Product ID Weight Jaw Gap

(kg) (mm)

4.318 5 0-35

60-110 THICK PANEL OFFSET

CONNECTOR CLAMP
Made from S275 steel and designed to be used on all
60-110mm thick MGF trench and manhole boxes, the
pin is used to connect the clamp to the Edgesafe panel.
The clamping screw and integrated spanner are used
to fix the clamp to the box panel. This bracket offsets
the Edgesafe panel by 300mm - allowing Edgesafe to
be installed whilst the box is being driven, ensure the
brackets are located such that they will not be struck
by the excavator bucket, as well as keeping operatives
EDGESAFE

away from the edge of the excavation.

Product ID Weight Jaw Gap

(kg) (mm)

4.313 12 55-121

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.1.3

 60-150 THICK PANEL OVERLAPPING
CONNECTOR CLAMP

Made from S275 steel and designed to be used on

all 60-150mm thick MGF trench boxes, manhole
boxes and drag boxes. The pin is used to connect the
clamp to the Edgesafe panel. The clamping screw
and integrated spanner are used to fix the clamp to
the box panel. The bracket allows Edgesafe panels to
overlap when installed on the box panel and extend
beyond the extents of the box by up to 1.0m (3.0m and
3.5m Edgesafe panels only).

Product ID Weight Jaw Gap

(kg) (mm)

4.311 10 55-155

EDGESAFE-MESH CONNECTING CLAMP

SHEET CONNECTOR CLAMP

Made from S275 steel and designed to be used on all MGF

trench sheets and sheet piles. The 2 bolts are used to fix the
clamp to the sheet. The Edgesafe-Mesh panels simply sleeve
over the tube and sit on the hook. Edgesafe-Mesh panels can
simply overlap by sharing sheet connector clamps.

Product ID Weight Jaw Gap

(kg) (mm)

4.3185 8 0-35
EDGESAFE

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF EDGESAFE

mgf.co.uk/products/edgesafe

7.1.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

MGF ENDSAFE PANELS ARE A SIMPLE, ROBUST EXCAVATION PANEL SYSTEM
DESIGNED TO SAFELY SUPPORT VERTICAL SOIL FACES AT THE OPEN ENDS
OF BOXES OR TRENCH EXCAVATIONS WHERE IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO BATTER
THE SOIL BACK. THEY ARE DESIGNED TO BE INSTALLED BY AN EXCAVATOR.
System is generally suitable for trench depths of up to 4.8m and widths of up to 4.0m.
Fabricated from fully welded Grade S355 120x60mm and 200x100mm steel box sections.
Panels can be connected together and stacked up to 2 high using simple clamps with
locking bolts and nuts.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable lifting chains and Edgesafe edge
protection panels.
Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN 13331 : 2002 Parts 1 and 2 Trench
lining systems and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and
the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Panels should only be used in the configurations shown on page 7.2.3 by competent
persons when specified for use with MGF excavation support systems.
2. Panels are heavy and great care must be taken in selecting a suitable excavator for
handling, installing and extracting. If stacking panels on site, timber packers must be
used to separate the panels.
3. Panels should not be left in-situ for extended periods within cohesive or very weak soils
as earth pressures / adhesion on the panel surfaces may increase significantly with
time requiring additional extraction forces to release them.
4. Always use MGF specified lifting chains when lifting and handling the boxes or
components.
5. Prior to every lifting operation all
lifting points must be carefully
inspected by a competent person for
evidence of damage.
6. During lifting or extraction operations
ensure personnel are well clear of the
equipment.
7. Customer must ensure that prior
to use checks are made confirming
that the installed panels each bear a
minimum 75mm onto the box panels
ENDSAFE PANELS
either side of the trench. In addition
the panels must be square and plumb
with soil packed evenly against the
back face to ensure the panels cannot
shift during the proposed works.
8. When installing Utility Endafe Panels
the hatch should always be on the
bottom face for service entry. If an
increased depth is required then
Utility Endsafe Panels should only ever
be attached to a similar sized standard
Endsafe Panel.

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.2.1

 CONNECTING CLAMPS

Each Endsafe panel has 2 lifting /

connecting points on each edge.
Panels can be connected by attaching
a connecting plate on each face of
each connecting point and bolting
through both plates using 2 No. M30
bolts and nuts. No more than 2 panels
should be connected in this manner -
using 4No connecting plates and 4No.
M30 bolts and nuts.

Description Weight Panel SWL Panel Thickness

(L x H) (kg) (kN/m2) (mm)

4.191 1800 x 1200 225 45 60

4.192 2400 x 1200 290 45 60
4.193 2400 x 1800 410 45 60
Product ID

4.194 3000 x 2000 510 45 60

4.196 2400 x 2400 380 45 60
4.195 4000 x 2000 845 45 100
4.1945 Utility Endsafe 3000 x 2000 512 45 60
4.1965 Utility Endsafe 2400 x 2400 453 45 60
4.1955 Utility Endsafe 4000 x 2000 840 45 100
ENDSAFE PANELS

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF

WORKS GUIDANCE FOR
MGF ENDSAFE PANELS

mgf.co.uk/products/endsafe

7.2.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

ENDSAFE PANEL ALLOWABLE CONFIGURATIONS
1.22m 1.22m 1.22m 1.22m 1.22m

1.80m
1.80m
1.80m

2.40m

2.40m
1.2M WIDE

3.60m

4.20m

4.80m
CONFIGURATIONS

1.80m

2.40m

2.40m
1.80m 1.82m 1.80m 1.82m
1.22m

1.22m 1.22m
2.40m

2.40m
2.44m
1.8M WIDE
CONFIGURATIONS

4.80m
2.40m
1.94m 2.02m

2.0M WIDE
3.00m

CONFIGURATIONS
4.00m

2.40m 2.40m 2.40m 2.40m

1.22m 1.22m
1.22m

1.82m

2.44m
2.42m

2.4M WIDE 2.40m 2.40m 2.40m 2.40m

CONFIGURATIONS
1.22m

1.22m

1.82m

2.42m
3.04m

3.64m

4.24m
1.82m

2.42m

4.84m
2.42m

2.42m

3.00m 3.00m
ENDSAFE PANELS
1.94m

1.94m

3.0M WIDE
3.88m

CONFIGURATIONS*
1.94m

4.00m 4.00m

4.0M WIDE
2.02m

2.02m

CONFIGURATIONS*
4.04m

2.02m

*The bottom panel in these assemblies can be substituted for a utility endsafe panel.

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.2.3

Davitsafe part of the shoring
safety product range
MGF LADDERSAFE IS A SIMPLE, ROBUST LADDER ACCESS PLATFORM FOR
USE WITH MGF EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS. THE SYSTEM IS AVAILABLE
IN A VARIETY OF FORMATS TO ALLOW IT TO QUICKLY AND EFFECTIVELY
CLAMP TO EITHER STEEL SHEETS / PILES OR STEEL BOX SYSTEMS
PROVIDING A SAFE ACCESS PLATFORM FOR ENTRY TO THE EXCAVATION VIA A
GRP OR WOODEN POLE LADDER.
The platforms are manufactured from grade S275 steel. The platform is designed to be
lifted into place by an excavator and solid steel clamps with clamping bolts are provided to
lock the system in position. MGF can supply GRP ladders or epoxy coated steel ladders for
hire, or timber one piece leaning rung ladders in a variety of lengths for sale only.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Ensure that the platforms and ladders are not damaged or distorted and that the
correct clamps are provided prior to use.
2. Always install the system from a position of safety. If working from an unsupported
edge a full risk assessment should be carried out for the installation. Once clamped
check platform cannot be lifted, slide or rotate.
3. Always ensure that bolts are fully tightened and panels sit square and plumb with the
upper rail at a minimum 1.0m above ground level.
4. Avoid gaps between the panels that are greater than 120mm.
5. Always replace damaged platforms.
6. Laddersafe should only be fitted to MGF excavation support systems using the clamps
specified. The customer must ensure that these support systems are installed in
accordance with MGF guidelines and are sufficiently robust and stable to act as an
effective edge protection support.
7. Always consult with MGF for suitability of the system for any specific installation. MGF
Laddersafe must not be clamped to trench sheets less than 6mm thick (Type 1, 2, 3
& Mini Laddersafe units) or piles in pure cantilever or cantilevering more than 1.5m
above a waler rail / brace or 0.5m above ground level. In addition it is essential that the
excavation support system (that the clamp is attached to) is installed robustly and fully
supported by the ground (no voids / weak ground present).
8. Take care when handling and
storing on site as the gate and rails
can be easily damaged. Always
stack on timbers and lift using the
lifting shackles provided.
9. The platform and ladder are to be
used by one person at a time and
each Laddersafe unit has a max.
SWL = 150kg.
10. Do not store plant and equipment
on the platform, support services
LADDERSAFE

or attempt to carry equipment

down the ladder.
11. Ensure the ladder is adequately
footed, securely lashed to the pole
rest and extends at least one rung
above the pole rest.
12. Ladders must be installed at a safe
angle of inclination between 65°
and 75°.

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.3.1

 TYPE 1 LADDERSAFE (TRENCH BOX / TRENCH SHEET)

The trench box / trench sheet laddersafe is

designed to fit onto all 60mm - 110mm thk.
MGF trench boxes and manhole boxes. It
can also be used on ER 750/8, FKD 400/6,
KKD 600/6 and KKD 600/8 Trench Sheets.
The overall width of the clamp is 1260mm.
This laddersafe unit also features slots for
platform extension units when used with
MGF bracing frames.

Product ID Clamp Jaw Gap Weight

(mm) (kg)

4.301 50 - 120 156

TYPE 2 LADDERSAFE (DRAG BOX)

The drag box laddersafe is designed to be installed on

the back end of the drag box (i.e. not the cutting edge
end). The cut out in the clamp fits around the rear
strut pocket. The overall width of the clamp is 870mm.

Product ID Clamp Jaw Gap Weight

(mm) (kg)

4.302 50 - 120 166

TYPE 3 LADDERSAFE
(INTERLOCKED SHEET PILES)
The Type 3 Laddersafe units are specifically designed
for use on heavy duty interlocked sheet piles. The
clamp uses 2 bolts to secure the Laddersafe onto 3
successive sheet pans. 4.303 is suitable for use on
sheet piles up to GU18N while 4.3035 is suitable for
LADDERSAFE

the entire range of sheet piles that MGF offer. Both

types are suitable for use with MGF Waler/Bracing
frames up to 406 UC Brace. The overall width of the
clamp is 1400mm.

Product ID Clamp Jaw Gap Weight

(mm) (kg)

4.303 / 4.3035 300 - 440 / 300 - 485 277 / 300

7.3.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 The Type 3 Laddersafe that is used with Stairsafe
TYPE 3 LADDERSAFE is suitable for use with all MGF GU and PU sheet
(STAIRSAFE) piles and is suitable for use with MGF Waler/Bracing
frames up to 406 UC Brace.
A 300x300mm SHS packing piece (product ID
= 4.30391) can be used in conjunction with this
Laddersafe to reduce the clamp jaw gap range to
0mm – 185mm. This packing piece simply bolts
within the Laddersafe clamp using M16 nuts and
bolts, allowing the platform to connect to 6mm+ thick
MGF trench sheets, to allow Stairsafe to be used with
steel trench sheets. In addition, the packing piece
enables the Laddersafe to connect to MGF 150mm
thick High Clearance Trench Box panels.
The system is also compatible with MGF Gangway
Ramps (see section 7.6).

Product ID Component Clamp Jaw Gap Weight

(mm) (kg)

4.3039 Type 3 Laddersafe for Stairsafe 300 - 485 330

POLE DETAILS

500mm / 750m
m

The pole is detachable to enable it to be used on either side of

the Laddersafe platform, depending on orientation of ladder.
Poles are available in 500mm and 750mm lengths.

PLATFORM EXTENSION
DETAILS

For use on Type 1 Laddersafe

LADDERSAFE

platforms when installed on

braced cofferdams. When using
the platform extension the 750mm
pole should always be supplied.
The 350mm platform extension
(weight = 25kg) slots into pockets
welded to the front of the clamps
and is secured in place using 2 No.
M16 set screws.

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.3.3

 MINI LADDERSAFE Smaller and lighter than Type 1, 2 & 3 Laddersafe
units, MGF’s Mini Laddersafe is suitable for smaller
excavations. Features include back levelling jacks,
for increased stability; integrated restraint bar for
additional safety whilst installing / removing the ladder
and a hinged flooring for ease of access to the clamping
bolts. The overall width of the clamp is 760mm.

It is suitable for use with all steel

trench sheets (MGF recommend
doubling up the sheets local to the
clamp when using BS sheets and
FKD 400/6 sheets) and all 60mm-
110mm thk. MGF box systems. It is
suitable for use with walers / brace
up to and including 203UC.

Product ID Clamp Jaw Gap Weight

(mm) (kg)

4.365 0 - 125 100

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF LADDERSAFE

mgf.co.uk/products/laddersafe

Standard Trench Sheets FKD 400/6 Trench Sheets

LADDERSAFE

KKD 600/6 & 600/8 Trench Sheets ER 750/8 Trench Sheets

L8 Trench Sheets FLP 600/3.5 & 600/6 Trench Sheets

7.3.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

MGF WALL BRIDGES

MGF Wall Bridges are robust, double sided,

steel ladder access platforms that have been
specifically designed for access over tall concrete
walls, in addition to interlocked sheet piles. They
feature infinitely adjustable clamping mechanisms
that allow them to clamp to any thickness
between 80mm and 650mm. The system features
removeable ladder poles, which can be installed
to suit. The platform can be accessed by 1 person
at a time and has a 150kg SWL. It is recommended
for use in conjunction with an MGF Extendable
Base Davit System (page 7.5.4).

Product ID Weight Useages Compatible with

(kg)

GRP/Epoxy Coated Steel/Wooden

Concrete Walls, Steel Box
4.390 355 Leaning Rung Ladders, Gangway
Panels (100mm+)
Ramps

Concrete Walls, Steel Box GRP/Epoxy Coated Steel/Wooden

4.391 400 Panels (100mm+), All MGF Leaning Rung Ladders, Gangway
Interlocked Sheet Piles Ramps and Stairsafe

LADDERSAFE

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.3.5

 MGF STAIRSAFE IS A COMPACT, LIGHTWEIGHT, SINGLE PERSON TEMPORARY
STAIR ACCESS SYSTEM FOR USE IN COFFERDAMS WHERE LADDER ACCESS IS
NOT ACCEPTABLE. A VARIETY OF MODULAR STAIR LENGTHS ARE AVAILABLE
WHICH CAN COMBINE AND ALLOW ANY HEIGHTS FROM 0.5M TO 7.7M TO BE
ACHIEVED.
The system is available in 3 Step, 9 Step, 12 Step and 18 Step components, and connect to
Trench Sheets or Sheet Piles using a Type 3 Laddersafe design. The top of the Stairsafe
connects to the Laddersafe platform via the supplied connectors. Stairsafe can also directly
connect to concrete using these connectors. If the Stairsafe is to connect to scaffolding
then the supplied connectors must be replaced with scaffold connectors. The system is
suitable for use by only 1 person at a time and has a 150kg SWL.
The weights of the fully assembled
stairs varies from 45kg to 820kg
(max. height including support
beam sections). The assembled
stairs have an angular range of
between 30° and 50°, the treads
are self-levelling. Individual stair
lengths are simply connected
together using nuts and bolts, no
more than 2 stair units should be
connected. The handrails simply
slot within sockets on the stairs and
connect together using nuts and
bolts. Both the stairs and handrails
can be separately flat packed for
ease of storage and transport.
Additional support for the stairs are required over certain heights, the 18 step stair
component comes with simple vertical support, while Stairsafe assemblies of 24 steps and
above require additional support beams to be connected underneath the stairs. Stairsafe
can be easily installed on embankments, when installed in this manner the minimum
angle can be less than 30° and as long as the stairs are evenly supported then there is no
maximum length, and no additional support is required.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. A minimum of two operatives are required to install the components and great care
must be taken to ensure that they carry out the work from a position of safety, avoiding
the need to reach out or lean over the excavation or be dragged over a vertical drop
by the components swinging outwards. At no point should any operatives be working
adjacent to an unsupported edge (in case edge collapses) nor should the stairs be
installed or removed whilst operatives are immediately below. It is recommended that
STAIRSAFE

a minimum 2.0m square, flat and stable area is provided at the base to allow for safe
installation.
2. It is recommended that the Trench Sheets or Sheet Piles the Stairsafe is to be attached
to are toed in at least 1.0m below formation level.
3. Installation is normally commenced by installing the MGF Laddersafe platform (refer to
section 7.3). The location should be carefully checked for suitability in use and sufficient
clear space for installation together with a secure and stable footing. Ensure that the

7.4.1 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Laddersafe platform and clamp are not damaged and that the correct Laddersafe has
been provided.
4. Mark the exact location where the Laddersafe will be installed and confirm the clamp
will fit as intended. If the Laddersafe is to be connected to a Trench Sheet then ensure
that a steel packing piece is provided to install within the Laddersafe clamp.
5. Once the platform is fully secure the stairs can be lifted into position (using suitable
chains attached to the lifting points) with the hook detail at the top of the stairs
hooking onto the Laddersafe flooring. The connectors provided at the top of the unit
must line up with the connectors on the Laddersafe platform, before being secured
using M14 set bolts.
6. Prior to use, visually inspect the stairs to ensure that the connectors are secured and
that there are no gaps in the platform / edge protection / stair handrail system. Also
ensure that there are no obstructions / trip hazards or other restrictions for the safe
use of the stairs.
7. Prior to assembling and installing the Stairsafe ensure the mechanisms / threads are
suitably lubricated.
8. The handrails can be installed within the Stairsafe prior to connecting to the
Laddersafe. The handrails can scissor during handling, take care of finger trap hazards
and always wear safety gloves when handling Stairsafe components.
9. Installation of the Stairsafe system should only take place after the excavation has been
bottomed-out and the formation is blinded to provide a firm, level landing surface for
the stairs and supporting components.
10. If the excavation depth requires 2 Stairsafe lengths to be connected this should be done
when the stairs are flat packed, slotting them together and securing using nuts and
bolts. The biggest Stairsafe should always be at the bottom of the assembly.
11. The Stairsafe assembly should be lifted flat using a 4-leg chain, to connect to the
Laddersafe prior to lowering so the bottom bears evenly on the ground.
12. It is recommended to use a guide rope attached to the top step to assist with
connecting the Stairsafe connectors to the Laddersafe connecting plates.
13. After the Stairsafe is installed the angle of the steps can be adjusted by pushing up on
the bottom of the handrail while applying pressure to the bottom step.
14. Ensure that the relevant supports are installed, as per the table on 7.4.3 – when using
the simple support ensure it is vertical, bearing on the ground and the wingnuts are
sufficiently tightened. When using support beams ensure the correct fittings are used
to connect together, and that they are fully tightened.
15. Ensure that only one person uses the stairs at a time and that the stairs do not sway,
vibrate or deflect excessively during use.
16. The installation must be checked by a competent person prior to use, ensure the
stair treads are horizontally aligned, and that all clamp/nuts and bolts are properly
tightened.
17. At regular intervals ensure stairs are visually inspected for evidence of damage /
distress, paying particular attention that the connection detail between the Stairsafe
and Laddersafe is fully tightened and that there are no gaps in the edge protection.
STAIRSAFE

18. Removal is a reverse of installation.

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.4.2

 Stairsafe Type 3
Laddersafe
(4.3039)

Simple Support
50º (on 18 step only)
30º-

Height
Range Additional Support
Assembled Weight

(m)
Beam Support
Total Steps

Product ID

End Middle Middle End

Support

Min. Max.
Simple

Section Section Section Section

4.387 4.388 4.388 4.387
(kg)

132kg 93kg 93kg 132kg

3 45 4.380 0.5 0.75 X X X X X

4.380
6 90 1.0 1.5 X X X X X
& 4.380

9 95 4.382 1.5 1.9 X X X X X

4.383 OR
112-
12 4.382 1.9 2.7 X X X X X
140
& 4.380

18 185 4.385 2.7 3.8 X X X X

4.385
21 230 3.8 4.6 X X X X
& 4.380
4.383 &
24 488 3.8 5.2 X X X
4.383
STAIRSAFE

4.385
27 544 4.6 5.8 X X X
& 4.382
4.383 &
30 654 4.6 6.4 X X
4.385
4.385 &
36 820 5.8 7.7 X
4.385

7.4.3 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 STAIRSAFE CONNECTION
DETAIL
MGF Stairsafe connects to a
compatible MGF Laddersafe using
M14x30 (min.) set bolts. Ensure
the bolts are fully tightened prior
to use. This connector detail
allows the Stairsafe assembly to
swivel to the desired angle.

Product ID Component Weight

(kg)

4.380 3 Step Stairs 45

4.382 9 Step Stairs 95
4.383 12 Step Stairs 112
4.385 18 Step Stairs 185
4.387 Beam Support - End Section 132
4.388 Beam Support - Middle Section 93

The Type 3 Laddersafe that is used with

Stairsafe is suitable for use with all MGF
interlocked Sheet Piles. The Stairsafe units
attach to connecting plates on the Laddersafe
flooring. The overall width of the clamp is
1400mm. The platform can also be used with
6mm+ thick MGF Trench Sheets when used in
conjunction with a steel packing piece.

Product ID Component Clamp Jaw Gap Weight

(mm) (kg)

4.3039 Type 3 Laddersafe for Stairsafe 300 - 485 330

STAIRSAFE

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF STAIRSAFE

mgf.ltd.uk/products/stairsafe

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.4.4

 MGF’S DAVITSAFE RANGE ARE LIGHTWEIGHT ALUMINIUM DAVIT SYSTEMS
IDEALLY SUITED FOR UTILITY WORKS, DESIGNED TO BE FITTED TO MGF STEEL
BOX SYSTEMS AND KKD & ER TRENCH SHEETS AS WELL AS INTERLOCKED
SHEET PILES. FULLY COMPLIANT WITH BS EN 795 CLASS B, THE LIGHTWEIGHT
ALUMINIUM DAVIT IS SUITABLE FOR USE WITH THE MGF RGA4 FALL ARREST
AND RECOVERY WINCH AND RGR7 RESCUE WINCH SYSTEMS. PORTX DAVIT IS
ALSO SUITABLE FOR USE WITH THE RGA4 AND RGR7 IN ADDITION WITH MGF
MATERIALS HANDLING WINCHES.
All MGF Davitsafe systems are provided as modular systems which can be broken down for ease
of transport and installation. The extendable arm on the Lightweight Aluminium Davit provides a
horizontal reach between 500mm – 735mm (19.5” – 29”), while the PortX Davit has a horizontal
reach of 800mm. Both systems are 2.0m tall when assembled.
The Davitsafe systems satisfy the requirements of the Confined Spaces Regulations (1997) in
providing a suitable means of rescue. In addition, it provides fall protection for personnel using
pole ladders to enter an excavation.
The MGF RGA4 fall arrest and recovery winch is rated to 140kg max. WLL in accordance with
BS EN 1496 and BS EN 360 and has a max. working length of 15m with a max. fall arrest load of
6kN. The MGF Lightweight Aluminium Davit system is rated to 135kg WLL under LOLER, and is
suitable for use with people only. The PortX Davit is rated to 140kg WLL when being used in fall
arrest and man-riding applications and rated to 315kg WLL when being used to handle materials
using MGF’s 30m materials handling winch.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Ensure that the davit arm and pillar are not damaged and that the correct clamps are
provided prior to use.
2. Always install the system from a position of safety. If working from an unsupported edge
a full risk assessment should be carried out for the installation. Once the clamp is fully
tightened check that the base cannot be lifted, slide or rotate.
3. Ensure that the pillar sits square and plumb with the winch at approx. 1.0m above ground level.
4. Always replace damaged davit arms, pillars, clamps, winches, pulleys and brackets.
5. MGF Davitsafe systems should only be fitted to MGF excavation support systems using the
clamps specified. The customer must ensure that these support systems are installed in
accordance with MGF guidelines and that the overall construction is
sufficiently robust and stable to support a davit.
6. Take care when handling and storing on site as system can be easily
damaged.
7. Always read installation and user instructions for the winch systems
provided prior to use.
8. Always consult with MGF for suitability of the system for any specific
installation. MGF Davitsafe systems must not be clamped to trench
sheets less than 6mm thick, trench sheets or piles in pure cantilever
or cantilevering more than 1.5m above a waler rail / brace or
0.5m above ground level. In addition, it is essential that
the excavation support system (that the clamp is
DAVITSAFE

attached to) is installed robustly and fully

supported by the ground (no
voids / weak ground
present).

7.5.1 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

9. MGF Davitsafe components and winches are inspected / tested at 6 monthly intervals as
specified by LOLER and rated for the loads given when used with MGF approved support
systems. However, the customer must thoroughly inspect the complete system as installed to
ensure that it is suitable for the use intended. It may be appropriate in certain circumstances
to load test the system in-situ for the WLL of the particular Davitsafe / application.
10. When using the fall arrest system always ensure that the davit arm pulley is located above
the ladder. The pillar can be rotated to ensure that the winch cable is free to run out and the
winch can be easily operated.
11. When MGF Davitsafe systems are used with a davit clamp
in fall arrest applications the davit arm must be positioned Davit Arm
perpendicular to what the clamp is affixed to (or within plus or Product ID: DAV-U-LW
minus 45°).
12. When using the rescue recovery winch locate the davit arm
pulley directly above the lift location. Ensure that the pillar is
rotated to a position so that the winch cable does not snag,
and the winch can be easily operated. Lift the person to above
ground level using the winch and lock the winch mechanism.
Using a rope either attached to the harness / stretcher or
to the top of the davit arm secure the person for swinging
out of the excavation. Slowly swing the davit arm out of the
excavation. Once safely located above ground, unlock the
winch mechanism, and lower the person to ground level using
the winch.
13. Always ensure that in the event of a recovery situation
sufficient area and clearance is available around
the davit for safe retrieval.
14. Always ensure davit operations are carried out
from a point of safety and rescuers do not stand Davit Pillar
on unsupported edges or put themselves at risk Product ID: DAV-L-LW
from falling in to the excavation.
15. To avoid side pull, lowering
and lifting should only be
carried out when the load MGF Fall Arrest and Recovery Winch Ridgegear
chain forms a straight RGA4 (or similar approved) with fixing bracket
and vertical line between
the load and lifting
attachment point.
Davit Clamp,
range = 0mm –
Lightweight 125mm
MGF Lightweight Aluminium Davit Weight
Product ID:
Aluminium Davit
(kg) DAV-CL-LW
system can be provided
with alternative fixings Davit Arm 12
to allow the system to
be used in situations Davit Pillar 8
where affixing to MGF
Davit Clamp 18
sheets or box panels is
not possible.
DAVITSAFE

Total 38

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE FOR

MGF LIGHTWEIGHT ALUMINIUM DAVIT SYSTEM

mgf.co.uk/products/lightweight-aluminium-davit-system

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.5.2

 MGF COUNTER BALANCE DAVIT SYSTEM
The MGF counter balance davit system consists of five individual lightweight components to
enable easy transportation and installation. The counter balance davit and RGA4 fall arrest
/ RGR 7 man-riding winches are connected to the free standing base.
The anchoring system includes a weight rack that uses counter balance / ballast weights to
provide support for a davit arm.
No floor penetration is required and the complete system is modular and can be assembled
in minutes providing a safe means of man-riding, fall arrest and rescue from height. The
MGF counter balance davit system is the ideal system for multiple entry points to various
confined spaces, or for when a permanent base plate cannot be mounted.
• MGF counter balance davit system is suited for work where connections to a modular
system are not available
• Independently adjustable legs for level or uneven ground
• 5 piece modular system allowing manual installation
• Complies with BS EN 795 Class B
• Extendable reach allowing between 500mm - 735mm (19.5” to 29”)
• 24 x 15kg weights provide 4:1 safety factor

Davitsafe Arm
Product ID: DAV-U-LW

Davitsafe Pillar
Product ID: DAV-L-LW

MGF Fall Arrest and Recovery

Winch Ridgegear RGA4 (or similar
approved) with fixing bracket
DAVITSAFE

24No. 15kg Weights Counterbalance Base

Product ID: DAV-ACC-00001 Product ID: DAVCB360

7.5.3 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

MGF EXTENDABLE BASE DAVIT SYSTEM
The MGF extendable base davit system is ideal for man-riding and retrieval in open
excavations, where a cantilever system is required. The davit comes in a modular system
which can be broken down for ease of transport and installation. The extra adjustable
universal base clamp allows the davit to connect to most MGF shoring accessories and
other suitable bases between 57mm - 635mm.
• For use with RGA4 fall arrest and RGR7 man-riding winch combinations
• 4 piece modular system allowing manual installation
• Complies with BS EN 795 Class B
• Adjustable base clamp allowing connection between 57mm - 635mm (2.25” - 25”)

Davitsafe Arm
Product ID: DAV-U-LW

Davitsafe Pillar
Product ID: DAV-L-LW

MGF Fall Arrest and

Recovery Winch Ridgegear
RGA4 (or similar approved)
with fixing bracket

DAVITSAFE

Extendable Davit Base

Product ID: DAVCL-ADJ

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.5.4

 MGF PORTX DAVIT SYSTEM
MGF PortX Davit is a davit system that is suitable for fall arrest and retrieval in addition to
man-riding and material handling use. It is provided as a modular system, which can be
broken down into lightweight components. It is supplied with a universal trench shoring
clamp, which is compatible with all MGF steel box systems up to 150mm thick, in addition
to KKD and ER Trench Sheets and all MGF interlocked Sheet Piles.
The PortX Davit pillar can accept a fall arrest and recovery winch, as well as either a man-
riding winch or material handling winch. In addition, another fall arrest block connection
point is located on the davit pillar, for the davit operator to connect to.
The davit arm provides a horizontal reach of 800mmm, making it suitable to be used with
all MGF Bracing frames. The system has a vertical height of 2.0m.
• For use with RGA4 fall arrest and RGR7 man-riding winch combinations, in addition to
MGF material handling winches
• 3 piece modular system allowing manual installation
• Complies with BS EN 795 Class B
• Adjustable base clamp allowing connection between 0mm – 160mm

Additional fall arrest

point for davit operator
MGF Fall Arrest
and Recovery Winch
Ridgegear RGA4
PortX Davit upper (or similar approved)
pillar and arm with fixing bracket
Product ID: U-PORTX

MGF RGR7 man-riding

winch or material
handling winch with
PortX Davit lower pillar fixing bracket
Product ID: L-PORTX

PortX Davit Weight

PortX Davit clamp
DAVITSAFE

(kg)
Range = 0mm – 160mm
Davit Upper Pillar and Arm 16 Product ID: S-PORTX

Davit Lower Pillar 10

Davit Clamp 23
Total 49

7.5.5 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 MGF GANGWAY RAMPS ARE A ROBUST, MODULAR STEEL RAMP SYSTEM THAT
CAN CONNECT TO MGF LADDERSAFE PLATFORMS AND WALL BRIDGE. THE
SYSTEM CAN BE SUPPLIED WITH ADAPTORS TO ENABLE SAFE ACCESS TO
EXISTING MGF LADDERSAFE SYSTEMS.
The platforms are manufactured from grade S275 steel and feature serrated open steel
flooring for additional grip. The platform is designed to be lifted into place using an
excavator. Each ramp is 1.5m long and can cater for a max. 0.5m vertical height and a max.
angle of 17.5°. They are modular in design and up to 3 can be connected together to create
a 4.5m long ramp that can cater for a max. 1.5m vertical height. The Gangway Ramps are
designed for man access onto a Laddersafe platform or Wall Bridge, and should only be
accessed by 1 person at a time, with the system being rated for a max. 150kg point load or a
UDL of 1.5kN/m².

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Ensure that Gangway Ramps, overshoe adaptors and Laddersafe platforms are not
damaged or distorted and that the correct Laddersafe platform, connecting pins and
nuts/bolts have been provided prior to use. Always replace damaged components.
2. Always install the Gangway Ramps and the Laddersafe platform from a position of
safety. If working from an unsupported edge a full risk assessment should be carried
out for installation. Once the Laddersafe is installed ensure the clamping bolts are fully
clamped and it cannot be lifted, slide or rotate prior to securing the Gangway Ramp.
3. Ensure the Gangway Ramp is securely connected to the Laddersafe platform and that
all 20mm diameter pins are secured using a r-clip and the supplied securing plate.
4. Ensure when connecting Gangway ramps together than the M16x50 bolts and nuts are
sufficiently torqued and that
retaining clips are provided for
the integrated pins. Gangway
Ramps should be connected
together prior to securing to
the Laddersafe platform.
5. MGF Gangway Ramps are
modular and no more than 3
ramps should be connected
together.
6. The maximum achievable
angle of 17.5° must not be
exceeded, which can cater for
a maximum vertical height of 0.5m per ramp, up to a maximum of 1.5m for 3 connected
ramps.
GANGWAY RAMPS
7. MGF Gangway Ramps are designed for man access to an MGF Laddersafe or Wall
Bridge system and should only be used by a single person and should not be used to
transport/store equipment.
8. Laddersafe platforms should only be fitted to MGF excavation support systems using
the clamps specified. The customer must ensure that these support systems are
installed in accordance with MGF guidelines and are sufficiently robust and stable to
act as an effective edge protection support.
9. It is recommended that 2 operatives are used to install the Gangway Ramp overshoe
adaptor when required, and that this is installed prior to installing the Laddersafe
platform.
10. Gangway Ramps can connect directly to the back face (retained side) of MGF Type 3
Laddersafe for Stairsafe (4.3039) and both faces of MGF Wall Bridges (4.390) without
the use of an overshoe adaptors.

7.6.1 CONTACT US [email protected] 7.6.1

 11. Gangway Ramp overshoe adaptors must only be affixed to the back face (retained side)
of MGF Type 1 and 2 Laddersafe platforms. Gangway Ramps are not designed for access
within the excavation – and are only suitable for access to a Laddersafe platform should
the upstand be restrictive otherwise, or the ground around the installed Laddersafe
platform be sloping away from the sheets/box panels or be of a poor quality.
12. Be careful of finger trap hazards during the installation, ensure suitable PPE is worn
throughout the installation and assembly.
13. Always consult with MGF for suitability of the system for any specific installation. MGF
Laddersafe must not be clamped to trench sheets less than 6mm thick, or piles in pure
cantilever or cantilevering more than 1.5m above a waler rail/brace. In addition, it is
essential that the excavation support system (that the clamp is attached to) is installed
robustly and fully supported by the ground (no voids/weak ground present).
14. Any gaps between the handrails on the Gangway Ramps and the platform it is being
attached to should be closed off using the supplied safety chain and connectors.

MGF Gangway Ramps can natively

connect to the back faces on the
Type 3 Laddersafe for Stairsafe
(4.3039) and both faces of the MGF
Wall Bridges using the integrated
20mm pin and supplied r-clips and
securing plate detail.

When used in conjunction with an overshoe adaptor

the Gangway Ramps can connect to the back faces
of type 1 and 2 Laddersafe platforms to provide safe
access up to an MGF Laddersafe platform.
GANGWAY RAMPS

The 10mm thick securing plates are supplied with the Gangway
Ramps and are used to connect ramps together or to a Laddersafe/
Wall Bridge by fitting over the integrated 20mm pins on connection
detail. r-clips are used to constrain the securing plate.

Product ID Component Weight

(kg)

4.366 Gangway Ramp 128

4.367 Overshoe Adaptor 24

7.6.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 Gangway Ramps connect to Gangway Ramps Gaps between the
Type 3 Laddersafe for Stairsafe connect to Type 1 and handrails on the
platforms and Wall Bridges by Type 2 Laddersafe via Gangway Ramps and
hooking one end of the ramp over the use of the overshoe Laddersafe units
the integrated 20mm pin on the adaptor which hooks should be closed off
Laddersafe and fitting the loose over the back end of using the supplied
securing plate over both 20mm the Laddersafe. The safety chains and
pins and securing using the Gangway Ramps hook connectors.
supplied r-clips. over the 20mm pin on
the overshoe adaptor,
the securing plate must
then be fitted over both
20mm pins and secured
using r-clips.

Gangway Ramps are connected

by hooking one end over the
other ramps connection point
and constraining using the
securing plate and r-clips as
well as securing the 2 endplates
together using 2No. M16x50 bolts
and nuts (per connection).

GANGWAY RAMPS

Gangway Ramps are lifted

and handled by attaching MGF
Lifting chains to the handling
points as shown.

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.6.3

 MGF STEEL ROAD PLATES ARE DESIGNED TO TEMPORARILY COVER
TRENCHES IN TRAFFICKED AREAS.
There are many factors to consider when deploying road plates, such as the duration of
the works, the type, size and weight of the plates, the installation and removal methods,
the type of installation (surface mounted or recessed) as well as the need for additional
shoring. Available in two sizes, 1.2m x 1.2m or 2.4m x 1.2m, MGF standard road plates
are supplied in 19mm thick Grade S235 steel with or without anti-skid coating. They are
provided with 4 lifting points for use with a 4 leg chain.
MGF Safe Lift Road Plates are available in 2.4m x 1.2m size. They are supplied in 19mm
thick Grade S275JR steel with anti-skid coating and feature a central lifting socket which
allow them to be lifted centrally in conjunction with a Safe Lift Road Plate Lifting Adaptor
and single leg chain. This addition simplifies the handling of road plates, improving both
safety and efficiency onsite when handling using excavators or lorry mounted cranes.
Road plates are heavy and a suitable lifting plan must be in place prior to commencing
works.
For further details on how to safely use road plates it is recommended to read “Traffic
Advisory Leaflet 6/14: Using Road Plates at Road Works” produced by the Department for
Transport.

PRODUCT NOTE
1. Ensure that equipment is stored on
flat level ground.
2. Avoid stacking / storing equipment
close to pedestrian routes.
3. Ensure that all lifting equipment
and accessories have a certificate of
thorough examination and are visually
inspected for damage prior to each
use.
4. MGF recommend stacking heights of max. 5No. plates onsite, ensure timber packers
separate the plates so they are not stacked directly on top of each other.
5. Standard road plates must be lifted using a 4-leg chain, each corner of the plate needs
to be made accessible by chocking underneath to attach the chain hooks. Be aware of
finger/limb trap hazards during this process. Safe lift road plates must only be lifted
vertically, one at a time, using a single leg chain. At no point should any road plate be
dragged on the ground or transported using the bucket and blade of the excavator.
6. It is essential that no one is in the immediate vicinity during the lifting operation. Road
plates must never be lifted over anyone’s heads, ensure safe lifting practices are
adhered to during every lift.
7. Ensure that when plant are tracking whilst lifting road plates that the load is kept low
ROAD PLATES

at all times. Take care travelling over uneven ground, always ensure a plant exclusion
zone is adhered to.
8. It is strongly recommended to fully restrain/secure the road plates to prevent any
movement. Each road plate is provided with 4No. corner holes for use with ground
anchors. Safe lift road plates feature 30mm diameter holes, while all other road plates
feature 50mm diameter holes. It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure that road
plates are sufficiently anchored/restrained prior to use.
9. The fixings should not protrude above the surface of the plates to create a hazard to
road users, they should ideally have countersunk heads or should not protrude by more
than 10mm above the plate.

7.7.1 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

10. If the plates are recessed, it is recommended that any gaps between the road plates
and the ground are suitably filled.
11. If the plates are raised then it is recommended to ensure that a suitable means of
transition is implemented.
12. Prior to installation of road plates, it is essential that the ground is assessed for
suitability, that the area into which the road plates are to be installed is clear with no
trip hazards and capable of taking the weight of the road plates.
13. It is essential that the plates are visually monitored on site for signs of excessive
deflection.
14. MGF recommend that the plates are supported by at least 500mm either side of the
trench.
15. Road plates normally need to be placed on bedding material, whether they are surface
mounted or recessed, it is recommended that the bedding does not extend fully to the
sides of the trench, to avoid directly loading the top edge of the trench.
16. If multiplate road plates are used together it is important that the traffic passing over
the road plate only passes in one direction at a time and only 1 vehicle has contact with
the plates at once.
17. It is recommended to limit the vehicle speed travelling over the plates to no more than
30mph.
18. It is recommended to keep the plates low off the ground during handling operations
and to control the lift using a tag line.
19. Take care when handling road plates, especially in windy conditions. In these
circumstances it may be necessary to increase the size of the plant exclusion zone.
20. If road plates are to be used to bridge over an unshored trench then shoring should
be considered, due to the additional loads induced by the traffic. If road plates are to
be used to bridge over a shored trench then the additional loads must be taken into
account within the shoring design.

Anchor Anti-
Material Hole Skid
Description Grade Diameter Weight Coated
(mm) (kg)

2.4m x 1.2m x 19mm

6.130 S235JR 50 (min) 440 No
Road Plate

1.2m x 1.2m x 19mm

6.134 S235JR 50 (min) 220 Yes
Road Plate
2.4m x 1.2m x 19mm
6.135 S235JR 50 (min) 442 Yes
Product ID

Road Plate

2.4m x 1.2m x 19mm

6.136 S275JR 30 442 Yes
ROAD PLATES

Safe Lift Road Plate

Safe Lift Road Plate

6.137 - - 2.1 -
Lifting Adaptor

CSG8-10MM 1.0m 3.15t Single

Grade 8 - 4.1 -
-1-SAH-1M Leg Chain

CONTACT US [email protected] 7.7.2

 Traditional road plates are
handled using a 4-leg chain.

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF ROAD PLATES

mgf.co.uk/products/road-plates

Safe Lift Road Plates are handled using a safe lift

road plate lifting adaptor and single leg chain.

Road plates
should be
secured onsite
using ground
ROAD PLATES

anchors.

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE

FOR MGF SAFE LIFT ROAD PLATES

mgf.co.uk/products/safe-lift-road-plates/

7.7.3 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

GRiPSHORE®

GRIPSHORE® OVERVIEW 8.1 EDGESAFE-MESH 8.14

GRP SHEETS AND WALERS 8.7 ALUMINIUM HYDRAULIC
GRP VERTISHORES 8.8 CYLINDER EXTENSIONS 8.16

GRP TRENCH BOX 8.9 GRP LADDERS 8.16

GRP MODULAR BOX 8.10 GRP ENDSAFE STRUTS 8.17

GRP MINI TRENCH BOX 8.11 GRP BABYSHORE 8.18

SPECIFICATION GUIDE 8.12 LIFTING / HANDLING

ACCESSORIES 8.19
EDGESAFE-GRP 8.14
 SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, MAN-HANDLEABLE, TWO SIDED HYDRAULIC BRACING
SYSTEMS DESIGNED TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT TO SHALLOW
TRENCHES FOR THE SAFE INSTALLATION OF UTILITIES.
The systems can support trench widths of 0.57m to 2.0m and can be installed by hand to depths
of up to 2.2m. Fabricated from pultruded GRP (grade E17 / E23 to BS EN 13706 and fire retardant
to ASTM E84 Class 1) the waler rails, sheets and boards are supported by aluminium trench-jacks
using simple pin and retaining clip assemblies. The trench jacks contain hydraulic rams with
either 350mm or 525mm of stroke. Connecting the rams (via hydraulic hoses) to an MGF hand
operated single acting bucket pump containing hydraulic shoring fluid, allows the width of the
bracing system to be quickly and easily adjusted to suit the trench dimensions. Once the systems
are located at the correct line and level, the trench jacks are pre-loaded against the trench
sides using the bucket pump. Pre-loading the faces of the trench imparts compressive stresses
within the soil, which generate arched stress paths both vertically and horizontally between the
trench jacks. The trench jacks are pre-loaded and provide rigid supports for the soil to arch to.
Self-sealing quick release valves lock in the hydraulic ram pressure, hydraulic rams with lock-off
valves can also be provided (see 8.15 for further details).
GRiPSHORE®

MGF can supply a full range of ancillaries including edge protection, aluminium strut extensions,
lightweight bucket pumps, handling slings, valve release tool, restraining chains, GRP Endsafe
struts and GRP ladders.
Manufactured and designed in general accordance with the principles of BS EN 14653 Part 1
(Manually operated hydraulic shoring systems), BS 5975 (Code of practice for temporary works)
and the Federal OSHA Regulations.
GRiPSHORE ® is exclusive to MGF and is a fully registered design belonging to MGF.
GRiPSHORE ® systems are patent registered, design registered and trademarked.

8.1 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

PRODUCT NOTES
1. GRiPSHORE ® systems should only be installed and removed by competent persons in strict
accordance with an MGF design & installation sequence.
2. Installation is normally carried out using the dig and drop excavation method by lowering the
assembled units to the correct installation level and pre-loading each jack from ground level
in turn to ensure that the units are pressed firmly against the trench walls and cannot slip.
Max. pre-load pressure of 40 bar (600 psi) must not be exceeded.
3. GRP products are not suitable for the dig and push excavation technique.
4. Ensure all quick release valves are functional and all strut pins in place and secured using
the retaining clips provided prior to commencing works.
5. Individual waler rails and jacks should be visually inspected for damage, excessive deflection
or loss of ram pressure prior to entering the excavation.
6. Units should always be installed square and plumb to the excavation walls ensuring the jacks
bear directly onto firm soil. If this is not possible any gaps must be securely packed by using
hardwood wedges or suitable compacted material to ensure pre-loading of the jacks imparts
compressive forces into the soil.
7. Safe access / egress, edge protection (for personnel) and barrier protection (for plant) should
always be considered. Always place ladders between loaded jacks.
8. Prior to removal of systems all hydraulic rams must be released and retracted and systems
prised clear of the trench walls, to avoid the need for excessive extraction forces and to avoid
damaging the jacks.
9. No matter how much care is taken during the installation and removal of GRiPSHORE ®
systems some ground movement will occur in the areas immediately surrounding the
excavation. Great care must be taken when specifying these systems for use adjacent to
existing structures and services.
10. It is recommended that ends of trench runs be battered back at a safe angle, or GRP Endsafe
struts should be installed.
11. Avoid hot works in close proximity to GRP.
12. Ensure gloves and eye protection when handling GRP and using hydraulics.
13. If stacking GRP products ensure they are supported at max. 1.0m centres with timber skids
to avoid bending, and that items are strapped down for stability especially in high winds.
14. Robustness - GRP components must not be roughly handled, struck, driven into the ground
or extracted under load.
15. Suitable soils: made ground such as soft cohesive, loose sands and
loose granular fill which is generally self-supporting in the short
term and where no ground water is present / water is flowing.
16. Unsuitable soils: ground such as very soft clays, very loose
gravels / sand and silt or peat or in excavations where
the trench walls are collapsing or groundwater is
present / water is flowing.
17. Vertishore rail systems: Vertishore systems rely solely
upon soil arching theory to support trench walls.
Therefore never enter a trench unless fully pre-
loaded vertishore rails are securely installed either
side of the point of entry.
GRiPSHORE®

18. Box systems: during installation and removal

always ensure any operative in a trench is
within fully assembled units extending vertically
to the top of the trench.
19. Sheets and walers: during installation and
removal always ensure any operative in a
trench greater than 1.0m deep is within fully
assembled frames.

CONTACT US [email protected] 8.2

 20. GRiPSHORE ® solutions are offered based on a competent person supervising the excavation
and installation of the support systems. The competent person must be capable of confirming
the soil conditions and local environment are suitable for the design, that the dimensions of
the proposed excavation are suitable for the system deployed and that sufficient trench jacks
are loading the soil prior to entry. If the proposed works deviate from the design and / or site
conditions vary, immediately secure the excavation (back filling) and seek a re-design. If in
doubt, please contact MGF Design Services Limited (01942 402704).
21. GRiPSHORE ® systems are designed to rely on trench jacks for overall stability, walers, sheets
and boards / panels are provided to spread the trench jack loads into the soil and prevent
ravelling / local spalling of the trench walls between the jacks. The choice of system deployed
will therefore depend upon a risk assessment of the proposed works. In general full sheeting
/ boarding would be advisable for longer duration works and / or where the trench wall
stability for the duration of the proposed works is questionable (e.g. variable soils / extensive
service crossings).
22. During installation and removal sequences assembled waler rails and boxes provide a short
term safe working area for operatives when having to temporarily release individual jacks
to lift or lower the systems. As a general rule it is safe to excavate up to 1000mm below a
loaded jack during the installation sequence. Visit mgf.co.uk for examples of installation
guides.
23. GRiPSHORE ® systems are ideal for reactive type work which is short term in nature and has
to cope with fast changing site constraints. It is therefore important that during this type of
work the Temporary Works Supervisor is mindful of the trench jacking theory checks listed in
this document and that the spacing rules in particular are obeyed.
24. Prior to loading a jack without a backing board it is essential that a min. 500mm long even
bearing is provided against the waler rail to avoid localised overloading of the soil.
25. Loading jacks against highway pavement construction (generally presenting very hard and
uneven surfaces) can make installing jacks difficult. It is recommended that either the
GRiPSHORE®

jacks are located so as to load the soil immediately beneath the pavement construction
(recommended to batter the pavement back slightly in this case) or that the pavement
construction is trimmed back and smoothed out to provide an even bearing and that timber
blocks / suitable fill is used to pack out where necessary to maintain an even loading of the
trench walls.
26. Check trench service crossings for any soils or materials (including boulders, concrete or
road construction) that could dislodge and fall / collapse onto operatives and if identified
ensure that a jack is placed so as to prevent this or that an exclusion zone is established.
27. Do not work underneath service crossings unless an engineered support system is correctly
installed or the service has been inspected and confirmed to be stable by a competent person.

8.3 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 GRP VERTISHORES

GRP VERTISHORE
WITH BONDED
BACKING BOARD

GRP
GRP TRENCH BOX SHEETS &
WALERS

GRiPSHORE®

GRP MINI
TRENCH BOX

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF GRiPSHORE®

GRP MODULAR BOX mgf.co.uk/gripshore

CONTACT US [email protected] 8.4

 TRENCH JACK / SOIL ARCHING PRINCIPLES
Used in the United States for the last 50 years, soil arching or trench jack theory
explains that when hydraulic struts pressurise the sides of an excavation that micro
movements create compressive stresses into the soil that join together in an arch
shape between hydraulic struts. This occurs in both the horizontal and vertical plane
creating a protective area around the shoring system. Only small amounts of earth
within the soil arch can enter the trench, referred to as ravelling. Trench walls must
remain stable long enough for the trench jacks to be deployed and loaded.

Do not extend the trench more than 0.5m beyond the rail.
GRiPSHORE®

8.5 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

TRENCH JACKING THEORY CHECKS
EXCAVATION PROPORTIONS
Trench width >570 and <2000mm
Trench length >1.5 × width (Trench lengths can be extended unsupported beyond jacks by up to 500mm)
Trench depth <2200mm (This includes any reduced level dig or step / slope)

TRENCH JACK SPACING

Top jacks bearing onto soil >150mm and <600mm below surface
Horizontal jack spacing >500mm <2000mm
Vertical jack spacing >500mm <1200mm
Bottom jacks max. 600mm above dig depth*
*This may be extended to 1000mm during installation and removal of box systems or subject to design checks.

SURCHARGING
Max. 12t excavator, max. 5kN/m2 parallel to trench

TRENCH JACK RECOMMENDED PRE-LOADS

ü PERMITTED
ROAD CONSTRUCTION
/ MADE GROUND
(max. 400 psi)
Firm CLAY
(max. 500 psi)
(min. 250 psi)
û NOT PERMITTED

PEAT / SILT
(min. 150 psi)
Compacted / Well Graded Stiff CLAY Uncompacted / Poorly Graded
SAND* (max. 450 psi)
(max. 500 psi) SAND / GRAVEL
(min. 250 psi)
(min. 250 psi) (Blown/Running Sands)

Hard GROUND/ROCK
RIVER MUD /
(max. 400 psi)
(min. 150 psi) V. Soft CLAY

CHALK
(max. 400 psi) LARGE NUMBER
(min. 150 psi) OF VOIDS

Compacted / Well Graded

GRAVEL CONTAMINATED
(max. 500 psi) SOILS
(min. 200 psi)
Soft CLAY* GROUND WATER NOT
(max. 600 psi) PERMITTED ABOVE
(min. 200 psi) DIG LEVEL

Jacking pressures shown in red

*Customer may wish to consider utilising backing boards
GRiPSHORE®

CONTACT US [email protected] 8.6

 GRP SHEETS AND WALERS

The lightweight system can be rapidly assembled and installed by hand where access is
limited, without the need for an excavator and without the requirement for operatives to
enter an unsupported trench. GRP Endsafe struts are available to close off the ends of a
trench providing extra protection from loose materials falling into the excavation
(see page 8.17 for further details). With a SWL of 16.5kN/m2 the system is suitable for
use in most trenches up to a depth of 2.0m (2.2m subject to design checks).

Always ensure operatives work

from within the waler frames
500

Excavating can continue

up to 400mm below the
toe of the sheet during
installation provided
2000 (max.)

jacks are loaded.

0
56
-1
60
10

Handling Points
WLL 100kg
00
1600 - 21
600 (max.)

Description Weight
Tren
ch width (kg)
620 -
2000
**
1.090 1.6m GRP Waler 6.2
Product ID

1.100 2.1m GRP Waler 8.1

3.006 1.5m GRP Sheet 5.0

3.007 2.0m GRP Sheet 6.7

GRiPSHORE®

[1] 1600mm GRP Waler.

System SWL 16.5kN/m2
[2] 2100mm GRP Waler.
* Max. 2200mm subject to Max. Trench Depth 2000mm*
Component

design checks. Trench Width 620mm - 2000mm**

** Max. trench width achieved
by using Type A struts Max. Understrut Clearance 600mm
with cylinder extensions. Clearance between struts 1060mm[1] / 1560mm[2]
Assembled weight based on
Assembled Frame Weight 24kg[1] / 28kg[2]
Type A Struts.

8.7 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

GRP VERTISHORE RAIL The lightweight system can be rapidly
WITH OR WITHOUT assembled and installed by hand where
BONDED BACKING BOARD access is limited, without the need for an
excavator and without the requirement for
operatives to enter an unsupported trench.
Handling Points MGF recommend a minimum of 3 units be
WLL 100kg
installed at once and that operatives only
work between loaded Vertishores.
The system provides a minimum 570mm of
clearance below the bottom strut.
2100

MGF recommend that any unsupported

trench ends do not extend greater than
1600

0.5m beyond the systems. With a trench

jack SWL of 30 / 60kN suitable for use in
570

most trenches up to a depth of 2.0m (2.2m

570

subject to design checks). The trench jacks

500

are linked by hydraulic hoses allowing

180 safe install and removal from outside the
00 dth

trench. If there is any evidence of trench

**
20 wi
0- h
57 enc

wall instability, or the trench is to be open

Tr

for more than 5 days then boards must be

Max. spacing between installed provided between Vertishores.
Vertishores (without backing
board) is 1.5m centre to centre.
Description Weight
(kg)

1.060 0.5m Vertishore Rail 1.9

1.070 1.6m Vertishore Rail 6.2

Product ID

1.6m Vertishore Rail

1.075 12.5
2100

w/ Bonded Board

1.080 2.1m Vertishore Rail 8.1

1600

2.1m Vertishore Rail

1.085 16.1
570

w/ Bonded Board
570

500
Max. spacing between installed Vertishores
(with bonded backing board) is 2.0m centre to
0* h
00 idt
*
-2 w

centre, subject to design checks.

0 ch
62 ren
T

[1] Without backing board.

GRiPSHORE®

[2] With backing board.

Backing Board Width 500mm
* Max. 2200mm subject to
design checks. Max. Trench Depth 2000mm*
Component

** Max. trench width Trench Width 570mm - 2000mm**

achieved by using Type
A struts with cylinder Max. Understrut Clearance 570mm
extensions. Strut SWL 30kN[1] / 60kN[2]
Assembled weight based
Assembled Weights 9.5 - 27.6kg[1] / 36.4 - 44kg[2]
on Type A Struts.

CONTACT US [email protected] 8.8

 GRP TRENCH BOX

The lightweight system can be rapidly assembled by hand. MGF recommend that any
unsupported trench ends do not extend greater than 0.5m beyond the systems. With a trench
jack SWL of 60kN suitable for use in most trenches up to a depth of 1.5m (1.7m subject to
design checks). The trench jacks are linked by hydraulic hoses allowing safe install and
removal from outside the trench. Designed to withstand a maximum safe working load of
16.5kN/m², for use in made ground such as soft cohesive and loose granular fill which is
generally self-supporting in the short term and where no ground water is present. Boxes are
generally not suitable for use in trenches with numerous service crossings.

Product ID Description Weight On trench runs the boxes

can be placed hit and
(kg)
miss (max. 1.5m gap
4.002 GRP Trench Box Panel 27.3 between boxes).

Always ensure operatives Handling Points

work from within the box WLL 100kg

1500
570

15
00 Excavating can continue up to
0**
- 200 400mm below the bottom of
620
hw
idth the panel during installation
nc
Tre provided jacks are loaded.

Panel L x H 1500mm x 1500mm

System SWL 16.5kN/m2
GRiPSHORE®

Max. Trench Depth 1500mm*

Component

* Max. 1700mm subject to Trench Width 620mm - 2000mm**

design checks. Max. Understrut Clearance 570mm
** Max. trench width achieved
by using Type A struts Strut SWL 60kN
with cylinder extensions. Clearance between struts 1244mm
Assembled weight based on
Assembled Weight 78kg
Type A Struts.

8.9 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

GRP MODULAR BOX

A lightweight, modular shoring solution for excavations up to 2.0m deep (2.2m subject to
design checks) with widths from 620mm to 2000mm**. GRP Modular Box panels create a
working area 1.5m wide and a minimum under strut clearance of 570mm to allow services
to pass. Due to the soil arch created by the hydraulic struts, GRP Modular Boxes can be
set out with a clear space of up to 1.5m between boxes making an efficient solution for
longer trench runs. Designed to withstand a maximum safe working load of 16.5kN/m²,
for use in made ground such as soft cohesive and loose granular fill which is generally
self-supporting in the short term and where no ground water is present. Boxes are
generally not suitable for use in trenches with numerous service crossings. To assist with
installation tubular GRP connecting poles can be provided upon request.

Product ID Description Weight

On trench runs the
(kg) boxes can be placed
hit and miss (max.
4.001 GRP Modular Box Panel 19 1.5m gap between
boxes).
4.003 GRP Modular Box Connecting Pole 2

Always ensure 1500 Handling Points

operatives work WLL 100kg
from within the box
1000
2000
1000

Excavating can continue up to

400mm below the bottom of
570

the panel during installation

0* h
00 idt
*
-2 w

provided jacks are loaded.

0 h
62 enc
Tr

Panel L x H 1500mm x 1000mm

System SWL 16.5kN/m2
GRiPSHORE®

Max. Trench Depth 2000mm*

Component

* Max. 2200mm subject to Trench Width 620mm - 2000mm**

design checks. Max. Understrut Clearance 570mm
** Max. trench width achieved
by using Type A struts Strut SWL 60kN
with cylinder extensions. Clearance between struts 1244mm
Assembled weight based on
Assembled Weight 50kg per unit
Type A Struts.

CONTACT US [email protected] 8.10

 GRP MINI TRENCH BOX

A lightweight shoring solution for excavations up to 1.0m deep (1.2m subject to design
checks) with widths from 620mm to 2000mm**. GRP Mini Trench Box panels create
a working area 1.5m wide and a minimum under strut clearance of 570mm to allow
services to pass. Due to the soil arch created by the hydraulic struts, GRP Mini Trench
Boxes can be set out with a clear space of up to 1.5m between boxes making an efficient
solution for longer trench runs. Designed to withstand a maximum safe working load of
16.5kN/m², for use in made ground such as soft cohesive and loose granular fill which is
generally self-supporting in the short term and where no ground water is present. Boxes
are generally not suitable for use in trenches with numerous service crossings.

Product ID Description Weight On trench runs the boxes

can be placed hit and
(kg)
miss (max. 1.5m gap
4.001 GRP Mini Trench Box Panel 19 between boxes).

Handling Points
WLL 100kg 1500

Always ensure
operatives work
from within the box
1000
570

*
0*
00
-2
620
dt
h Excavating can continue up to
wi
h 400mm below the bottom of
enc
Tr the panel during installation
provided jacks are loaded.

Panel L x H 1500mm x 1000mm

System SWL 16.5kN/m2
GRiPSHORE®

Max. Trench Depth 1000mm*

Component

* Max. 1200mm subject to Trench Width 620mm - 2000mm**

design checks. Max. Understrut Clearance 570mm
** Max. trench width achieved
by using Type A struts Strut SWL 60kN
with cylinder extensions. Clearance between struts 1244mm
Assembled weight based on
Assembled Weight 50kg
Type A Struts.

8.11 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

GRiPSHORE® SPECIFICATION GUIDE

GRiPSHORE®

CONTACT US [email protected] 8.12

GRiPSHORE®

8.13 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

EDGESAFE-MESH & EDGESAFE-GRP

MGF Edgesafe-Mesh and Edgesafe-GRP are lightweight edge protection systems suitable for use
with MGF GRiPSHORE ® products. Connected to the GRP rails or GRP panel / sheet using a GRP
connecting adaptor and GRP vertical box sections the system satisfies the requirements of BS EN
13374 (2013) Class A Temporary Edge Protection Systems, and is suitable for site use where the
ground slopes up to a maximum of 10°. The systems are not suitable for use as pedestrian barriers.

MGF Edgesafe-Mesh is a lightweight steel mesh

edge protection system suitable for use with all
MGF GRiPSHORE ® products. The panels connect
to the GRP rails or GRP panel / sheet using GRP
connecting adaptors and GRP vertical box sections.
The panels are 1665mm long, 1060mm high and
can simply overlap to create a constant run of edge
protection, cable ties can be used to secure panels
together for added rigidity. The maximum allowable
centres for the vertical GRP box sections / GRP
connecting adaptors are 1.5m. When used on GRP
Sheets and Walers the GRP connecting adaptor
must be installed centrally on the 500mm wide
sheet with maximum 1.0m centres. The centreline
of the top waler frame must not be greater than
265mm from the top of the sheet.
Edgesafe-Mesh panels can be installed by a single
operative, from a position of safety away from
the edge of the trench. No mechanical fixings are
required for installation.
1250mm

MGF Edgesafe-GRP is a lightweight GRP

edge protection system suitable for use
with MGF GRiPSHORE ® GRP Trench
Boxes, GRP Modular Boxes and GRP Mini Description Weight
51mm
Trench Boxes. The panels connect to the
GRiPSHORE®

GRP rails using GRP connecting adaptors. (kg)

The panels are 1370mm long, 1280mm 4.341 Edgesafe-Mesh 10
high and can be simply connected
4.342 Edgesafe-GRP 10
Product ID

together using cable ties to create a

constant run of edge protection.
4.343 GRP Connecting 2
Edgesafe-GRP panels can be installed by Adaptor
a single operative, no mechanical fixings
are required for installation. 4.344 GRP Vertical 3
Box Sections

CONTACT US [email protected] 8.14

 89
GRP RAIL PROFILE

10
Type GRP Rail

6
50
Component
GRP Material Grade E23
Weight 3.85kg/m 180
Section Modulus 23.5cm3
* Subject to max. 1.7m simply supported span
SWL Moment Capacity 3.42kNm*
or 0.6m cantilever.

GRP PANEL / SHEET PROFILE

500

3
Type GRP Panel/Sheet

25
Component

GRP Material Grade E17

Weight 3.34kg/m
Section Modulus 27.4cm3/m
**Subject to max. 1.5m simply supported span
SWL Moment Capacity 3.14kNm/m**
or 0.6m cantilever.

GRiPSHORE® HYDRAULIC TRENCH JACKS

Single Acting
Material Aluminium
Hydraulic Trench

Bore 50.8mm
Weight 5.7kg[1] / 8kg[2]
Jack

Axial SWL 60kN / 30kN***

Approx. Stroke 350mm[1] / 525mm[2]
The GRiPSHORE ® range
utilise 2 different types of Working Temp Range -20ºC to +50ºC
hydraulic trench jacks:
Type A: 550 - 900mm (5.7kg) [1] Type A Trench Jack. [2] Type B1 Trench Jack.
Product ID: 1.011 *** 30kN for Vertishore rail without bonded backing board.
The above weights are based on an aluminium outer sleeve.
Type B1: 850 - 1375mm (8kg) Plastic sleeves can be provided.
Product ID: 1.012

Dowty
washer GRiPSHORE ® hydraulic trench jacks
⅜" BSP
isolation can be provided with lock-off valves.
GRiPSHORE®

valve Shoring fluid is pumped into the full

bore side of the piston through the
male QRV. Single acting cylinders
cannot be retracted using a pump
unit and have to be physically closed
whilst releasing the male QRV.
¼" male to
male Ensure isolation valve is closed to
maintain pre-load pressure and
¼" BSP male before release / connection of QRVs.
QRV

8.15 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

GRiPSHORE® ALUMINIUM STRUT EXTENSIONS
Range

1000mm
1050mm
1100mm
1150mm
1200mm
1250mm
1300mm
1350mm
1400mm
1450mm
1500mm
1550mm
1600mm
1650mm
1700mm
1750mm
1800mm
1850mm
1900mm
1950mm
2000mm
2050mm
500mm
550mm
600mm
650mm
700mm
750mm
800mm
850mm
900mm
950mm
Type A 550-900mm
Type B1 850 - 1375mm
Type A + 800mm Extension 1379-1729mm
Type A + 1100mm Extension 1679-2029mm

The GRiPSHORE ® Aluminium Strut extensions are designed to be used with GRiPSHORE ®
Type A Trench Jacks only. There are 2 extension sizes, one that increases the Type A range
by 800mm (product ID =1.0111) and one that increases it by 1100mm (product ID = 1.0112).
These extensions allow a max. trench width of 2.0m (as long as the Trench Jacking Theory
Checks are satisfied - see page 8.6).

GRiPSHORE® HYDRAULIC PUMP

Single Acting
Product ID 1.604
Hydraulic Bucket

Capacity 10 litres
Weight 22kg
Pump

Shoring Fluid Houghto Safe SF25

Installation Pressure 150-600 psi
Weight 12kg (empty)

The pump is used to extend the single acting hydraulic rams. The pumps contain bio-
degradable Houghto Safe SF25 shoring fluid. During the Summer months the shoring fluid
is diluted with water at a ratio of 3 parts water to 1 part Houghto Safe SF25. In the Winter the
mix ratio is 1:1. Maximum recommended installation pressure 600psi (40 Bar). These pumps
can be provided with pressure relief valves to prevent over-pressurising the systems.

GRP LADDERS GRP Ladder Weight

(kg)
4.3093 3.0m 11
Product ID

4.3094 4.0m 14
4.3095 5.0m 18
GRiPSHORE®

4.3096 6.0m 22
4.3097 7.0m 25

Our incredibly lightweight one piece leaning rung ladders are manufactured from E17
Structural Grade Pultruded GRP (glass reinforced plastic) to BS EN 13706. They are available
in lengths ranging from 3.0m to 7.0m and comply with BS EN 131 - 150kg SWL. The ladders
are supplied with 400mm wide, square anti-slip rungs and rubber anti-slip end caps on the
ends of the stiles as standard. Epoxy Coated Steel Ladders are also available.

CONTACT US [email protected] 8.16

 GRP ENDSAFE STRUTS Component Weight

Trench width: 1220 - 1420mm

Type E length: 1200mm
(kg)

Trench width: 1040 - 1220mm

Type D length: 1020mm
1.706 325 Outer 1.7
1.707 535 Inner 1.6

Trench width: 860 - 1040mm

Type C length: 840mm

Product ID
1.708 710 Inner 2.1

Type B length: 710mm

Trench width: 735 - 910mm
1.709 840 Inner 2.5
1.710 1020 Inner 3.0
Type A length: 535mm
Trench width: 620 - 735mm

1.711 1200 Inner 3.5

Length: 325mm

Inner Material 64x64x6.4 GRP

SHS (E23)
Outer Material 84x84x9 GRP
profiled section
ENDSAFE ENDSAFE STRUT INNER RANGE
STRUT OUTER Overall Weight 3.3kg - 5.2kg

GRP Endsafe Struts are designed to be quickly and easily installed by hand to support the
open end of a trench run created using GRP Sheets and Walers. When the Endsafe struts are
installed the GRP trench sheets can be installed against the face of the GRP Endsafe strut
by carefully lowering down vertically. The struts are telescopic and include one outer section
and a range of inner sections to give a working range of between 620mm and 1420mm.
The minimum overlap between the inner and outer sections must not be less than 125mm.
GRP Endsafe Struts cannot be used with aluminium extensions.

SAFE WORKING LOAD FOR

MGF GRP ENDSAFE STRUTS (kN/m)
GRiPSHORE®

8.17 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

GRP VERTISHORE - 0.5M VERTISHORE / BABYSHORE

The 0.5m long GRP Vertishore is intended to be used in shallow trenches up to 2.0m
deep where the layout of the excavation or obstructions such as services precludes the
use of larger products. It can also be used to provide additional shoring support to the
battered ends of trenches, avoiding the need for Endsafe struts or in conjunction with
trench sheets and panels.
In trenches of 1.3m deep and beyond ensure that a minimum of 4 No. loaded jacks are
in place, 2 either side of the point of entry. Setting out for 0.5m Vertishores must be
done in strict accordance with Trench Jack Spacing Rules (see page 8.6).

Max. horizontal spacing

between installed units
is 1.5m centre to centre.
Max. vertical spacing
between installed units is
1.2m centre to centre.

GRP VERTISHORE - ALTERNATE CONFIGURATIONS

GRiPSHORE®

GRP Vertishore can also be installed as a

hybrid system. If the trench is shored using
Vertishore rails but the ground in-between
the units is found to be unstable, the product
allows you to retrospectively slot GRP panels
into the side grooves of the walers to protect
the operative from loose materials whilst
carrying out a repair. Alternatively GRP
panels can be placed behind Vertishore rails.

CONTACT US [email protected] 8.18

 GRiPSHORE® LIFTING / HANDLING ACCESSORIES
UTILITY CHAINS

Description WLL Length Weight

(t) (m) (kg)
4 Leg Utility Handling Chain 3.0 1.2 8.3

Utility Restraining Chain (hook) 0.47 1.2 2.0

Utility Restraining Chain (shackle) 0.47 1.2 1.75

SLINGS
GRiPSHORE®

MGF can provide 1t endless

round slings to assist with the
installation and removal of
GRiPSHORE ®.
The slings are simply
looped through the handling
holes / lifting points on the
GRiPSHORE ® units.

8.19 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

GRP Vertishore, sheets and Edgesafe mesh
OUR RAIL AND HS2
CAPABILITIES
At MGF, we have a dedicated Rail and HS2 team who offer assistance and expertise for
HS2 enquiries and associated Rail infrastructure sector temporary works.
With major investments in fleet availability and stock our national network of depots across
the UK, technical sales team and design engineers are available to discuss solutions.
FIND OUT MORE ABOUT OUR CAPABILITIES:

08083 028 832

mgf.co.uk/hs2
GRiPSHORE+

GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX 9.1

GRP STACKSHORE 9.2
SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, TWO-SIDED EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM MADE
UP OF LIGHTWEIGHT COMPONENTS DESIGNED TO BE INSTALLED BY AN
EXCAVATOR UTILISING THE EXCAVATE AND LOWER TECHNIQUE.
Normally selected for installing small to medium utilities where ground movement is not
critical. The size of the systems specified is dependent upon max. depth requirements
and plan dimensions of structure including allowances for backfilling / formwork etc. The
system is generally suitable for depths of up to 2800mm, with an internal working space
between struts up to 2840mm and internal trench widths ranging from 880mm to 2080mm.
Fabricated from a blend of pultruded GRP (grade E17 to BS EN 13706) and S700 steel to
form 58mm thick panels, the system comprises of 0.8m and 1.2m high panels which can
be stacked to achieve depths of 1200mm, 2000mm, 2400mm or 2800mm (applications
for excavation depths over 2.4m must be accompanied by a design issued through MGF’s
Design Department). The panels are propped off each other by robust, lightweight,
telescopic steel struts which can achieve muck-to-muck trench widths from 1000mm to
2200mm in increments of 100mm. All components in the system are connected together
via simple pin and r-clip assemblies.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable lifting chains, Edgesafe edge
protection panels and GRP or epoxy coated steel ladders, Counterbalance Davitsafe
retrieval / fall arrest system and confined spaces regime equipment.
Manufactured and designed in accordance with BS EN 13331: 2002 Parts 1 and 2 Trench
lining systems and BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and
the permissible stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Boxes should only be used in the configurations shown by competent persons following
MGF installation guidelines.
2. Boxes should be used in ground which is self-supporting in the short-term to allow for
the dig and drop technique.
3. Over dig the trench dimensions by 100mm so that the box can be positioned without
resistance. Ensure that any gaps between the outer face of the panels and the sides of
the excavation are sufficiently backfilled to avoid injury.

GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX

4. Do not push down on the box with a machine during installation.
5. Boxes are not normally suitable for usage where
ground movement is an issue and are therefore
not recommended for use in live carriageway
situations or adjacent existing buildings or
structures.
6. Flying of the box above the base of the
excavation is not recommended.
7. It is possible to man-handle individual
components, but only undertake this if
comfortable to do so with good manual
handling techniques.
8. Assembled box systems range from
183kg to 522kg, ensure a suitable
excavator for handling, installing and
extracting these systems.
9. If stacking panels on site, timber
packers must be used to separate
the panels.

CONTACT US [email protected] 9.1.1

 10. Boxes should not be left in-situ for extended periods within cohesive or very weak soils
as earth pressures / adhesion on the panel surfaces may increase significantly with
time requiring additional extraction forces to release the panels.
11. Always use MGF specified chains to handle and extract boxes, it is recommended
that each corner is lifted approximately 50mm to break any initial cohesion before
attempting to lift out with 4-leg chain. N.B. If a box becomes stuck very high extraction
forces can be required to release each corner. In this instance MGF recommend either
a ground reduction or to install sheets around the perimeter to break the stiction.
12. Prior to every lifting operation all lifting points must be carefully inspected by a
competent person for evidence of damage.
13. Always enter trench box via a ladder located within the box and never from an
unsupported edge.
14. During lifting or extraction operations ensure personnel are well clear of the equipment.
15. Ends of trench runs should always be battered back at a safe angle.

EDGESAFE
GRP See Section 7
LADDER

GRiPSHORE+
TRENCH
BOX TOP
GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX

GRiPSHORE+
TRENCH
BOX BASE

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS GUIDANCE

FOR MGF GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOXES

mgf.co.uk/products/gripshore-plus-trench-box

9.1.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SIZE OPTIONS

GRiPSHORE+ boxes are available in 8 configurations. Use the

kit codes below to specify the required size, Part A covers the
length and height of the box, Part B covers the trench width.

Li
We
T Wi

H
D

Kit Code GS-xx-x-Sx

Part A Part B L

GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX

GS-xx-x -Sx

Full Box Assembled

Description Weight
(L x D) (kg)
GS-12-2 2.0m x 1.2m 183 - 193
GS-12-3 3.0m x 1.2m 224 - 233
Kit Code (Part A)

GS-20-2 2.0m x 2.0m 308 - 328

GS-20-3 3.0m x 2.0m 373 - 393 Trench Width
GS-24-2 2.0m x 2.4m 367 - 386 (We)
GS-24-3 3.0m x 2.4m 448 - 468 S1 1000 - 1400
Kit Code
(Part B)

GS-28-2 2.0m x 2.8m* 413 - 433 S2 1400 - 1800

GS-28-3 3.0m x 2.8m* 503 - 522 S3 1800 - 2200

*Depths of 2.8m must be accompanied by a design issued through MGF’s Design Department.

CONTACT US [email protected] 9.1.3

 GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
Li
We

T Wi

Product ID

4.007 4.008 4.009 4.010

Description 2000x1200 2000x800 3000x1200 3000x800

GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX

L × H (mm) Base Top Base Top

Panel Resistance
30 30 20 20
(kN/m2)

Panel Thick /
58 / 65 58 / 42 58 / 85 58 / 54
Weight T(mm)/(kg)

Internal Trench
880 - 2080 880 - 2080 880 - 2080 880 - 2080
Width Wi(mm)

External Trench
1000 - 2200 1000 - 2200 1000 - 2200 1000 - 2200
Width We(mm)

Clearance Below
Bottom Strut 770 N/A 770 N/A
C(mm)

Clearance Between
1840 1840 2840 2840
Struts Li(mm)

9.1.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

TRENCH DEPTH / PANEL CONFIGURATION

Depth Configuration
D (m)
1.2 1 Base

2 1 Base, 1 Top

2.4 2 Bases

2.8 1 Base, 2 Tops

VERTICAL STRUTS

860

360
735

GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX

360

360
460

2876
1210
950

2491
810

2076

360
1216

1 1 1 1
Ø3 Ø3 Ø3 Ø3
806

806

806

806
1216

4.620 4.621 4.622 4.623

11.4012
11.4012
11.4012
11.4012 11.4020
11.4020
11.4020
11.4020 11.4024
11.4024
11.4024
11.4024 11.4028
11.4028
11.4028
11.4028

CONTACT US [email protected] 9.1.5

 Trench Depth Weight Each

(mm) (kg)
4.620 0 - 1200 10
Strut Type

4.621 1200 - 2000 17

Vertical

4.622 2000 - 2400 19

4.623 2400 - 2800 22

VERTICAL STRUTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Product ID

4.620 4.621 4.622 4.623

70x70x3 SHS 70x70x3 SHS 70x70x3 SHS 70x70x3 SHS

(vert) (vert) (vert) (vert)
Specification
60x60x3 SHS 60x60x3 SHS 60x60x3 SHS 60x60x3 SHS
(horiz) (horiz) (horiz) (horiz)

Material Grade S700 S700 S700 S700

Height (mm) 1200 2000 2400 2800

Axial SWL
80 80 80 80
(kN)
Moment SWL*
15 15 15 15
(kNm)
GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX

Extraction SWL
30 30 30 30
(kN)

Weight (kg) 10 17 19 22

*This figure is the moment resistance in combination with the panel soldier.

9.1.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 HORIZONTAL STRUTS

1.404
1.404 706

1.404
1.405
4.624
Ø31

1106

1.405
4.625
Ø31

1.405 1506
Ø31
1.406
4.626

1.406 Internal Trench Width Weight Each

1.406 4.624
(mm)
1000 - 1400
(kg)
4
Horizontal
Strut Type

4.625 1400 - 1800 7

4.626 1800 - 2200 9

GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX

HORIZONTAL STRUTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Product ID

4.624 4.625 4.626

Specification 70x70x3 SHS 70x70x3 SHS 70x70x3 SHS

Material Grade S700 S700 S700

Length (mm) 706 1106 1506

Axial SWL
80 80 80
(kN)
Moment SWL
7 7 7
(kNm)

Weight (kg) 4 7 9

CONTACT US [email protected] 9.1.7

 PINS AND RETAINING CLIPS
Product ID 4.109
Ø28mm round bar
Specification

Component
110mm long
Material Grade 605M36 (EN16T)
Shear SWL (kN) 80
Weight (kg) 1

1200mm1200mm
BASE BASE 1200mm1200mm
BASE BASE
& 800mm
& 800mm
TOP TOP

MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED
1200mm BASE
0.00m 0.00m
DEPTHS / CONFIGURATIONS
0.00m 0.00m
1200mm BASE 1200mm BASE BASE
1200mm
& 800mm TOP TOP -0.40m -0.40m
& 800mm
1200MM BASE -0.40m -0.40m 1200MM BASE &
0.00m
0.00m 0.00m 1 NO. 800MM TOP 0.00m 0.00m
0.00m

-0.40m
-0.40m -0.40m -0.40m
-0.40m -0.40m
-1.22m -1.22m -1.21m -1.21m

-1.22m
-1.22m -1.22m -1.21m
-1.21m -1.21m
-2.02m -2.02m

-2.02m
-2.02m -2.02m

2No. 1200mm
2No. 1200mm
BASES BASES 1200mm1200mm
BASE BASE
2NO. 1200MM BASES &1200MM
2 NO.&800mm
2 NO.&800mm
BASE TOPS TOPS
GRiPSHORE+ TRENCH BOX

2 NO. 800MM TOPS

0.00m 0.00m
0.00m 0.00m 0.00m
0.00m
2No. 1200mm BASESBASES
2No. 1200mm 1200mm BASE BASE
1200mm
& 2 NO.& 800mm TOPS TOPS
2 NO. 800mm

0.00m -0.68m
-0.68m 0.00m
-0.68m 0.00m 0.00m
-0.80m
-0.80m -0.80m

-0.68m -0.68m
-0.80m -0.80m
-1.63m -1.63m
-1.63m

-2.01m
-2.01m -2.01m
-1.63m -1.63m
-2.43m -2.43m
-2.43m
-2.01m -2.01m
-2.82m
-2.82m -2.82m
-2.43m -2.43m

-2.82m -2.82m

9.1.8 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE, FOUR-SIDED EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
DESIGNED TO BE BUILT BY HAND AND INSTALLED BY AN EXCAVATOR
UTILISING THE DIG AND DROP TECHNIQUES.
Normally selected for end chambers on rail projects or installing small to medium utilities
where ground movement is not critical. The boxes provide support for excavations 2m
wide x 2m long x 2m deep and can be supplied with various openings to allow utilities to
branch off. The box has an internal working space of 1.85 x 1.85m and the struts have an
understrut clearance of 0.77m.
Fabricated from a blend of pultruded GRP (grade E17 to BS EN 13706) and S700 steel to
form 58mm thick panels, the system comprises of 0.4m high panels which can be stacked
into the channels of GRiPSHORE+ panels.
MGF can supply the systems with a full range of suitable lifting chains, Edgesafe edge
protection panels and GRP or epoxy coated steel ladders, Counterbalance Davitsafe
retrieval / fall arrest system and confined spaces regime equipment. Manufactured and
designed in accordance with BS EN 13331 : 2002 Parts 1 and 2 Trench lining systems and
BS 5975 (2019) Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible
stress design of falsework.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Boxes should only be used in the
configurations shown by competent persons
following MGF installation guidelines.
2. Boxes should be used in ground which is self-
supporting in the short-term to allow for the
dig and drop technique. Never push panels
into the ground using the excavator bucket.
3. Over dig the trench dimensions by 100mm
so that the box can be positioned without
resistance. Ensure that any gaps between the
outer face of the panels and the sides of the
excavation are sufficiently backfilled to avoid
injury.
4. Do not push down on the box with a machine during installation.
5. Boxes are not normally suitable for usage where ground movement is an issue and are
therefore not recommended for use in live carriageway situations or adjacent existing
buildings or structures.
6. Flying of the box above the base of the excavation is not recommended.
7. It is possible to man-handle individual components, but only undertake this if
GRP STACKSHORE
comfortable to do so with good manual handling techniques.
8. Assembled box systems range from 365kg to 416kg, ensure a suitable excavator for
handling, installing and extracting these systems.
9. If stacking panels on site, timber packers must be used to separate the panels.
10. Boxes should not be left in-situ for extended periods within cohesive or very weak soils
as earth pressures / adhesion on the panel surfaces may increase significantly with
time requiring additional extraction forces to release the panels.
11. Always use MGF specified chains to handle and extract boxes, it is recommended
that each corner is lifted approximately 50mm to break any initial cohesion before
attempting to lift out with 4-leg chain. N.B. If a box becomes stuck very high
extraction forces can be required to release each corner. In this instance MGF
recommend either a ground reduction or to install sheets around the perimeter to
break the stiction.

CONTACT US [email protected] 9.2.1

 12. Prior to every lifting operation all lifting points must be carefully inspected by a
competent person for evidence of damage.
13. Always enter the box via a ladder located within the box and never from an
unsupported edge.
14. During lifting or extraction operations ensure personnel are well clear of the
equipment.

EDGESAFE
See Section 7

GRP
LADDER

GRiPSHORE+
TRENCH
BOX TOP

GRP
STACKSHORE
PANEL
GRIPSHORE+
TRENCH
BOX BASE
GRP STACKSHORE

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF GRP STACKSHORE

mgf.co.uk/products/grp-stackshore

9.2.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 OPENING OPTIONS

All GRP STACKSHORE boxes provide support for excavations 2m wide x 2m

long x 2m deep, however there are 6 options for openings, please see below
the KIT CODE required for different options.

Full Box Description Weight

Openings (L x D) (KG)
SS-20-0 No opening - 2x2m GRP GRP STACKSHORE box 416
SS-20-1 1 opening - 2x2m GRP GRP STACKSHORE box 391
Kit Code

SS-20-2 2 opening (straight) - 2x2m GRP STACKSHORE box 365

SS-20-2-90 2 openings (90°) - 2x2m GRP STACKSHORE box 406
SS-20-3 3 openings - 2x2m GRP STACKSHORE box 417
SS-20-4 4 openings - 2x2m GRP STACKSHORE box 396

GRP STACKSHORE

CONTACT US [email protected] 9.2.3

 GRP STACKSHORE COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS

We
We
Wi
Wi

T
H

Product ID

4.007 4.008 4.011

Description 2000x1200 GRiPSHORE+ 2000x800 GRiPSHORE+ 2000x400

L × H (mm) Trench Box Base Trench Box Top STACKSHORE

Panel Resistance
20* 20* 20
(kN/m2)
GRP STACKSHORE

Panel Thick /
58 / 65 58 / 42 58/18
Weight T(mm)/(kg)

Internal Trench
1850 1850 1850
Width Wi(mm)

External Trench
2000 2000 2000
Width We(mm)

Clearance Below
Bottom Strut 770 n/a n/a
C(mm)

*Reduced capacity when GRiPSHORE+ Trench Box panels are used with STACKSHORE.

9.2.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

VERTICAL STRUT
Product ID 4.620
Specification 70x70x3 SHS (vert)
60x60x3 SHS (horiz)
Material Grade S700
Height (mm) 1200

Component
Protruding Arm
360
Length (mm)
Axial SWL (kN) 80
Moment SWL
15*
(kNm)
Hole Diameter
31
(mm)
Weight (kg) 10

*This figure is the moment resistance in

combination with the panel soldier.

HORIZONTAL STRUT
Product ID 4.626
Specification 70x70x3 SHS
Material Grade S700
Length (mm) 1506
Component

Axial SWL (kN) 80

Moment SWL
7
(kNm)
Hole Diameter
31
(mm)
Weight (kg) 9
GRP STACKSHORE

PINS AND RETAINING CLIPS

Product ID 4.109
Ø28mm round bar
Specification
Component

110mm long
Material Grade 605M36 (EN16)
Shear SWL (kN) 80
Weight (kg) 1

CONTACT US [email protected] 9.2.5

 90° CORNER BRACKET

Product ID 4.111
COMPOUND SECTION
120x60x3.6 RHS,
Material Grade
grade S355 c/w S700

Component
channels
Safe Working Moment
11.5
Capacity (kNm)
Shear SWL (kNm) 60
Weight (kg) 23

TOP TO BASE CONNECTOR

Product ID 4.110
Section 60x60x3 SHS
Material Grade S700
Component

Safe Working Moment

5
Capacity (kNm)
Horizontal
Shear SWL (kN) 80

Extraction SWL (kN) 30

Weight (kg) 3.5
GRP STACKSHORE

EXTRACTION BRACKET

Product ID 4.112
Section 60x60x3 SHS
Component

Material Grade S700

Extraction SWL (kN) 30
Weight (kg) 2

9.2.6 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

CONCRETE PIPE AND
CULVERT EQUIPMENT

PIPE LIFTER 10.1

CULVERT PULLERS 10.2
MANHOLE RING LIFTER 10.3
MANHOLE SHUTTERS 10.4
Pipe Lifter
THE MGF PIPE LIFTER HAS BEEN DESIGNED SOLELY TO ALLOW AN
EXCAVATOR TO PICK UP AND LAY DOWN DN300 – DN1200 CONCRETE PIPES
WITHOUT THE NEED FOR AN OPERATIVE TO CONTACT EITHER THE PIPE OR
THE PIPE LIFTER. THERE ARE 4 DIFFERENT BOLTED HEAD PLATES THAT
ALLOW THE PIPE LIFTER TO BE USED WITH A WIDE RANGE OF EXCAVATOR
QUICK COUPLERS.
The Pipe Lifter is CE marked in accordance with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Please read MGF Pipe
Lifter user manual and
Safe System of Work
Guide before use.
2. Ensure that a valid LOLER
test certificate is available
to site prior to use.
3. The Pipe Lifter must only
be used for lifting and
laying concrete pipes.
4. Always ensure that the
operation has been risk
assessed.
5. Ensure all personnel are
stood well clear and turned to face the operation.
6. During operations always ensure that should the pipe rotate, slip or slide in the clamp
that no personnel can come into contact with the pipe.
7. Ensure correct bolted head plate is fitted and bolts are fully tightened (recommended
minimum torque 300Nm).
8. The Pipe Lifter should be off-loaded and stored in the safety carry frame.
9. Customers are to ensure that a suitable lifting plan is in place prior to commencing
work and that any plant being used is appropriate for the intended operation. Never lift
over personnel.
10. The clamping plate has two available settings, an upper hole for clamping DN300 -
DN450 diameter pipes and a lower hole for use with DN525 – DN 1200mm diameter
pipes.
11. Insert the full length of the lifting arm into the collared end of the concrete pipe. Ensure
that the pipe surfaces in contact with the clamp are free from any lubricants or dirt.
12. The excavator operator must have a clear view of the Pipe Lifter at all stages of the
operation.
13. The pipe may now be lifted and transferred to a suitable storage location or placed into
the prepared trench.
PIPE LIFTER

14. Depending on the weight of pipe, depth of installation and lifting capacity of site plant,
the pipe may be tilted up to 30 degrees from horizontal and manoeuvred between struts
on the trench support system.
15. The Pipe Lifter can also be used to push the pipe into position.
16. When the pipe is in its final position and the ground has taken the full weight of the
pipe, the Pipe Lifter should be slowly lowered to release the clamp plate after which the
Pipe Lifter can be carefully retracted.
17. The excavator should never be left whilst a pipe is suspended in the Pipe Lifter.

CONTACT US [email protected] 10.1.1

 Pipe Lifter 680kg

Bolted
Head
Plate
220kg
(max.)
Safety carry
frame 200kg

Pipe Lifter SWL 3700kg

Allowable concrete pipe sizes DN300-DN1200, Max. Length = 2625mm
Component

Pipe Lifter Weight 680kg

Bolted Head Weight 220kg max.
Safety Carry Frame 200kg
Max. tilt when carrying pipes 30°
Bolted head - bolting details M20 x 100 bolts and nuts

PIPE LIFTER BOLTED HEAD

- QUICK COUPLER COMPATIBILITY

MGF Pipe Lifter Geith Quick Miller Quick Hill TEFRA Quick
Bolted Head Pin Size Coupler Coupler Coupler
(mm)
65 QC65H, QH65M Range 4 Tefra 13t
Tefra 16t, Tefra 21t,
80 QC80H, QH80M Range 5, Range 6
Tefra 25t
90 QC90H, QH90M Range 7, Range 8 Tefra 30t
100 QC100H Range 8, Range 9 Tefra 35t
PIPE LIFTER

For other quick coupler manufacturers, please contact MGF for further details.

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF PIPE LIFTERS

mgf.co.uk/products/pipe-lifter

10.1.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

MGF CULVERT PULLERS ARE MECHANICAL DEVICES DESIGNED FOR THE
FAST AND SAFE METHOD OF INSTALLING PRE-CAST CONCRETE CULVERTS
AND PIPES WITH THE ACCURACY NEEDED TO ACHIEVE SPECIFIED JOINT
TOLERANCES.
The MGF Culvert Puller has a hydraulic pulling capacity of 14t. Powered by either battery
or electrical generators, the Culvert Pullers incorporate a robust steel frame and hydraulic
cylinder that when used in conjunction with steel 203UC/254UC pulling beams or steel
pulling hooks can pull a range of pre-cast concrete culverts or pipes.
The units lock into position by clamping directly to the culvert ceilings using an integrated
hydraulic cylinder. The pulling beams are connected to the culvert puller using a
combination of rigid steel pulling links and a 2-leg chain, the pulling hooks simply connect
to the unit using pulling links.
Various adaptors are available to expand the range or to suit specific culvert / pipe
specifications and bespoke beams and fittings are available upon request. Please contact
MGF for further details.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Operators should familiarise themselves
with the relevant user guides or Safe
System of Work guidance available on
MGF’s website mgf.co.uk.
2. Proper shoring and safety precautions
must be in place when working below
ground level.
3. Ensure appropriate PPE is used when operating the equipment.
4. If any damage to the puller unit occurs, please stop work immediately and contact MGF.
5. Never attempt to fix or modify the machine, upon observing any damage, leaking oil or
the machine is not working correctly, contact MGF immediately.
6. Write a lifting plan, risk assessment and method statement identifying safety
procedures as deemed necessary by an experienced operator.
7. Function check all controls prior to starting works.
8. Ensure all bolts, pins and r-clips are securely fitted.
9. Inspect all components before the start of every shift.
10. Always provide suitable exclusion zones around the units during assembly and
installation. CULVERT PULLERS
11. Always be aware of individual component weights and final assembly weights using
adequate lifting equipment and good manual handling practices where appropriate.
12. Always relieve pressure before re-entering the culvert to inspect the joint.
13. All operators of this equipment should actively practice the following:
- Be familiar with operating the controls while running the machine.
- Be familiar with emergency shutdown procedures.
- Always provide new operators with appropriate training.
- NEVER allow an inexperienced person to operate the machine without proper training.
- ALWAYS take necessary precautions to protect yourself from pressurised hydraulic
fluid. If damage or an oil leak is found contact MGF immediately, NEVER attempt to
make personal checks or repairs.
14. Culvert Pullers can be used in pairs for heavier culverts, each pulling beam is suitable
for double pulls. For further details please contact MGF.

CONTACT US [email protected] 10.2.1

 Product ID

CPP-ELEC CPP-BATT

Description MGF Culvert Puller

Pulling Capacity (t) 14

Culvert Inside Height 1220-3050*

(mm)

Pulling Options Pulling Beam or Pulling Hooks

Power Options 6kVA 32A Generator 12V Battery

Puller Weight 350

(kg)

Remote Operation Corded Wireless or Corded

Culvert Pullers can be used in pairs for heavier culverts, each pulling beam is suitable for double pulls.
For further details please contact MGF. *Adaptors available to allow smaller, or bigger culverts / pipes to
be pulled, see page 10.2.5 for further details.

For full details on how to setup and operate the MGF Culvert Pullers, please refer to the
Culvert Puller User Guide available on the MGF website mgf.co.uk.
CULVERT PULLERS

FOR SAFE SYSTEM OF WORKS

GUIDANCE FOR MGF CULVERT PULLERS

mgf.co.uk/products/culvert-puller

10.2.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

MGF CULVERT PULLER

The MGF Culvert Puller has a pulling

capacity of 14t. There are 2 types of
machines, battery powered and generator
powered. The unit features a self-releasing
hydraulically operated vertical strut
which can be used with pre-cast concrete
pipes and culverts between 1.2m and
3.0m internal height. There are 2 pulling
options, pulling hooks or pulling beams.
The pulling beams are available in lengths
from 2.0m to 6.0m. Each pulling beam
features telescopically adjustable feet
which are adjusted to suit the thickness
of pipe or culvert being pulled. A range of
pulling hooks are available to suit culvert
thicknesses of 220mm to 320mm.

The MGF Culvert Puller is

delivered to site in a carry frame
(300kg) which includes all the Stillage
components detailed below:

Upper Shoe Inner Post

Lift Here

Battery
Strut Cylinder / Electric
Standard
Strut
Pulling Beam
Selector
Value

Power
Unit

CULVERT PULLERS
Lower Shoe
Pull Cylinder

Strut Extensions

Medium Pulling Link Short Pulling Link Key Link

Long Pulling Link

Pulling Hook

Pulling Chains

CONTACT US [email protected] 10.2.3

 MGF CULVERT PULLER PULLING BEAMS

Description Weight
(kg)

6.412 2.0m Pulling Beam 275

6.413 3.0m Pulling Beam 360
Product ID

6.414 4.0m Pulling Beam 450

6.415 5.0m Pulling Beam 535
6.416 6.0m Pulling Beam 775
CULVERT PULLERS

10.2.4 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

MGF CULVERT PULLER ADAPTORS
FRONT MOUNT TUBE

The Front Mount Tube is

compatible with both MGF
Culvert Pullers and simply
bolts to the front of the unit to
allow the Puller to sit outside
the culvert or pipe. This
enables the unit to pull pipes
and culverts with less than
1.2m internal height.

Component Product ID Weight

(kg)
Battery Powered Culvert Puller Front Mount Tube 6.420 60

Generator Powered Culvert Puller Front Mount Tube 6.422 77

HEAVY-DUTY STRUT
& HEAVY-DUTY
STRUT EXTENSIONS

The Heavy-Duty Struts and

Extensions are compatible with both
MGF Culvert Pullers and enable
Culverts with internal heights
between 3.0m and 4.26m to be pulled.
CULVERT PULLERS

Product ID Description Weight

(kg)
6.430 HD Strut 40

6.431 HD Strut Extension 25

CONTACT US [email protected] 10.2.5

Manhole Ring Lifter
THE MGF MANHOLE RING LIFTER HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO QUICKLY ADJUST
AND GRAB PRE-CAST CONCRETE MANHOLE RINGS, MAKING IT EASY FOR ONE
PERSON TO USE FOR BOTH LIFTING AND LOWERING. IT ATTACHES QUICKLY
TO TRACKED EXCAVATORS AND WHEELED LOADERS BY THE USE OF THE
LIFTING EYE. WEIGHING ONLY 95KG THE UNIT CAN BE ADJUSTED TO SUIT
DIFFERENT RING SIZES IN A MATTER OF SECONDS.
With a WLL of 2500kg the base unit is capable of lifting concrete manhole rings from
900mm nominal diameter to 1500mm, with the use of an adaptor, manhole rings of up to
1800mm nominal diameter can be handled.
The Manhole Ring Lifter can be used for offloading and installing uncoated manhole rings
in accordance with BS 5911:2002 Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products and BS
EN 1917:2002 Concrete manholes and inspection chambers. No operatives are required
to enter the bed of the vehicle for offloading, while the rings can be handled and installed
solely by the excavator driver.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Prior to every lifting operation the user
must ensure that the Manhole Ring Lifter
is suited for the intended operation, that
it is fully functioning, has been suitably
inspected and that the loads are not
damaged and suitable to be handled.
Never exceed the lifting capacity.
2. The excavator must have a sufficient
lifting capacity to handle the Manhole
Ring Lifter and the load at the anticipated
levels / reach required for installation.
3. Only skilled operatives should be allowed to carry out the installation, maintenance and
repair work of the Manhole Ring Lifters.
4. When handling manhole rings using the Manhole Ring Lifter it is essential that the lift
be in close proximity to the ground, under no circumstance should the units be lifted
over operatives. When in use there should be no operatives in the working area.
5. Ensure that the Manhole Ring Lifter is installed level prior to lifting the manhole ring, if

MANHOLE RING LIFTER

the lifting grips hang diagonally then it must be released and re-installed so it is level.
6. It is essential that the load being lifted is always in the range of the vision of the
operator.
7. Ensure care is taken when using the Manhole Ring Lifter whilst tracking over uneven
ground, track slowly and do not use jerky motions.
8. The Manhole Ring Lifter must never be subjected to a force acting in a lateral direction
due to diagonal pulling.
9. When using the Manhole Ring Lifter to install manhole rings with step irons the lifting
brackets should not be positioned too close to the step irons. It is recommended to
mark on the external of the manhole rings to ensure the step irons are all in-line with
each other when installed.
10. The Manhole Ring Lifter has numerous moving parts, be aware of pinch points and
finger trap hazards.
11. Maintenance to the Manhole Ring Lifter is only permitted when the device is shut down,
if any cracks, splits or damaged parts are identified during an inspection or during use,
then use of the Manhole Ring Lifter must be stopped immediately.
12. It is recommended to regularly check the screws and nuts are sufficiently tightened.

CONTACT US [email protected] 10.3.1

SAFETY PRODUCTS
MGF’s wide range of safety products offer efficient and cost saving solutions.
All safety products are available for hire and sale including: working at height,
confined space entry, personal protecting, pipe stoppers, manhole handling
and flood defence.

FOR MORE INFORMATION CONTACT:

08083 028 832

[email protected]
MGF MANHOLE SHUTTER PANELS ARE PRE-FORMED STEEL SHUTTERS THAT
COMBINE QUICKLY AND EASILY TO CREATE TEMPORARY FORMWORK FOR
POURING A NOMINAL 150MM THICK CONCRETE SURROUND TO PRE-CAST
CONCRETE MANHOLE RINGS. THE RANGE COMPRISES 3 DIFFERENT ROLLED
PANEL LENGTHS, AVAILABLE IN A HEIGHT OF 1800MM AND ARE SUITABLE
FOR MANHOLE RING NOMINAL DIAMETERS FROM 675MM TO 2700MM. THIS
RANGE CAN BE EXTENDED UPON REQUEST USING SUITABLE STRAPPING OR
SUPPORT. PLEASE CONTACT MGF DESIGN FOR FURTHER DETAILS.
The panels are manufactured out of 3mm thick rolled S355 steel and 5mm thick S355 steel
angles, they are assembled to the correct size as detailed below and connect together using
a simple pin and wedge connecting detail. Once assembled the system should be installed
immediately around the concrete ring by attaching a 4-leg chain to the panel lift points and
lowering in place. Ensure the panels are fully founded on level, stable ground and that all
connecting pins and wedges are in place and secure prior to pouring in the concrete. Timber
packers may be required to centralise the panels around the manhole rings. MGF can supply
Manhole Ring Safety Platforms to assist with this process.
Once the concrete has adequately set, the connecting pins and wedges should be
disconnected by striking with a hammer to allow the panels to be lifted out of the excavation.

PRODUCT NOTES
1. Prior to use:
- Inspect all lifting and connection points for damage.
- Ensure that wedges and pins are present and clean from concrete and debris.
- Ensure that faces of connecting angles are clean of debris, fully clamped and flush
along their full length.
- Consider the use of a concrete release agent to help prevent the concrete from sticking.
2. Before pouring concrete, ensure all pins and wedges are secure and in place.
3. The shutters are for single height pours only. Do not stack for extra height.
4. During use, visually check panels and joints for any signs of
movement or cracking from a safe distance.
5. Each shutter has two lifting points. Use only lifting points for
attaching chains. Do not snatch the chain during removal.
6. Always use a banksman and ensure that panels are not
lifted over personnel.
7. During use it is advised to periodically check that the MANHOLE SHUTTERS
panel does not develop any splits or holes and that the
connector holes are intact, there is no damage to the
lifting points and that the pins and wedges are kept
clean from concrete.
8. After the concrete has adequately set,
strike to release the wedges and remove
pins before releasing the panels from
the concrete and lifting each panel
individually out of the excavation.
9. It is advised to limit the pour heights of
the concrete to no more than 300mm
increments and that the rate of rise is
limited to 1m per hour.

CONTACT US [email protected] 10.4.1

 Height of Panel (mm) 1800

Component H A B C
Length of Panel (mm) 1520 640 300
Weight (kg) 81 43 29
Product ID 7.102 7.104 7.106

‘X’ ‘Y’ Panel

Manhole Thickness combination ‘Z’
ring of for approx. External Theoretical Approx.
internal manhole 150mm concrete diameter thickness concrete
diameter ring surround of concrete of concrete volume

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (m³)

MANHOLE SHUTTERS

A B C 1800 H
675 65 1 3 0 1095 145 0.78
900 75 2 1 2 1362 156 1.06
1050 85 3 0 1 1547 164 1.28
1200 100 3 1 1 1751 176 1.56
1350 112 3 2 0 1859 143 1.38
1500 115 4 0 1 2031 151 1.60
1800 115 4 2 0 2343 157 1.94
2100 120 4 3 1 2661 161 2.26
2400 135 6 0 1 2998 163 2.63
2700 162 6 2 0 3310 143 2.56

10.4.2 LATEST PRODUCTS AND DOWNLOADS mgf.co.uk

 MANHOLE SHUTTERS

HANDLING POINT DETAIL PIN AND WEDGE DETAIL

Each Manhole Shutter Manhole Shutter panels are connected to
panel should be handled by each other via a simple pin and wedge detail
attaching MGF lifting chains to as shown. Secure wedges into the pin using
the handling point as shown. a single hammer blow.

CONTACT US [email protected] 10.4.3

EXTENSIVE RANGE OF
LIFTING PRODUCTS
AVAILABLE
MGF’s range of lifting products encompass a wide selection of high-quality lifting equipment,
including chain slings, shackles, lever hoists, beam clamps and trollies. We also offer a
testing and inspection service in support of all our lifting products.
As full members of the Lifting Equipment Engineers Association (LEEA), our customers have
the reassurance that our products and services conform to the current industry standard.

FOR MORE INFORMATION, CONTACT A MEMBER OF OUR TEAM:

[email protected]
08083 028 832
OPERATING IN SCOTLAND!
Ideally located in West Lothian - Livingston, MGF’s Scotland depot ensures we continue
to provide safe excavation and above ground structural support solutions to our
customers across Scotland.

CONTACT US FOR SUPPORT WITH YOUR NEXT PROJECT:

[email protected] 08083 028 832

 Export HEAD OFFICE ENGINEERING
products GRANT HOUSE CENTRE
available LOCKETT ROAD FOUNDATION HOUSE
worldwide ASHTON IN WALLWORK ROAD
MAKERFIELD ASTLEY, MANCHESTER
WIGAN, WN4 8DE M29 7JT
T: 01942 402700 T: 01942 402704

mgf.co.uk EXCAVATION SAFETY

STRUCTURAL SUPPORT
[email protected]

NORTH EAST – DURHAM DEPOT

WEST LOTHIAN – LIVINGSTON DEPOT Thistle Road, Littleburn Ind. Est.
Letham Road, Houstoun Ind. Est. Langley Moor, County Durham
Livingston, West Lothian, EH54 5BY DH7 8HJ
T: 01925 598537 T: 01913 782100

WEST LOTHIAN – LIVINGSTON DEPOT

YORKSHIRE –
Letham Road, Houstoun Ind. Est.
CASTLEFORD DEPOT
Livingston, West Lothian, EH54 5BY
Allerton Bywater Business Park
T: 01506 535556
Newton Lane, Castleford
WF10 2AL
T: 01977 521930

NORTH WEST –
ASTLEY DEPOT
Wallwork Road
Astley, Manchester
M29 7JT EAST ANGLIA –
T: 01942 896282 STANTON DEPOT
Unit 5, O’Brien Ind. Est.
Grove Lane, Stanton
Bury St. Edmunds
NORTH WEST – Suffolk, IP31 2AR
WARRINGTON DEPOT T: 01359 252204
Clayton Road,
Birchwood, Warrington
WA3 6RP
T: 01925 598537

MIDLANDS –
RUGELEY DEPOT
Redbrook Lane
Brereton, Rugeley
Staffordshire, WS15 1QU
T: 01889 574777
DEPOT LOCATIONS

SOUTH WEST –
BRISTOL DEPOT
Severn Road LONDON –
Chittening DARTFORD DEPOT
Avonmouth Ray Lamb Way
Bristol, BS11 0YL Manor Road
T: 01179 820706 Erith, Kent, DA8 2LB
T: 01322 344520

SOUTH EAST – TRING DEPOT SOUTH EAST – TRING DEPOT

SOUTH WEST – EXETER DEPOT Unit 22a, Airfield Ind. Est. Units 21 & 22 Airfield Ind. Est.
Unit 58, Greendale Business Park Cheddington Lane Cheddington Lane
Woodbury Salterton, Exeter Long Marston, Tring Long Marston, Tring
EX5 1EW Hertfordshire, HP23 4QR Hertfordshire, HP23 4QR
T: 01395 233194 T: 01925 598537 T: 01296 663250
 mgf.co.uk
[email protected]

Astley | Bristol | Castleford | Dartford | Durham | Exeter | Livingston | Rugeley

Stanton | Tring | Warrington | Wigan

CBP023897